*ATP 3-20.97

Cavalry Troop 

6(37(0%(5

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; distribution is 

unlimited. 

*This publication supersedes ATTP 3-20.97, 16 November 2010 and FM 3-20.971,

4 August 2009. 

Headquarters, Department of the Army 
This publication is available at the Army Publishing 

Directorate site (http://ZZZDSGDUP\PLO),

and the Central Army Registry site

 (https://atiam.train.army.mil/catalog/dashboard)

To receive publishing updates, please subscribe at

(http://www.apd.army.mil/AdminPubs/new_subscribe.asp)
*ATP 3-20.97 (ATTP 3-20.97, FM 3-20.971)

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release, distribution will be unlimited. 

*This publication supersedes ATTP 3-20.97, 16 November 2010 and FM 3-20.971, 4 August 2009.

i 

*Army Techniques Publication

No. 3-20.97

Headquarters

Department of the Army 

Washington, DC, 6HSWHPEHU2016

Cavalry Troop 

Contents 

Page 

PREFACE............................................................................................................. vii

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................. viii

Chapter 1 ROLE OF THE CAVALRY TROOP ................................................................... 1-1

Section I – Operational Environment ............................................................. 1-1

Variables of the Operational Environment.......................................................... 1-1

Threats................................................................................................................ 1-2

Section II – Organizations................................................................................ 1-2

Capabilities and Limitations ................................................................................ 1-3

Armored Brigade Combat Team Cavalry Troop ................................................. 1-3

Infantry Brigade Combat Team Cavalry Troop................................................... 1-4

Stryker Brigade Combat Team Cavalry Troop ................................................... 1-7

Battlefield Surveillance Brigade Cavalry Troop .................................................. 1-8

Scout Platoon ..................................................................................................... 1-9

Chapter 2 MISSION COMMAND ........................................................................................ 2-1

Section I – Troop Mission Command ............................................................. 2-1

Section II – Troop Integration of Squadron Staff Products .......................... 2-2

Directed Friendly Course of Action ..................................................................... 2-3

Graphic Control Measures.................................................................................. 2-3

Information Collection Plan................................................................................. 2-3

Execution Matrix ................................................................................................. 2-3

Event Template .................................................................................................. 2-4

Latest Time Information is of Value .................................................................... 2-4

Fires Support Prodcuts ....................................................................................... 2-4

Task Organization .............................................................................................. 2-5

Assigning Platoon Tasks .................................................................................... 2-5

Section III – Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield/Battlespace ........... 2-5

Section IV – Orders .......................................................................................... 2-6

Section V – Responsibilities ........................................................................... 2-8

Troop Commander ............................................................................................. 2-8

Executive Officer ................................................................................................ 2-9
Contents 

ii ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

First Sergeant ......................................................................................................2-9

Scout Platoon Leader .......................................................................................2-10

Scout Platoon Sergeant ....................................................................................2-10

Fire Support Team ............................................................................................2-10

Mortar Section Sergeant ...................................................................................2-11

Communications Sergeant ................................................................................2-12

Company Intelligence Support Team ................................................................2-12

Combat Medics ................................................................................................. 2-12

Combat Repair Team ........................................................................................2-13

Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Noncommissioned Officer ....2-13

Supply Sergeant ................................................................................................2-13

Armorer and Supply Specialist ..........................................................................2-13

Chapter 3 RECONNAISSANCE TASKS ............................................................................. 3-1

Section I – Basics of Reconnaissance Tasks ................................................ 3-1

Reconnaissance Fundamentals ..........................................................................3-1

Reconnaissance Techniques ..............................................................................3-1

Reconnaissance Methods ...................................................................................3-2

Reconnaissance Sensor Assets .........................................................................3-3

Reconnaissance Management ...........................................................................3-3

Commanders Reconnaissance Guidance ..........................................................3-3

Focus ..................................................................................................................3-3

Tempo of Reconnaissance .................................................................................3-4

Engagement/Disengagement Criteria ................................................................. 3-4

Displacement Criteria ..........................................................................................3-4

Section II – Forms of Reconnaissance ........................................................... 3-4

Zone Reconnaissance ........................................................................................3-5

Area Reconnaissance .........................................................................................3-9

Route Reconnaissance .....................................................................................3-17

Reconnaissance in Force .................................................................................3-19

Special Reconnaissance ...................................................................................3-22

Section III – Reconnaissance Handover ....................................................... 3-22

Reconnaissance Handover Planning Considerations.......................................3-22

Preparation ........................................................................................................3-22

Execution ..........................................................................................................3-23

Chapter 4 SECURITY TASKS ............................................................................................. 4-1

Section I – Basics of Security Tasks............................................................... 4-1

Security Fundamentals .......................................................................................4-1

Methods and Management .................................................................................4-2

Commander’s Security Guidance .......................................................................4-2

Section II – Forms of Security ......................................................................... 4-2

Screen .................................................................................................................4-2

Stationary Screen ................................................................................................4-4

Moving Screen ....................................................................................................4-6

Guard ..................................................................................................................4-8

Cover .................................................................................................................4-11

Area Security .....................................................................................................4-12
Contents 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 iii 

Local Security ................................................................................................... 4-15

Counterreconnaissance .................................................................................... 4-16

Chapter 5 RECONNAISSANCE AND SECURITY IN DECISIVE ACTION TASKS .......... 5-1

Section I – Reconnaissance and Security in the Offense ............................ 5-1

Security Tasks in Support of the Offense ........................................................... 5-1

Reconnaissance Tasks in Support of the Offense ........................................... 5-13

Section II – Reconnaissance and Security in the Defense ......................... 5-31

Security Tasks in Support of the Defense ........................................................ 5-31

Reconnaissance Tasks in Support of the Defense .......................................... 5-51

Section III – Reconnaissance and Security in Stability .............................. 5-59

Security Tasks in Support of Stability ............................................................... 5-59

Reconnaissance Tasks in Support of Stability ................................................. 5-74

Chapter 6 AUGMENTATION .............................................................................................. 6-1

Section I – Brigade Combat Team Assets ..................................................... 6-1

Engineer Support ................................................................................................ 6-1

Fire Support ........................................................................................................ 6-2

Intelligence Support ............................................................................................ 6-6

Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Support .................................. 6-6

Section II – External Brigade Combat Team Assets ..................................... 6-7

Army Aviation Support ........................................................................................ 6-7

Air and Missile Defense Support ........................................................................ 6-9

Close Air Support ............................................................................................... 6-9

Explosive Ordnance Disposal Support ............................................................. 6-10

Civil Affairs Support .......................................................................................... 6-10

Religious Support ............................................................................................. 6-10

Military Information Support Operations ........................................................... 6-11

Chapter 7 SUSTAINMENT .................................................................................................. 7-1

Section I – Basics of Sustainment .................................................................. 7-1

Section II – Sustainment Planning .................................................................. 7-4

Sustaining Reconnaissance Operations ............................................................ 7-4

Sustaining Security Operations .......................................................................... 7-4

Sustainment Planning Requirements ................................................................. 7-5

Supporting Attachments and Detachments ........................................................ 7-6

Sustainment Communications ............................................................................ 7-7

Sustainment Reporting ....................................................................................... 7-7

Section III – Logistics Package Operations ................................................... 7-7

Troop Trains ....................................................................................................... 7-7

Supply Routes .................................................................................................... 7-8

Logistics Package Planning................................................................................ 7-8

Logistics Package Resupply .............................................................................. 7-8

Logistics Package Survivability .......................................................................... 7-9

Section IV – Troop Resupply Operations..................................................... 7-10

Resupply Site Selection .................................................................................... 7-10

Resupply Methods ............................................................................................ 7-10
Contents 

iv ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Section V – Maintenance ................................................................................ 7-13

Field Maintenance .............................................................................................7-13

Recovery ...........................................................................................................7-14

Battle Damage Assessment And Repair...........................................................7-14

Maintenance Collection Point ...........................................................................7-14

Section VI – Medical Support ......................................................................... 7-14

Appendix A ANALOG REPORTS ......................................................................................... A-1

Appendix B TROOP OPERATING DISTANCES .................................................................. B-1

Appendix C TROOP COMMAND POST ............................................................................... C-1

GLOSSARY .......................................................................................... Glossary-1

REFERENCES .................................................................................. References-1

INDEX ......................................................................................................... Index-1

Figures 

Figure 1-1. ABCT Cavalry Troop Organization ...................................................................... 1-4

Figure 1-2. IBCT Mounted Cavalry Troop Organization ........................................................ 1-6

Figure 1-3. IBCT Dismounted Cavalry Troop Organization ................................................... 1-7

Figure 1-4. SBCT Cavalry Troop Organization ...................................................................... 1-8

Figure 3-1. IBCT Troop Zone Reconnaissance ..................................................................... 3-6

Figure 3-2. ABCT Troop Area Reconnaissance .................................................................. 3-11

Figure 3-3. SBCT Troop Route Reconnaissance ................................................................ 3-18

Figure 4-1. SBCT Troop Stationary Screen ........................................................................... 4-6

Figure 4-2. ABCT Troop as Part of Squadron Guard .......................................................... 4-10

Figure 4-3. IBCT Troop as Part of Squadron Flank Guard .................................................. 4-11

Figure 5-1. IBCT Squadron Moving Screen, Offense ............................................................ 5-6

Figure 5-2. IBCT Troop Moving Screen ................................................................................. 5-7

Figure 5-3. IBCT Troop Moving Screen, Phase II and III ....................................................... 5-9

Figure 5-4. IBCT Troop Moving Screen, Phase IV and V .................................................... 5-11

Figure 5-5. SBCT Squadron Reconnaissance in Force, Offense ........................................ 5-15

Figure 5-6. SBCT Troop Reconnaissance in Force ............................................................. 5-16

Figure 5-7. SBCT Troop Reconnaissance in Force, Phase I............................................... 5-18

Figure 5-8. SBCT Troop Reconnaissance in Force, Phase II.............................................. 5-19

Figure 5-9. SBCT Troop Reconnaissance in Force, Phase III............................................. 5-20

Figure 5-10. ABCT Squadron Zone Reconnaissance, Offense ........................................... 5-24

Figure 5-11. ABCT Troop Zone Reconnaissance in the Offense ........................................ 5-25

Figure 5-12. ABCT Troop Zone Reconnaissance, Phase I ................................................. 5-26

Figure 5-13. ABCT Troop Zone Reconnaissance, Phase II ................................................ 5-28

Figure 5-14. ABCT Troop Zone Reconnaissance, Phase III ............................................... 5-29

Figure 5-15. ABCT Squadron Guard, Defense .................................................................... 5-33

Figure 5-16. ABCT Troop Guard .......................................................................................... 5-35
Contents 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 v 

Figure 5-17. ABCT Troop Guard, Phase I ............................................................................5-36

Figure 5-18. ABCT Troop Guard, Phase II ...........................................................................5-37

Figure 5-19. ABCT Troop Guard, Phase III ..........................................................................5-38

Figure 5-20. SBCT Squadron Area Security, Route ............................................................5-40

Figure 5-21. SBCT Troop Area Security, Route ...................................................................5-41

Figure 5-22. SBCT Troop Route Security, Phase I ..............................................................5-44

Figure 5-23. SBCT Troop Route Security, Phase II .............................................................5-46

Figure 5-24. SBCT Troop Route Security, Phase III ............................................................5-48

Figure 5-25. IBCT Squadron Route Reconnaissance, Defense ..........................................5-53

Figure 5-26. IBCT Squadron Route Reconnaissance, Time-Distance Estimates ................5-54

Figure 5-27. SBCT Squadron Screen, Stability ....................................................................5-60

Figure 5-28. Information Requirements ................................................................................5-61

Figure 5-29. SBCT Troop Screen, Stability ..........................................................................5-62

Figure 5-30. SBCT Troop Screen, Stability, Phase I ............................................................5-64

Figure 5-31. SBCT Troop Screen, Stability, Phase II ...........................................................5-65

Figure 5-32. SBCT Troop Screen, Stability, Phase III ..........................................................5-66

Figure 5-33. SBCT Squadron Area Security, Stability .........................................................5-69

Figure 5-34. SBCT Troop Area Security ..............................................................................5-70

Figure 5-35. SBCT Troop Area Security, Phase I ................................................................5-71

Figure 5-36. SBCT Troop Area Security, Phase II ...............................................................5-72

Figure 5-37. SBCT Squadron Area Reconnaissance, Stability ............................................5-75

Figure 5-38. SBCT Troop Area Reconnaissance ................................................................. 5-77

Figure 5-39. SBCT Troop Area Reconnaissance, Phase I ..................................................5-78

Figure 5-40. SBCT Troop Area Reconnaissance, Phase II .................................................5-80

Figure 7-1. Troop Service Station Resupply ........................................................................7-12

Figure B-1. ABCT Scout Platoon Operational Distance (Unrestrictive Terrain) .....................B-2

Figure B-2. ABCT Cavalry Troop Operational Distances (Unrestrictive Terrain) ...................B-3

Figure B-3. IBCT Scout Platoon Operational Distances (Severely Restrictive) .....................B-4

Figure B-4. IBCT Cavalry Troop Operational Distances (Severely Restrictive) .....................B-5

Figure B-5. IBCT Dismounted Scout Platoon .........................................................................B-6

Figure B-6. IBCT Dismounted Cavalry Troop .........................................................................B-7

Figure B- 7. SBCT Scout Platoon Operational Distances (Restrictive) ..................................B-8

Figure B-8. SBCT Cavalry Troop Operational Distances (Restrictive) ...................................B-9

Figure C-1. ABCT Cavalry Troop Command Post ................................................................ C-3

Figure C-2. IBCT Cavalry Troop Command Post .................................................................. C-4

Figure C-3. SBCT Cavalry Troop Command Post ................................................................ C-5
Contents 

vi ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Tables 

Table 2-1. Team Orders Development .................................................................................. 2-8

Table 6-1. Fire Support Capabilities (Mortars) ....................................................................... 6-3

Table 6-2. Air to Ground Check-In Brief ................................................................................. 6-7

Table 6-3. Attack Aviation Call for Fire .................................................................................. 6-8

Table 7-1. Supply Classes ..................................................................................................... 7-2

Table B-1. Scout Platoon Width/Depth Formula ..................................................................B-10

Table B-2. ABCT Cavalry Platoon Operational Distances in Unrestrictive Terrain .............B-11

Table B-3. IBCT Cavalry Platoon Operational Distances in Severely Restricted 

Terrain ..............................................................................................................B-11

Table B-4. SBCT Scout Platoon Operational Distances in Restricted Terrain ....................B-12

Table B-5. Cavalry Troop Optics Systems ...........................................................................B-13

Table B-6. ABCT Cavalry Squadron Weapon System List ..................................................B-14

Table B-7. IBCT Cavalry Squadron Weapon System List ...................................................B-15

Table B-8. SBCT Cavalry Squadron Weapon System List ..................................................B-16
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 vii 

Preface 

Army techniques and procedures (ATP) 3-20.97 provides framework and tactical employment principles for 

Cavalry troops of the Cavalry squadrons in the Armored brigade combat team (ABCT); the Infantry brigade 

combat team (IBCT), mounted and dismounted; the Stryker brigade combat team (SBCT); and the battlefield 

surveillance brigade (BFSB).

The principal audience for ATP 3-20.97 is all members of the military. Army headquarters commanders and staffs 

serving in joint task force or multinational headquarter positions should refer to this ATP for military and joint or 

multinational force operations. Trainers and educators throughout the Army should use this manual, also. 

Commanders, staffs, and subordinates ensure that their decisions and actions comply with applicable United 

States, international, and in some cases host-nation laws and regulations. Commanders at all levels ensure that 

their Soldiers operate according to the law of war and the rules of engagement. (See FM 27-10.) 

ATP 3-20.97 uses joint terms where applicable. Selected joint and Army terms and definitions appear in both the 

glossary and the text. For definitions shown in the text, the term is italicized and the number of the proponent 

publication follows the definition. This publication is not the proponent for any Army terms. 

ATP 3-20.97 applies to the Active Army, the Army National Guard/Army National Guard of the United States, 

the United States Army Reserve, Department of the Army civilians, and government contractors unless otherwise 

stated. Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns and pronouns refer to both men and women. 

The proponent agency is the United States Army Maneuver Center of Excellence (MCoE). Send comments and 

recommendations on Department of the Army (DA) Form 2028, (Recommended Changes to Publications and 

Blank Forms) to: 

Email: usarmy.benning.mcoe.mbx.doctrine@mail.mil 

U.S. Mail: Commanding General, MCoE 

Directorate of Training and Doctrine, Doctrine and Collective Training Division 

ATTN: ATZK-TDD (ATP 3-20.97) 

Fort Benning, GA 31905-5410
viii ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Introduction 

To understand ATP 3-20-97, the reader should review ADRP 3-0 and the doctrinal principles outlined 

ADRP 3-07, ADRP 3-90, FM 3-55, FM 3-90-2, FM 3-98, and ATP 3-20.96. The reader should understand 

offensive, defensive, and stability tasks, the operations process and its relation to the Army’s military decisionmaking process, and troop leading procedures described in ADRP 5-0. The reader also must understand the 

concepts associated with mission command as described in ADRP 6-0.

ATP 3-20.97 provides combined arms tactics that Cavalry troops use to conduct reconnaissance and appropriate 

security tasks. This publication is authoritative but requires judgement in application. 

The following summarizes each chapter of ATP 3-20.97: 

Chapter 1 discusses the operational environment and threat profiles that a Cavalry troop encounters while 

conducting operations. The chapter also describes the organization, equipment, capabilities, and limitations found 

in each type of brigade combat team (BCT) Cavalry troop. 

Chapter 2 discusses information that the Cavalry commander conducts and considers when developing mission 

orders. The chapter discusses mission command and the responsibilities of the commander, staff, and unit 

leadership during mission command. 

Chapter 3 discusses the basics of reconnaissance that includes forms of reconnaissance and reconnaissance 

handover. 

Chapter 4 is an overview of security tasks. It discusses the fundamentals of security, the forms of security, and 

the considerations when conducting security tasks. 

Chapter 5 discusses the Cavalry troop conducting reconnaissance and security to support squadron tasks during 

decisive action. Squadron tasks support BCT offense, defense, and stability tasks. 

Chapter 6 discusses the augmentation of combat forces that provide the Cavalry troop with enablers to enhance 

the effectiveness of the reconnaissance and security mission. 

Chapter 7 discusses how the Cavalry unit plans and organizes for sustainment tasks. Chapter 7 also discusses the 

different types of logistics packages (LOGPACs) and the operations, maintenance, field services, and Army health 

support system available for the Cavalry troop. 

The techniques and procedures discussed in this publication are specific examples of conducting a particular 

tactical enabling task. Collectively, they provide a set of tools that commanders use to employ tactical situations. 

The existing rules of engagement in a specific situation control the actual application of the techniques and 

procedures discussed in this publication. 
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 1-1 

Chapter 1 

Role of the Cavalry Troop 

As the eyes and ears of the squadron commander, the Cavalry troop is the squadron 

commander’s primary reconnaissance and security asset. Cavalry troops provide the 

information the commander needs to conduct better-informed planning, to direct 

operations, and to visualize the area of operations. The Cavalry troop skillfully 

conducts reconnaissance and security tasks to collect information about the threat’s 

location, disposition, and composition. As part of the squadron, the Cavalry troop 

provides reaction time and maneuver space for the BCT commander. In turn, these 

operations allow the BCT commander to shape the area of operations proactively and 

to accept or initiate contact at times and places of the commander’s choosing. Cavalry 

troops conduct reconnaissance and security tasks throughout the squadron and BCT 

area of operations.

SECTION I – OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT 

1-1. Cavalry units conduct reconnaissance and security tasks in close contact with enemy organizations and 

civilian populations. Cavalry organizations employ appropriate combinations of mounted and dismounted 

tactics and are able to both fight for information and develop the situation through stealthy tactics and 

observation based upon the mission variables of mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support 

available-time available and civil considerations (METT-TC). 

1-2. The commander and troop leadership use available information and knowledge to make timely and 

effective decisions. Commanders and leadership seek to build and maintain situational understanding 

throughout the operations process. Situational understanding is the product of applying analysis and 

judgment to relevant information to determine the relationships among the operational and mission variables 

to facilitate decision making (ADP 5-0). The considerations below apply to the two types of variables of an 

operating environment, operational variables and mission variables. (Refer to ADRP 3-0 for more 

information.) Section I also discusses the types of threat forces encountered within the operating 

environment. An operational environment is a composite of the conditions, circumstances, and influences 

that affect the employment of capabilities and bear on the decisions of the commander (JP 3-0). 

VARIABLES OF THE OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT 

1-3. Throughout the operations process, the commander takes into account the military and nonmilitary 

aspect of the operational area since they change from one area of operations to another and both impact on 

the conduct of operations. Operational variables describe the military aspects of an operational environment 

and the population’s influence on it. The two variables of the operational environment are operational 

variables and mission variables. Army planners analyze an operational environment in terms of eight 

interrelated operational variables: political, military, economic social, information, infrastructure, physical 

environment, and time. (Refer to ADRP 5-0 for more information.) 

1-4. The second type of variable is the mission variable, which describes characteristics of the area of 

operations focusing on how they might affect a mission. The mission variables are mission, enemy, terrain 

and weather, troops and support available-time available and civil considerations (METT-TC). (Refer to 

ADRP 5-0 for more information.) 
Chapter 1 

1-2 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

THREATS 

1-5. Cavalry troops conduct missions in a variety of operational environments. The most common threats 

that Cavalry units will likely encounter are hybrid threats. A hybrid threat is the diverse and dynamic 

combination of regular forces, irregular forces, terrorist forces, and/or criminal elements unified to achieve 

mutually benefitting effects (ADRP 3-0). Hybrid threats combine regular forces governed by international 

law, military custom, and tradition combined with unregulated forces that act with no restrictions on violence 

or targets. Hybrid threats can come in the form of nation-states or nonstates. Refer to ADRP 3-0 for more 

information. Also, refer to TC 7-100, TC 7-100.3, and TC 7-100.4. 

1-6. A threat is any combination of actors, entities, or forces that intend to harm United States forces, 

United States national interests, or the homeland (ADRP 3-0). Threats may include individuals, groups of 

individuals (organized or unorganized), paramilitary or military forces, nation-states, or national alliances. 

Threats become enemies when they execute their capability to do harm to the United States. 

1-7. An enemy is a party identified as hostile against which the use of force is authorized (ADRP 3-0). 

Cavalry units engage enemies in accordance with the rules of engagement of the area in which the troop 

operates and according to the laws of land warfare. An adversary is a party acknowledged as potentially

hostile to a friendly party and against which the use of force may be envisaged (JP 3-0). A neutral is a party 

identified as neither supporting nor opposing friendly or enemy forces. (ADRP 3-0). Land operation threats 

are more complex because a threat, an enemy, an adversary, a neutral, or a friend, often intermix with no 

easy means to distinguish one from another. 

REGULAR VERSUS IRREGULAR FORCES

1-8. The standing military units regulated by a nation-state or alliance of states characterize regular forces. 

The function of these forces is to provide military offense and defense in service to the state or alliance. 

Regular military units may also be involved directly or indirectly in coordination with both irregular and 

unconventional warfare operations as described in JP 3-05.

1-9. Irregular forces include revolutionary, paramilitary, militia, partisan, insurgent, guerrilla, 

covert/underground, mercenaries, and armed criminal elements. (See ATP 2-01.3, Table 5-1 for a description 

of these irregular forces.) Cavalry forces should expect to face hybrid threats when conducting 

reconnaissance and security tasks, and are likely to encounter irregular forces at a higher concentration than 

other maneuver forces. Irregular forces are not mutually exclusive and can move from one form to another. 

(Refer to TC 7-100 and TC 7-100.4 for more information about each component of a hybrid threat.) 

CRIMINAL ORGANIZATIONS

1-10. Cavalry forces may encounter criminal organizations. While there will always be criminal elements 

present in any operational environment, the question is whether those criminal organizations will find it in 

their interests to become part of a hybrid threat and attempt to achieve common goals and objectives to 

prevent legitimate control of areas, commerce, and the judicial system. Criminal organizations are normally 

independent of nation-state control. Large-scale criminal organizations often extend beyond national 

boundaries to operate regionally or worldwide and include a political influence component. Individual 

criminals or small gangs do not normally have the capability to affect legitimate host nation political, military, 

and judicial organizations adversely; however, this adverse influence may occur at the local government 

level. 

SECTION II – ORGANIZATIONS 

1-11. Below are the current capabilities and limitations common to each of the BCT Cavalry troops. Provided 

below are descriptions for the organization, equipment, capabilities, and limitations that are specific for each 

of the Cavalry troops. 
Role of the Cavalry Troop 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 1-3 

CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS 

1-12. The following general capabilities and limitations apply to all types of Cavalry troops. Specific troop 

capabilities center on the formation types discussed below. 

1-13. Each Cavalry troop can conduct simultaneous reconnaissance of up to six areas (one per scout section). 

The size of each area depends on factors such as the pattern of the road net, terrain features, anticipated 

enemy activity, reconnaissance tasks to perform, availability of unmanned aircraft systems (UAS) and Army 

aviation to support, and the time available. Each troop can conduct a detailed zone reconnaissance at a rate 

dependent on the terrain and execution of all the tasks associated with the mission. All Cavalry troops can 

reconnoiter two routes per platoon in a permissive no-threat environment, up to two routes as a troop in a 

low-threat environment, and one route as a troop in a medium to high-threat environment. When faced with 

a lightly equipped threat, each Cavalry troop can conduct either forceful or stealthy reconnaissance 

depending on the higher commander’s guidance. 

1-14. Cavalry troops can provide all weather, accurate, and timely reconnaissance and security in 

nonrestrictive, restrictive, and urban terrain using surveillance systems, mounted, and dismounted Scouts. In 

addition, all troops can conduct reconnaissance and security operations while rapidly developing the 

situation. Troops can fight for information and conduct counterreconnaissance while gathering information 

about hybrid threats and other information. 

1-15. Cavalry troops can employ integrated and synchronized reconnaissance and surveillance systems to 

defeat enemy deception, decoys, and cover and concealment that would otherwise remain undetected by 

single-capability surveillance means. 

1-16. Each Cavalry troop can also—

z Direct combat power, assesses situations, reconnaissance, and security capabilities to meet priority

intelligence requirements.

z Employ synchronized reconnaissance and surveillance systems and Scouts without the delays and

excessive compartmentalization associated with coordination intensive surveillance.

z Support targeting and target acquisition using available ground and aerial assets, including the fire

support team and UAS.

z Reduce risk and enhance survivability by providing information so the squadron can avoid contact

or achieve situational dominance if contact is necessary.

z Assist in shaping the operational environment by providing information or directing fires to disrupt

the enemy.

1-17. The general limitations of the Armored brigade combat team (ABCT), the Stryker brigade combat 

(SBCT), and the mounted Infantry brigade combat team (IBCT) Cavalry troops include limited dismounts 

within Scout sections, which require combining two or more Scout sections to generate the required 

dismounts to conduct long duration observation post. Additional limitations include the ability to conduct 

continuous screening operations and dismounted tasks associated with zone, area, route reconnaissance, and local 

security. 

ARMORED BRIGADE COMBAT TEAM CAVALRY TROOP 

1-18. The ABCT Cavalry troop organization includes a headquarters section, two Scout platoons, and a 

mortar section (see figure 1-1, page 1-4). The troop headquarters has a troop commander, an executive officer 

(XO), a first sergeant (1SG), a supply sergeant, a supply specialist, an operations noncommissioned officer 

(NCO), a chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) noncommissioned officer, and a forward 

signal support NCO. The two Scout platoons each have one platoon leader, one platoon sergeant, and three 

section leaders. The mortar section has a section leader, two squad leaders, two gunners, two assistant 

gunners, and two drivers. The mortar section has two armored 120-millimeter (mm) mortars (self-propelled). 

The ABCT Cavalry troop has the following equipment within each of the two Scout platoons: 

z M3A3 Cavalry fighting vehicle. Six for K-series modified table of organization and equipment

(MTOE).

z AN/TAS-8 Long-Range Advance Scout Surveillance System (LRAS3).
Chapter 1 

1-4 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Caliber .50 machine gun.

z M240B 7.62-mm machine gun.

z Armored high mobility, multipurpose wheeled vehicles (HMMWVs) equipped with tube

launched, optically tracked, wire-guided (TOW) antitank missile systems for R-series MTOE.

z Armored HMMWVs. (R-series MTOE.)

z MK19 40-mm machine gun grenade. (R-series MTOE.)

z Javelin command launch unit.

1-19. The ABCT Cavalry troop capabilities include survivability in unified land operations and fighting for 

information. The M3A3 Cavalry fighting vehicle armed with a 25-mm cannon, 7.62-mm coaxial machine 

gun, and TOW missile system, provides firepower. 

1-20. The ABCT Cavalry troop limitations include limited maneuverability in urban environments and other 

types of complex terrain. The troop’s heavier vehicles create sustainment consideration for resupply, 

refueling, and maintenance despite the ABCTs enhanced sustainment capability. The up-armored HMMWV 

provides limited protection and mobility. 

Figure 1-1. ABCT Cavalry Troop Organization 

INFANTRY BRIGADE COMBAT TEAM CAVALRY TROOP

1-21. There are two types of Cavalry troops in the IBCT, a mounted troop and a dismounted troop. The 

paragraphs below discuss both types of IBCT Cavalry troops. 
Role of the Cavalry Troop 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 1-5 

MOUNTED CAVALRY TROOP

1-22. The mounted IBCT troop organization has a headquarters section, three Scout platoons, a mortar 

section, and an attached fire support team (See figure 1-2, page 1-6). The troop headquarters has a troop 

commander, an XO, a 1SG, a supply sergeant, an operations NCO, an operations assistant, a CBRN 

noncommissioned officer, and a forward signal support NCO. The three Scout platoons each have one platoon 

leader, one platoon sergeant, and two section leaders. The mortar section is equipped with two 120-mm 

mortars (towed). The IBCT mounted Cavalry troop possesses an organic 120-mm mortar section (towed) for 

organic fire support and each of the three Scout platoons has the following equipment: 

z TOW up-armored HMMWVs.

z Armored HMMWVs.

z Caliber .50 machine gun.

z AN/TAS-8 LRAS3.

z MK19 40-mm machine gun grenade.

z M240B 7.62-mm machine gun.

z Javelin command launch units.

CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS

1-23. The IBCT mounted Cavalry troop has the following capabilities: 

z Provides reconnaissance and security for IBCT operations.

z Possesses six mounted TOW systems (two per platoon).

z Possesses an organic 120-mm mortar section (towed).

1-24. The IBCT mounted Cavalry troop has the following limitations: 

z The up-armored HMMWV provides limited protection.

z The up-armored HMMWV’s added weight limits mobility, especially in complex terrain.
Chapter 1 

1-6 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 1-2. IBCT Mounted Cavalry Troop Organization 

DISMOUNTED CAVALRY TROOP

1-25. The dismounted IBCT troop has a troop headquarters, two scout platoons, a mortar section, and a 

sniper section. The troop headquarters has a troop commander, an XO, a 1SG, a supply sergeant, three radio 

operators, a CBRN noncommissioned officer, an operations assistant, and a supply specialist (see figure 1-3,

page 1-7). The platoons have three Scout sections. The mortar section has a section leader, squad leader, two 

gunners, and two assistant gunners. The sniper section has a squad leader, two senior snipers, and four 

snipers. They normally operate as two heavy sniper teams or three light sniper teams. The IBCT dismounted 

Cavalry troop has the following equipment: 

z HMMWV (scout platoon).

z Unmanned Aircraft System Raven.

z HMMWV and cargo truck (troop headquarters).

z Boat landing craft inflatable (troop headquarters).

CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS

1-26. The IBCT dismounted Cavalry troop has the following capabilities: 

z Provides reconnaissance and security for IBCT operations.

z Provides mission command, staff planning and supervision of operations of organic and

attached units.

z Provides dismounted reconnaissance capability that supports motorized troops in execution of the

squadron mission.

z Possesses an organic 60-mm mortar section.

1-27. The IBCT dismounted Cavalry troop has the following limitations: 

z Possesses limited transportation capability.

z Lack of a mobility platform that the squadron must consider when conducting planning.
Role of the Cavalry Troop 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 1-7 

Figure 1-3. IBCT Dismounted Cavalry Troop Organization 

STRYKER BRIGADE COMBAT TEAM CAVALRY TROOP

1-28. The SBCT Cavalry troop has a troop headquarters, three scout platoons (R-series) or two scout platoons 

(K-series), and a mortar section (see figure 1-4, page 1-8). The Cavalry troop headquarters has a troop 

commander, an XO, a first sergeant, an operations sergeant, an operation assistant, a CBRN 

noncommissioned officer, a supply sergeant, and a supply specialist. The scout platoons have one platoon 

leader, one platoon sergeant, and two section leaders. The mortar section has two Stryker mortar carriermounted 120-mm mortars and a fire direction center. The SBCT Cavalry troop has an organic 120-mm mortar 

section (mounted). Each of the Scout platoons has the following: 

z Caliber .50 machine gun.

z AN/TAS-8 LRAS3.

z Javelin command launch units.

z Stryker reconnaissance vehicles.

z MK19 40-mm machine gun grenade.

z M240B 7.62-mm machine gun.

1-29. The SBCT Cavalry troop capabilities include—

z Maximizing the teaming of ground Scouts and brigade surveillance systems to conduct close

reconnaissance of enemy forces.

z Equipping with 120-mm self-propelled mortars.

z Fighting for information against light and motorized forces or heavier threats when augmented.

1-30. The SBCT Cavalry troop has limited ability to—

z Perform route reconnaissance with four vehicle platoons. (R Series MTOE).

z Maintain enemy contact in some situations, such as—

 During emergency resupply.

 Conducting casualty evacuation operations.
Chapter 1 

1-8 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 1-4. SBCT Cavalry Troop Organization 

BATTLEFIELD SURVEILLANCE BRIGADE CAVALRY TROOP 

1-31. The battlefield surveillance brigade (BFSB) Cavalry troop includes a troop headquarters section and 

two motorized Scout platoons. The troop headquarters has a troop commander, an XO, a first sergeant, an 

operations sergeant, a forward signal support NCO, a CBRN NCO, a supply sergeant, a supply specialist, 

and two drivers. The two Scout platoons organize with one platoon leader, one platoon sergeant, and two 

section leaders. The BFSB Cavalry troop has the following within each of the two Scout platoons: 

z Armored HMMWVs.

z Caliber .50 machine guns.

z AN/TAS-8 LRAS3.

z Javelin command launch units.

z MK19 40-mm machine gun grenade.

z M240B 7.62-mm machine guns.

1-32. The BFSB Cavalry troop has the following capabilities: 

z Integration into the BFSB reconnaissance and surveillance architecture.

z Access to information and intelligence collected by brigade assets.

z Habitual relationship with the BFSB’s long-range surveillance company.

May provide the troop and squadron commanders with added flexibility in employing the 

troop. 
Role of the Cavalry Troop 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 1-9 

z Long-range communications beyond line of sight.

Facilitates long-range target acquisition and interdiction when employed with the attached 

fire support team. 

1-33. The BFSB Cavalry troop’s leaders at all levels must plan and conduct operations that consider the 

troop’s limitations. These limitations include firepower and protection factors such as lack of mortars and 

armored fighting vehicles; limitations in laser target acquisition and designation, in addition to reliance on 

indirect fires and joint fires. In addition to those limitations mentioned above, the Cavalry troop has a very 

limited ability to fight for information in decisive actions because the troop is vulnerable to enemy 

counterreconnaissance and security measures. The Cavalry troop itself possesses limited dismounted 

capability. These limited dismounts within the Scout sections requires that two Scout sections be combined 

to generate the required dismounts to conduct long duration observation posts, continuous screening 

operations, and dismounted tasks associated with zone, area, route reconnaissance and/or local security. 

1-34. The Cavalry troop in the BFSB has extremely limited ability to fight for information because it lacks 

organic mortars; armored fighting vehicles, such as the Cavalry fighting vehicle, the Stryker, and TOW. The 

BFSB should fight for information only within the guidelines of the commander’s engagement criteria.

1-35. The BFSB Cavalry troop has the following limitations, which careful employment or augmentation 

can mitigate: 

z Limited dismounted capability, requiring platoons to assume section missions to generate the

required dismounts.

z Limited direct fire standoff, lethality, and survivability in unified land operations.

z Lack standoff, lethality, and survivability with crew-served weapons in terrain lacking cover

and concealment.

SCOUT PLATOON 

1-36. Scout platoons are the primary collection asset in the Cavalry troop, and the organic reconnaissance 

unit available to Infantry and Armor battalions. The fundamental role of the Scout platoon is to conduct 

forceful or stealthy reconnaissance that satisfies the commander's critical information requirements. The 

commander gives missions to the platoon and the platoon progressively builds situational awareness of the 

operational environment for the commander. The information the platoon provides enables the commander 

to develop situational understanding, make comprehensive plans and decisions, and direct follow-on or future 

operations. The Scout platoon conducts security to provide reaction time and maneuver space. The scout 

platoon—

z Provides a significant dismounted, mounted, and reconnaissance capability.

z Maximizes security with timely, accurate, and relevant combat information.

z Enables higher headquarters to employ combat power quickly and decisively.

z Rapidly assesses situations and directs combat power, reconnaissance, and security capabilities to

meet priority intelligence requirements.

z Employs integrated and synchronized reconnaissance to detect threat deception, decoys, and cover

and concealment.

z Supports targeting and target acquisition through available ground and aerial assets.

z Assists in shaping the area of operations by providing information or directing fires to disrupt the threat.

z Requires augmentation from engineer assets to perform technical engineer tasks.

z Employs limited organic sustainment assets.

ARMORED BRIGADE COMBAT TEAM SCOUT PLATOON

1-37. Armored brigade combat team scout platoons have three Cavalry fighting vehicles and five armored 

HMMWVs outfitted with LRAS3s (R series MTOE), or six Bradley fighting vehicles (K-series MTOE). The 

following paragraphs discuss the capabilities and limitations of the scout platoons. 
Chapter 1 

1-10 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Capabilities 

1-38. The Cavalry squadron and combined arms battalion scout platoons in the ABCT have the following 

capabilities: 

z The M3A3 Cavalry fighting vehicle provides firepower and survivability.

z The Cavalry fighting vehicle has a stabilized turret employing a 25-mm auto-cannon, a 7.62-mm

coaxial machine gun, and a TOW missile system.

z Each Cavalry fighting vehicle carries up to four Scouts to execute dismounted tasks.

z The LRAS3 provides the ability to detect, recognize, identify, and estimate location of distant

targets.

Limitations 

1-39. The Cavalry squadron and combined arms battalion Scout platoons in the ABCT have the following 

limitations: 

z They are vulnerable to enemy counterreconnaissance and security measures, and their ability to

fight for information is limited.

z The HMMWV provides inadequate survivability and mobility against direct and indirect fires in

operations teamed with the more survivable and mobile M3A3. (R-series MTOE.)

z Limited dismounts reduce the capability of the platoon to conduct long-term observation posts,

continuous screening ability, or to conduct multiple dismounted tasks associated with route, zone,

or area reconnaissance concurrently.

IBCT MOUNTED SCOUT PLATOON

1-40. Each of the three Scout platoons have six armored, mounted HMMWVs. The following paragraphs 

discuss the capabilities and limitations of the scout platoons. 

Capabilities 

1-41. The IBCT mounted Scout platoon has the following capabilities: 

z Possesses mounted TOW systems.

z Possesses mounted MK-19 grenade launcher mounted systems.

z Possesses .50-caliber machine gun mounted systems.

z Is highly mobile and responsive.

z Provides all weather, continuous, accurate, and timely information gathering using LRAS3.

Limitations 

1-42. The following limitations apply to the IBCT mounted Scout platoon: 

z Due to their vulnerability to enemy counterreconnaissance and security measures, limited in

fighting for information.

z The HMMWV provides inadequate survivability and mobility.

z The platoon possesses limited dismounted capability.

z Limited dismounts reduce the capability of the platoon to conduct long-term observation posts

(OPs), continuous screening, or to conduct the dismounted tasks associated with route, zone, or

area reconnaissance.

IBCT DISMOUNTED CAVALRY TROOP AND INFANTRY BATTALION SCOUT PLATOONS

1-43. 11B Infantry Soldiers compose the dismounted troop and the Infantry battalion Scout platoons. They 

provide dedicated dismounted capabilities to the squadron. 
Role of the Cavalry Troop 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 1-11 

Capabilities 

1-44. The dismounted Cavalry troop and Infantry battalion Scout platoons can—

z Provide all weather, continuous, accurate, and timely reconnaissance and security in complex,

close, and urban terrain.

z Employ UAS to enhance reconnaissance efforts.

z Conduct stealthy reconnaissance and security operations.

z Conduct ground, water, and air insertion.

Limitations 

1-45. The dismounted Cavalry troop and Infantry battalion scout platoons have the following limitations, 

which careful employment or augmentation can mitigate: 

z Limited mounted capability, requiring augmentation of mobility platforms for rapid movement.

z Limited direct-fire standoff, lethality, and survivability.

z Requires more time to plan and employ to reduce risk because of the limited protection inherent

in the design of this type of Scout platoon.

z Requires vehicle augmentations to perform convoy security.

z Possible limitations of the dismounted reconnaissance troop:

 Only has the Force XXI Battle Command, Brigade and Below (FBCB2) system in vehicles.

 May require augmentation to perform offense or defense missions.

SBCT SCOUT PLATOON

1-46. The platoon has four (R-series MTOE) or six (K-series) Stryker reconnaissance vehicles. The 

following paragraphs discuss the capabilities and limitations of the vehicles. 

Capabilities

1-47. The SBCT scout platoon has the following capabilities: 

z Provides all weather, continuous, accurate, and timely reconnaissance and security in complex,

close, and urban terrain.

z Possesses four Javelin systems.

Limitations 

1-48. The SBCT scout platoon has the following limitations: 

z Limited ability to fight for information due to the vulnerability of platoon vehicles to enemy

counterreconnaissance and security measures.

z Four-vehicle, two-section platoons accept risk when individual Stryker‘s reconnoiter lateral routes

and the terrain adjacent to the route when performing route reconnaissance.

z With limited dismounts within sections, the two sections must be combined to generate the

required dismounts needed to execute a long-term observation post, continuous screening, or

conduct the dismounted tasks associated with route, zone, and/or area reconnaissance.

BATTLEFIELD SURVEILLANCE BRIGADE SCOUT PLATOON

1-49. The BFSB scout platoon is a lightly armed organization that relies on stealth versus aggressive methods 

to conduct reconnaissance and security. The light composition of vehicles and weapons dictates that it must 

withdraw or exfiltrate to preserve its information collecting capability when compromised. If an asset 

decisively engages, the asset relies on its limited firepower and Army or joint fires for protection, and to 

break direct fire contact. The platoon organizes with six, armored HMMWVs. 
Chapter 1 

1-12 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

CAPABILITIES

1-50. The BFSB scout platoon integrates into the BFSB architecture. It has access to information and 

intelligence collected by brigade assets. Also—

z The scout platoon possesses multiple Javelin missile systems and is highly mobile and responsive.

z The platoon provides all weather, continuous, accurate, and timely information gathering through

the combined use of LRAS3s.

Limitations 

1-51. The BFSB Cavalry troop does not have organic mortars; therefore, security missions and fighting for 

information in decisive action is difficult. The BFSB scout platoon has the following limitations: 

z The platoon possesses limited dismounted capability. The HMMWV provides inadequate

survivability and mobility and carries a crew of three, one of whom performs dismounted

reconnaissance tasks.

z The scout platoon has limited dismounts within sections.

z Two sections combine to generate the required dismounts to execute a long-term observation post,

to conduct continuous screening, or to conduct the dismounted tasks associated with route, zone,

or area reconnaissance.
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 2-1 

Chapter 2 

Mission Command 

Squadron and troop commanders must apply the principles of mission command to 

develop the situation in close contact with the enemy and civilian populations. 

Commanders use the principles of mission command to develop their understanding, 

visualization, and description of the operational environment, the terrain, local 

populations, and the enemy.

The role of reconnaissance and security tasks in mission command is essential. To 

make effective decisions in an uncertain environment, the BCT commander requires 

timely and accurate combat information from their reconnaissance and security formations.

SECTION I – TROOP MISSION COMMAND 

2-1. Mission command is the exercise of authority and direction by the commander using mission orders to 

enable disciplined initiative within the commander’s intent to empower agile and adaptive leaders in the 

conduct of unified land operations (ADP 6-0). 

2-2. Commanders enable mission command during operations by providing a clear commander’s intent and 

using mission orders to assign tasks, allocate resources, and issue broad guidance. Guided by the squadron 

commander’s intent and the mission purpose, troop commanders take actions that accomplish the mission. 

They take appropriate actions and perform the necessary coordination without needing new orders. 

2-3. Mission command as a warfighting function assists commanders in balancing the art of command with 

the science of control, while emphasizing the human aspects of mission command. A warfighting function is 

a group of tasks and systems (people, organizations, information, and processes) united by a common purpose 

that commanders use to accomplish missions and training objectives. (Refer to ADRP 6-0 for more information.) 

2-4. Troop leading procedures extend the military decision-making process to the small-unit level. The 

military decision-making process and troop leading procedures are similar but not identical. Commanders 

with a coordinating staff, use the military decision-making process as their primary planning process. 

Company-level and smaller units lack formal staffs and use troop leading procedures to plan and prepare for 

operations. The responsibility for planning is primarily on the commander or small-unit leader. (Refer to 

FM 6-0 for more information.) 

2-5. Troop leading procedures are a dynamic process used by small-unit leaders to analyze a mission, 

develop a plan, and prepare for an operation (ADP 5-0). These procedures enable leaders to maximize 

available planning time while developing effective plans and preparing their units for an operation. Troop 

leading procedures consist of the following eight steps: 

2-6. Step 1. Receive the mission. The troop commander quickly analyzes the mission upon receipt and 

identifies reconnaissance or security tasks that the troop needs to conduct. The troop commander should 

provide the higher commander with a confirmation brief following the receipt of an order. 

2-7. Step 2. Issue a warning order. Upon determining a tentative course of action, the troop commander 

issues a warning order so subordinate units can begin their planning and preparation centered largely on the 

tasks for the desired form of reconnaissance or security. The troop commander must incorporate all 

warfighting functions into the warning order (WARNORD) including for example, fires and sustainment 

planning. At the end of this step, the commander receives a confirmation brief from leaders to ensure clear 

communication of instructions and subordinate leadership understanding. 
Chapter 2 

2-2 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

2-8. Step 3. Make a tentative plan. The commander develops a tentative plan to direct or synchronize the 

reconnaissance guidance based upon an evaluation of the mission variables (METT-TC) to answer priority 

intelligence requirements (PIR). The commander develops a tentative plan without becoming rigidly fixed 

on this plan and can adapt as information changes. The troop commander develops a reconnaissance and 

security plan based on the squadron commander’s guidance and the overall reconnaissance and security plan. 

A clear understanding of this guidance aids the troop commander in planning and executing the troop mission. 

Reconnaissance and security guidance enables clarification of intent to subordinate leaders. 

2-9. Step 4. Initiate movement. The commander relies heavily on the XO and 1SG. Cavalry troops must be 

adept at quickly setting the unit in motion towards their start point, line of departure, or line of contact 

positions to support the rapid deployment of Cavalry forces. 

2-10. Step 5. Conduct reconnaissance. The commander evaluates the designated area of operations using all 

available tools—maps, satellite imagery, video surveillance footage, aerial fly overs (when available), 

intelligence products, and previous reports to determine routes, possible engagement areas and the possible 

and additional assets required (such as aviation, fires, engineers, and military intelligence assets). 

2-11. Step 6. Complete the plan. Inherent in completing the plan is the face-to-face coordination with 

adjacent units. A Cavalry troop maneuvering, traversing, or staging in other maneuver forces’ areas of 

operation increases the risk of fratricide and introduces vulnerabilities to the maneuver forces. When Cavalry 

troops take any maneuver actions, they should consider the possibility of forward or reverse passage of lines. 

The commander must mitigate risk through the exchange of plans with the adjacent and higher commanders 

to include operational graphics. The commander determines route and possible engagement area 

development using squadron S-2 (battalion or brigade intelligence staff officer) products, such as obstacle 

overlays and modified combined obstacle overlays (MCOOs), and determines the assets available and the 

possible assets required (such as aviation, fires, engineers, and military intelligence assets). 

2-12. Step 7. Issue the order. Upon issuing the order, the commander will likely participate in the supported 

commander’s combined arms rehearsal if time permits. Upon completion of this rehearsal, the Cavalry troop 

commander must conduct a unit rehearsal with all leaders and augmented assets to imprint a mental picture 

of the sequence of the key actions and to improve mutual understanding. Based upon time constraints at the 

Cavalry troop level and mission requirements, the confirmation brief is usually the only option. See FM 6-0

for more detailed information on rehearsals. 

2-13. Step 8. Supervise and refine. After issuing the order, the commander continues to supervise execution 

preparation. The commander evaluates and adjusts the plan as new information becomes available. 

2-14. The troop commander develops a reconnaissance and security plan based on the squadron 

commander’s guidance and the overall reconnaissance and security plan. A clear understanding of this 

guidance aids the troop commander in planning and executing the troop mission. Guidance enables the troop 

commander to clarify their own intent for their subordinate leaders. The troop commander then uses the 

elements of the commander’s role in the operations process (understand, visualize, describe, direct, lead, and 

assess) to develop specific guidance for the troop. (Refer to ADRP 5-0 for more information.) The squadron 

commander’s guidance consists of focus, tempo of reconnaissance or security, and engagement/

disengagement, and displacement criteria. The commander can specify different reconnaissance and security 

guidance for each phase of an operation and can adjust the components of their guidance at any point in the 

operation. 

SECTION II – TROOP INTEGRATION OF SQUADRON STAFF PRODUCTS 

2-15. The troop commander receives staff products from the squadron to aid with troop leading procedures. 

The following paragraphs represent and describe some of the squadron products and the troop commander’s 

application of them. Troop commanders have a responsibility to refine products generated by the squadron 

staff to focus appropriately on the troop level. Copying items, such as mission and intent, verbatim from the 

squadron operation order (OPORD) and issuing as troop mission and intent will not provide sufficient clarity 

to the troop’s subordinate leaders. Troop commander’s must also ensure that they understand all squadron 

products completely; if not, they must seek clarification from the responsible staff section as opposed to 

having a vague understanding and trying to make it happen on their own initiative. 
Mission Command 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 2-3 

DIRECTED FRIENDLY COURSE OF ACTION 

2-16. The squadron directed friendly course of action should include the commander’s intent, mission 

concept of the operation, tasks to subordinate units, and the commander’s reconnaissance, and security 

guidance by phase (or as needed). Upon receiving the order and issuing the warning order, in conjunction 

with task organization and latest time information is of value, the commander begins step three of troop 

leading procedures—make a tentative plan. Troop commanders must ensure they understand the squadron

commander’s objective and the boundaries for their unit. It is critical that troop commanders understand the 

timelines and the assets available to complete the mission. The troop commander should clearly understand 

what the squadron commander expects of their troop. If the troop commander is unclear of the commander’s 

intent, the troop commander should seek additional guidance. The troop commander makes the tentative plan 

and begins the troop leading procedures but must remain cognizant of changing facts that could alter the 

original plan. The commander must not become overly committed or fixated on the original plan and assume 

away or diminish legitimate concerns for fear of altering the plan. 

2-17. The troop commander provides a confirmation brief to the squadron on the details of the troop's scheme 

of maneuver to ensure the plan nests with higher headquarters’ intent, including platoon-level graphic control 

measures that the troop commander consolidates at the troop level. 

GRAPHIC CONTROL MEASURES 

2-18. The supported command should provide detailed graphic control measures to the troop. When control 

measures are not detailed, it is the troop commander’s responsibility to synchronize troop graphic control 

measures with the higher headquarters to ensure the troop scheme of maneuver meets the supported 

commander’s intent. The use of observation posts in-depth, named areas of interest, reconnaissance 

objectives, coordination points, and targets convey a scheme of maneuver. For example, troop commanders 

should depict and designate tentative observation post locations for the platoons. 

INFORMATION COLLECTION PLAN 

2-19. The squadron information collection plan should contain adequate detail to conduct effective 

reconnaissance. Troop commanders must highlight specified tasks for their organization. They must also 

understand squadron and brigade decision points, the PIRs that support those decisions and which named 

areas of interest (NAIs) associate with each PIR. Commanders must understand their role in the BCT, the 

BCT and squadron commander’s intent, and how their troop tasks nest within the BCT. Failure to understand 

these linkages and supporting relationships will result in a loss of synchronization and effectiveness for the 

overall information collection plan. Additionally, the troop commander may develop troop PIRs or indicators 

that support the BCT and squadron commanders’ intent and guidance. Troop commanders need to be careful 

that they do not assign NAIs to everything. Information collection assets are finite. Therefore, each NAI 

should associate with at least one PIR, which in turn should support a squadron or BCT decision point. 

Reverse line of sight analysis, good terrain analysis, and thorough enemy analysis will help the troop 

commander decide where to look and equally as important, when to look there. 

2-20. The squadron naming convention should identify which named area of interest belongs to which troop. 

Similar to fire support target blocks, standard operating procedures (SOPs) should dictate how troops should 

label their named areas of interest and target areas of interest to ensure no two troops are using the same 

name for different named areas of interest. For example, A troop can name their NAIs 100-199; B Troop can 

name their NAIs 200-299; C Troop can name their NAIs 300-399.

EXECUTION MATRIX 

2-21. The squadron execution matrix is a visual and sequential representation of the key tasks and 

responsible organizations over time. The execution matrix provides a visualization of the timeline for the 

squadron mission and should closely mirror Annex L (Information Collection) from the squadron OPORD. 

The troop commander should similarly visualize troop tasks in time and space to identify any obvious 

problems or situations requiring augmentation or changes to the scheme of maneuver. Visualization helps 
Chapter 2 

2-4 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

ensure that the troop synchronizes with the squadron scheme of maneuver, adjacent units, and any attached 

elements. 

EVENT TEMPLATE 

2-22. The event template helps to develop the information collection overlays and the decision support 

template for the supported commander. Use the event template during the execution phase of the operations 

process to aid in determining which course of action the enemy has adopted. The event template is comprised 

of the following elements: time-phase lines, NAIs, TAIs, and enemy decision points. Time-phase lines are 

linear geographic areas that depict when enemy activity will occur. Usually, the commander selects NAIs to 

capture indications of enemy courses of action, but the commander may also relate to conditions of the 

operational environment. An enemy decision point is a point in time and space when the enemy commander 

anticipates making a decision regarding a specific course of action. 

2-23. An enemy situation template depicts a single potential enemy course of action and does not provide 

enough detail about the enemy situation to understand the different enemy objectives and how the objectives 

may affect the troop area of operations. Troop commanders must refine the squadron event template to depict 

anticipated enemy actions in or near the troop area of operations. Troop commanders should incorporate 

expected enemy actions into the troop’s scheme of maneuver. The enemy’s techniques of employing their

weapons and equipment influences information collection planning. For example, the enemy’s techniques of 

employing crew served weapons may indicate enemy objectives. (See ATP 2-01.3 for more information on 

situation template and event template creation.) 

LATEST TIME INFORMATION IS OF VALUE 

2-24. Commanders must understand the latest time information is of value (LTIOV). Commanders who do 

not understand LTIOV cannot support their higher headquarters in a timely manner. Troop commanders must 

answer priority intelligence requirements quickly so the BCT commander can select a course of action. 

Failure to understand LTIOV on the part of the commander violates two reconnaissance fundamentals—

report all information rapidly and accurately and develop the situation rapidly. Failure to apply these two 

fundamentals hinders Scouts from providing commanders with the information they need to make the right 

decision at the right time. To help combat this shortcoming, commanders must plan and execute their mission 

within the timeline to remain relevant. Troop commanders must understand LTIOV and its importance. Troop 

commanders must understand how BCT decision points and commander’s critical information requirements 

tie into the information collection plan and squadron and troop tasks. (Refer to FM 3-98, FM 3-55, and 

ATP 2-01 for more information.) 

FIRES SUPPORT PRODCUTS

2-25. The troop commander and the troop fire support team use the scheme of fires to describe the troop’s 

use of available fires to support the concept of operations with emphasis on the scheme of movement and 

maneuver and the synchronization matrix. The troop commander, with the troop's fire support officer’s 

assistance, ensures that targets assigned to the troop support the scheme of maneuver. If needed, the 

commander may task the fire support officer to refine and resubmit targets that the squadron assigns. The 

Fire Support Annex (Annex D) typically includes the following products, fire support execution matrix, 

attack guidance matrix, and target list worksheet. (See ATP 3-09.42 for more information.) 

2-26. The fire support execution matrix is a detailed portrayal of the portions of the fire support plan that 

the subordinate element is responsible for executing. The format and techniques for its development and use 

varies according to individual unit tactical standard operating procedures. The fire support execution matrix 

generally includes targets assigned to each subordinate unit, fixed and rotary wing assets available, active 

fire support coordination measures, active airspace coordination measures, radar zones, locations of fire 

support elements, and priorities of fire. The information is typically displayed in either a by phase or key 

event format. The fire support execution matrix may include additional information like a communication 

plan with the field artillery battalion, restrictions, ammunition available, and time on station. (See 

ATP 3-09.42 for more information.) 
Mission Command 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 2-5 

2-27. The attack guidance matrix is a targeting product approved by the commander, which addresses the 

how and when to engage targets and the desired affects. The matrix includes specific high-payoff targets, 

timing of engagements, and the commander’s desired effects. The attack guidance matrix addresses how and 

which weapons system to use to execute the request for fire. The attack guidance matrix ensures that the 

execution synchronizes with the scheme of maneuver. (See ATP 3-60.) 

TASK ORGANIZATION 

2-28. The troop commander evaluates required tasks, troop capabilities and limitations, and conditions to 

conduct an initial assessment to determine if there is a need for additional assets. The troop commander 

requests more information from higher if needed, and evaluates his internal section and sizing requirements 

to determine if it is necessary to reconfigure platoons. 

ASSIGNING PLATOON TASKS

2-29. The squadron staff should provide a detailed explanation of PIR, which decision points they support, 

and which NAIs align against specific PIR. Troop commanders refine this information into indicators for 

their platoons which, once asigned against a collection asset become, specific information requirements. It is 

critical that troop commanders provide sufficient detail for subordinate leaders to understand these linkages, 

as well as the implications of the information they collect, such as confirming or denying enemy courses of 

action or LTIOV. 

2-30. Assigning the proper task and purpose to each platoon that supports the higher commander’s intent is 

critical. The troop commander assigns appropriate tasks to each platoon based on shared understanding and 

mutual trust with their subordinate leaders. The troop commander’s assessment of the experience, skills, 

manning, training, abilities, and discipline of the individual platoons determines the assignment of platoon 

tasks. Troop commanders must exercise discerning judgment when assigning tasks that are appropriate for 

Scout platoons. As an example, if the squadron mission is to conduct a guard, an appropriate task for a 

platoon would be to conduct a screen. Platoons may also have tasks different from each other. One platoon 

may conduct a zone reconnaissance while another platoon conducts a route reconnaissance. 

SECTION III – INTELLIGENCE PREPARATION OF THE 

BATTLEFIELD/BATTLESPACE 

2-31. Intelligence preparation of the battlefield/battlespace (IPB) is the systematic process of analyzing and 

visualizing the mission variables of enemy, terrain, weather, and civil considerations in an area of interest to 

determine their effect on operations (ATP 2-01.3). Commanders apply intelligence preparation of the 

battlefield to gain the information necessary to selectively apply and maximize operational effectiveness at 

critical points in time and space. (Refer to ATP 2-01.3 for more information.) 

2-32. The troop commander uses the IPB process as part of planning to constantly evaluate and reduce 

uncertainties concerning the enemy, terrain, weather, and civil considerations within the area of operations. 

Commanders conduct the IPB during mission planning and throughout the conduct of the operation. The 

supported command’s S-2, supported by a troop company intelligence support team (COIST) when formed 

or augmented, provides the troop commander with the information and products needed to accomplish trooplevel planning. The troop commander refines these IPB products and combines them with their own 

assessment to facilitate planning and situational awareness at the Scout platoon level. 

2-33. Commanders initiate troop planning using IPB with a narrow focus toward developing a detailed 

understanding of the troop’s area of operations. Developing an understanding of the troop’s area of operation 

(AO) requires judgment concerning adversary capabilities and limitations in relation to the factors of 

observation and fields of fires, avenues of approach, key terrain, obstacles, and cover and concealment and 

how they impact the enemy’s employment of soldiers and combat systems.

2-34. Troop commanders must further refine squadron IPB products and assessments to provide additional 

detail and insight based on their assessment of the mission variables in their area of operations. The IPB 

process is cyclic. One of the most critical steps is to determine threat and adversary courses of action 

(ATP 2-01.3), which assists in developing the event template, which in turn drives collection planning. In 
Chapter 2 

2-6 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

developing multiple threat courses of action, the commander should consider factors such as potential or

assessed methods of enemy maneuver based on the terrain, enemy task organization, and varying objectives 

of the enemy commander. By identifying multiple enemy courses of action, the troop commander can 

determine how the enemy could array against the formation. Threat and adversary courses of actions should 

nest with the higher command’s assessment. If the troop commander disagrees with the higher headquarters 

on the enemy courses of actions, the troop commander notifies the commander and staff for a resolution. 

Creating threat courses of action that are not consistent with higher headquarters introduces confusion at 

several echelons when reporting information. 

2-35. The troop commander refines the higher headquarters’ indicators, which distinguish between the 

various enemy courses of action. As the commander determines indicators and locations to answer priority 

intelligence requirements, the IPB process serves as the foundation for the friendly scheme of maneuver. The 

troop commander understands the higher headquarters collection plan and optimizes the use of cueing, 

mixing, and redundancy of available collection assets. 

2-36. A detailed IPB forms the foundation of the information collection plan. The troop commander 

identifies tactical hazards in the IPB process to bypass or mitigate as appropriate based on the mission 

variables. 

SECTION IV – ORDERS 

2-37. Commanders issue plans and orders to subordinates to communicate their understanding of the 

situation and their visualization of operations. Mission orders focus subordinates on the mission, and the 

purpose of the mission without prescribing exactly how to do it, allowing the subordinates the freedom to 

seize opportunities or to react effectively to unforeseen enemy actions and capabilities. Mission orders also 

coordinate and synchronize subordinate actions and inform those outside the unit how to cooperate and 

provide support. Commanders ensure that all operations plans and orders comply with applicable domestic 

and international laws. They also confirm that the plan or order is relevant and suitable for subordinates. 

2-38. Effective orders development allows commanders maximum planning time while preventing 

confusion and uncertainty among subordinates. Commanders develop an orders process that maximizes time 

management and allows subordinates the majority of the pre-mission planning time. Commanders should 

allot one third of available mission planning time for themselves while preserving two thirds of the available 

time to their subordinates to prepare prior to mission execution. 

2-39. Mission orders follow the five-paragraph format (situation, mission, execution, sustainment, and 

command and signal) and are as brief and simple as possible. Mission orders clearly convey the unit’s mission 

and the commander’s intent. Mission orders summarize the situation, describe the operation’s objective and 

end state, and provide a simple concept of operations to accomplish the unit’s mission. When assigning tasks 

to subordinate units, mission orders include all components of a task statement: who, what, when, where, and 

why. Commanders particularly emphasize the purpose (why) of the tasks to guide individual initiative. (Refer 

to FM 6-0 for more information.) Effective plans and orders foster mission command by―

z Describing the situation to create a shared understanding.

z Conveying the commander’s intent and concept of operations.

z Assigning tasks to subordinate units and stating the purpose for conducting the task.

z Providing the control measures necessary to synchronize the operation while retaining the

maximum freedom of action for subordinates.

z Task-organizing forces and allocating resources.

z Directing preparation activities and establishing times or conditions for execution.

2-40. Commanders ensure reconnaissance and security guidance is explanatory in their orders. Orders both 

contain and explain focus, tempo of reconnaissance or security, engagement and disengagement criteria, and 

displacement criteria. 
Mission Command 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 2-7 

TYPES OF MISSION ORDERS

2-41. Commanders issue orders verbally or in writing. The five-paragraph field order format remains the 

standard for issuing orders. The technique used to issue orders (verbal or written) is at the discretion of the 

commander; each technique depends on time and the situation. Army organizations use three types of orders: 

operation orders (OPORDs), fragmentary orders (FRAGORDs), and warning orders (WARNORDs). Refer 

to FM 6-0 for more information. 

VERBAL ORDERS

2-42. Commanders use verbal orders when operating in an extremely time-constrained environment. Verbal 

orders offer the advantage of quick distribution but risk overlooking or misunderstanding information. The 

production of written FRAGORDs normally follow the issuing of verbal orders to confirm the guidance and 

direction provided by the verbal orders. 

WRITTEN ORDERS

2-43. Commanders issue written plans and orders that contain both text and graphics. Graphics convey 

information and instructions through military symbols. (ADRP 1-02 lists approved symbols.) Graphics 

complement the written portion of a plan or an order and promote clarity, accuracy, and brevity. Commanders 

often develop and disseminate written orders electronically to shorten the time needed to gather and brief the 

orders group. Troop commanders can easily edit and modify electronically produced orders and incorporate 

staff products into their orders. They can send the same order to multiple recipients simultaneously. 

Commanders can use computer programs to develop and disseminate precise, corresponding graphics to add 

to the efficiency and clarity of the orders process, but they still need to verify that subordinates understand 

the order. 

2-44. Electronic editing makes importing text and graphics into orders easy. Unfortunately, such ease can 

result in orders becoming unnecessarily large without added operational value. Commanders need to ensure 

that orders contain only information needed to facilitate effective execution. Orders should not regurgitate 

unit SOPs. They should be clear, concise, and relevant to the mission. 

2-45. Commanders will not always have the luxury of consolidating all of their platoons or platoon leaders 

to issue an OPORD in person. For example, the Cavalry troop is often planning its next reconnaissance 

mission while it is simultaneously conducting security operations (the BCT is planning to transition from 

defensive to offensive operations). In such a situation, commanders may choose to write their OPORD in 

FBCB2 and create overlays to transmit digitally to their subordinates. 

ORDERS TECHNIQUES

2-46. Commanders can use different techniques when developing their orders. The commander is 

responsible for the order regardless of the technique they choose to develop it. One technique involves the 

commander writing the order with little or no input from other unit leaders and teams. The commander 

controls the development and speed of the process but this often limits input and creativity. The second 

technique allows the commander to use the strengths of the unit leaders and teams and any subject matter 

experts attached to the troop. 

2-47. The commander receives input from the other unit leaders and teams to help develop the order when 

using the team technique. Table 2-1, page 2-8, is an example of what paragraphs the leader and team may 

contribute to the orders development. 
Chapter 2 

2-8 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Table 2-1. Team Orders Development 

LEADER OR TEAM MEMBER ORDERS PARAGRAPH

Executive Officer 4 and 5

First Sergeant 4

Commander, Platoon Leaders or 

Platoon Sergeants 3 and 5

Fire Support Officer 3

Mortar Platoon Sergeant 3

Communications Sergeant 5

Company Intelligence Support Team 1 and 3

Combat Medics 3 and 4

Chemical, Biological, Radiological, 

and Nuclear Noncommissioned 

Officer

3

Supply Sergeant 4

SECTION V – RESPONSIBILITIES 

2-48. The Cavalry officers and NCOs are highly trained in the use of organic weapons, indirect fires, land 

navigation, supporting fires, demolitions, obstacles, communications, reconnaissance, liaison, and security 

techniques. Officers and NCOs are familiar with combined arms tactics and can react to rapidly changing 

situations. They also know how to employ surveillance, Unmanned Aircraft Systems, and sustainment assets, 

attached or supporting the troop. 

TROOP COMMANDER 

2-49. The commander establishes a positive command climate that instills and fosters trust and mutual 

understanding. The commander’s most important role in mission command lies in combining the art of 

command with the science of control. The commander visualizes and describes the area of operations, directs 

actions to achieve results, and leads the troop to mission accomplishment. 

Note. The commander continuously analyzes the situation to ensure command presence at the 

decisive point.

2-50. The foundation of the relationship between the squadron commander and the troop commander rests 

on all of the elements of mission command with special emphasis on mutual trust and shared understanding 

between the two commanders. The troop commander must be knowledgeable in reconnaissance and security 

tasks and in the capabilities and limitations of the troop. Additionally, the troop commander must develop 

mutual trust and shared understanding with subordinates. 

2-51. The commander, with the assistance of their subordinate leaders, is responsible for the integration and 

synchronization of all assets and enablers within the troop to accomplish the mission. The troop commander’s 

additional responsibilities include the following: 

z Serve as the subject matter expert in reconnaissance and security fundamentals and tasks.

z Preserve the troop’s reconnaissance capability.

z Plan and execute fires to support the troop’s missions.

z Synchronize operations with adjacent and supporting units.

z Synchronize and plan the use of additional assets, such as—

 Unmanned Aircraft System.

 Ground sensors.
Mission Command 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 2-9 

 Prophet.

 Human intelligence collection teams.

z Synchronize and integrate use of additional combat assets, such as Infantry platoons, mobile gun

system platoons, or tank platoons.

2-52. The troop commander establishes priorities with the executive officer and the 1SG. The troop 

commander defines expectations and standards and ensures the XO and 1SG execute those expectations. The 

commander must ensure the XO, as the second in command, has the same situational understanding as the 

commander and understands the visualization the commander has for the mission. The commander must 

ensure the XO executes the commander’s visualization in running the command post. The commander must 

personally mange rest for the XO and 1SG as they have extensive duties and responsibilities. The commander 

must ensure no one attempts to perform without a rest cycle during mission preparation and execution, such 

as an XO attempting to perform constantly nonstop without rest. 

EXECUTIVE OFFICER 

2-53. The XO is the second in command. The XO supervises the troop command post and stays attuned to 

the tactical situation in the troop’s area of operations. The XO, must be diligent, relentless, and possess 

unbound energy to perform the tasks required. The troop commander establishes priorities with the executive 

officer. The XO receives, verifies, and consolidates digital and voice tactical reports from the platoons and 

forwards them to the squadron, adjacent, and following units. When FBCB2 use is limited, the XO ensures 

the command post converts digital reports into radio voice reports to generate situational awareness of 

friendly, enemy, and adversary positions and activities. The XO’s other duties include the following:

z Maneuvers the troop tactical command post to a position where it can assist the troop commander’s

conduct of mission command tasks that generate friendly and threat situational awareness of

friendly, enemy, and adversary positions and activities. See Appendix C. The XO’s other duties

include the following:

 Assume command of the troop as required.

 Primary sustainment planner and coordinator. (See chapter 7 for more information on the XO

as a sustainment planner)

 Assist in preparation of the operations order, especially paragraph 4 (sustainment) and

paragraph 5 (command and signal).

 Ensure all voice and digital communications are properly functioning.

 Conduct tactical coordination with higher, adjacent, and supporting units.

z Assist the commander in preparing for follow-on missions.

z Conduct additional duties such as serving as officer in charge for a quartering party.

FIRST SERGEANT 

2-54. The 1SG is the troop’s senior NCO. First sergeants have the primary responsibility for training 

individual skills and sustaining the troop’s ability to fight. First sergeants are the troop’s sustainment 

operator; they help the commander to plan, coordinate, and supervise all sustainment activities that support 

the tactical mission. The 1SGs duties include the following: 

z Establish and maintain the foundation for troop discipline.

z Manages refit and recuperation of forces. (Refer to FM 3-98 for more information.)

z Assist the commander in performing precombat inspections.

z Execute and supervise routine operations. Routine operations may include—

 Enforcing the tactical standard operating procedures.

 Planning and coordinating training.

 Coordinating and reporting personnel and administrative actions.

 Supervising supply, maintenance, communications, and field hygiene operations.

z Supervise, inspect, and/or observe all matters designated by the commander.
Chapter 2 

2-10 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Primary sustainment operator and assists the commander to plan, coordinate, and supervise all

sustainment activities that support the tactical mission. (See chapter 7, of this publication for more

information.)

z Assist in preparation of the operations order, especially paragraph 4 (sustainment).

z Plan, rehearse, and supervise key sustainment actions in support of the tactical mission, such as—

 Resupply of class I, III, IV, and V products and materials.

 Maintenance and recovery.

 Medical treatment and evacuation.

 Replacement and return-to-duty processing.

z Coordinates with the XO in all critical sustainment functions.

z Conduct training and ensure proficiency in individual and unit collective skills that support the

troop’s mission-essential task list.

SCOUT PLATOON LEADER 

2-55. The Scout platoon leader is responsible to the troop commander for the discipline, combat readiness, 

training, and the equipment maintenance of the platoon. The platoon leader has a thorough knowledge of 

reconnaissance and security operations, and works closely with the troop commander during the mission 

analysis portion of the planning process. A solid understanding of troop leading procedures and the ability to 

apply them quickly and efficiently in the field are essential. The scout platoon leader is proficient in the 

tactical employment of the scout platoon, knows the capabilities and limitations of personnel and equipment, 

and is an expert in threat organizations, doctrine, and equipment. 

2-56. The scout platoon leader is versatile, able to exercise sound judgment, and makes correct decisions 

quickly based on the commander‘s intent and the tactical situation. It is the platoon leader‘s responsibility to 

ensure that every leader in the platoon understands and can successfully accomplish the following competencies: 

z Subject matter expert in reconnaissance and security fundamentals.

z Troop leading procedures.

z Tactical movement.

z Patrolling and local security.

z Action on contact.

z Deployment.

z Observation post establishment and operation.

z Patrolling and local security.

z Employment of fires.

z Reporting procedures.

z Proper use and maintenance of all organic equipment and communications, including digital assets.

z Employment of additional assets such as Prophet and UAS.

SCOUT PLATOON SERGEANT

2-57. Sustainment activities are the platoon sergeant’s responsibility. The platoon sergeant accomplishes this 

by coordination with the troop 1SG. The platoon sergeant leads elements of the platoon as directed by the 

platoon leader. The platoon sergeant assumes command in the absence of the platoon leader thus requiring 

personal proficiency in all platoon leadership competencies. The platoon sergeant is the most experienced 

NCO within the formation. The platoon sergeant also assists in maintenance, initiating movement, discipline, 

and assists and mentors the platoon leader plan when needed. 

FIRE SUPPORT TEAM 

2-58. The fire support team is critical to the Cavalry troop. It is responsible for coordinating indirect fires 

(mortar, field artillery, and close air support) for the troop. The team processes calls for fire from the platoons 

and allocates the appropriate indirect fire system based on the commander’s guidance for fire support.
Mission Command 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 2-11 

2-59. The fire support team vehicle can serve as the alternate troop command post. The fire support officer 

has ready access to the higher-level situation and the radio systems necessary to replace the troop command

post if necessary. The fire support officer’s additional responsibilities include the following:

z Advise the commander on the capabilities and status of all available fire support assets.

z Serve as the commander’s primary advisor on the enemy’s indirect fire capabilities.

z Assist the commander in developing the operations order to ensure full integration of fires.

z Recommend targets, fire support coordination measures, methods of engagement, and is

responsible for initiating indirect fires.

z Determine specific tasks and instructions required to conduct and control the fire plan.

z Develop an observation plan, with limited visibility contingencies, that supports the troop and

higher headquarters missions.

z Request critical friendly zones to assist counterbattery fires in response to enemy artillery and

mortar attacks.

z Refine and integrate the troop target worksheet and submit the completed worksheet to the

squadron fires cell.

z Assist the commander in executing the indirect fire and target acquisition plan into each rehearsal.

Integrating indirect fire observers into the rehearsal plan is critical.

z Alert the commander to denials in requests for fires against a target in tactical situations.

z Monitor the location and capabilities of friendly fire support units and assist the commander in

clearance of indirect fires in tactical situations.

z Designate no-fire areas as necessary to protect friendly forces.

MORTAR SECTION SERGEANT

2-60. The mortar section sergeant is responsible for providing responsive indirect fires to support the troop 

commander’s concept of the operation. The section sergeant assists the commander in indirect mortar fire 

planning. The sergeant assists in establishing movement control, triggers for movement, triggers for shifting 

targets, and mortar caches. As a rule of thumb, the mortar section maintains two-thirds maximum range of 

mortar fire forward of the reconnaissance elements. The section sergeant maintains discipline, conducts 

training, and exercises control over the mortar section. The sergeant supervises the section’s sustainment, 

which includes supply and equipment maintenance. The mortar section sergeant’s additional responsibilities 

include the following: 

z Recommend employment techniques and positioning of the mortars to support the scheme of

maneuver.

z Assist in developing the troop fire support plan to determine the best type and amount of mortar

ammunition to fire based on the mission variables of METT-TC.

z Train the section to ensure technical and tactical proficiency and combat lifesaver skills; cross

train personnel within the section on key tasks to ensure continuous operations.

z Select and reconnoiter new positions and routes for the section (in conjunction with overall troop

plan); control the movements of the section.

z Keep abreast of the enemy situation and locations of friendly units to ensure the best use of

ammunition and the safety of friendly troops.

z Supervise the execution of orders.

z Ensure coverage of priority targets at all times; establish the amount and type of ammunition set

aside for priority targets.

z Coordinate the fires and displacement of the mortar section with the action of other units.

z Anticipate needs and submit timely ammunition resupply, maintenance, and refuel requests to

sustain combat operations.
Chapter 2 

2-12 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

COMMUNICATIONS SERGEANT

2-61. The communications sergeant assists in all aspects of tactical communications. The communications 

sergeant locates with the XO or 1SG per the standard operating procedures and may operate the troop net 

control station. The communication sergeant receives and distributes signal operation instructions and 

communications security encryption keys. The communications sergeant ensures the troop receives the 

appropriate database for systems operating on the tactical internet. These include the FBCB2, single-channel 

ground and airborne radio system, the system improvement program, enhanced position location reporting 

system, and a high-speed integrated circuit. The communications sergeant trains operators in initialization 

and reinitialization of the systems and maintains the troop addressing and routing schemes. The 

communications sergeant troubleshoots troop digital communications equipment and ensure that necessary 

repairs are completed. 

COMPANY INTELLIGENCE SUPPORT TEAM 

2-62. The mission of the COIST is to describe the effects of the weather, enemy, terrain, and local population 

on friendly operations to reduce uncertainty and aid in the decision-making process. Troop leaders must 

review and interpret huge volumes of data on a daily basis to determine their relevance and relationships. A 

few examples of this data include weapons intelligence team reports, patrol debriefs, intelligence summaries, 

link diagrams, and be-on-the-lookout lists. The establishment of the COIST is internal, although the 

commander determines and directs the exact requirements for the COIST. Specified and implied tasks usually 

include targeting, patrol briefings, debriefings, detainee operations, and site exploitation. It is important the 

COIST have a sufficient number of personnel to conduct continuous 24-hour operations. Leaders in the 

COIST must be vigilant when performing the following tasks to derive the most benefit from the organization: 

z Developing a debriefing standard operating procedures and supervising its execution.

z Track and disseminate priority information requirements, specific information requirements.

z Participate in squadron operations and intelligence working group. (Refer to FM 3-55 for more

information.)

z Maintain regularly scheduled communication with higher headquarters’ staff.

2-63. Regardless of how the troop commander resources the COIST, the troop commander should organize 

and train the COIST team to perform the following tasks: 

z Conduct document and media exploitation handling and processing.

z Patrol briefing and debriefing.

z Detainee processing and tracking.

z Tactical questioning.

z Troop support to nodal and pattern analysis.

z Reconnaissance and security synchronization and management.

z Creation and interpretation of supporting intelligence products.

z Liaison with the squadron S-2.

COMBAT MEDICS 

2-64. Combat medics attached to the troop provide emergency medical treatment for sick, injured, or 

wounded personnel. The combat medics’ responsibilities include the following:

z Provide medical guidance to troop leadership as necessary.

z Conduct triage for injured, wounded, or ill friendly and enemy personnel.

z Request and coordinate the evacuation of sick, injured, or wounded personnel under the direction

of the 1SG.

z Assist in the training of troop personnel in basic first aid and of combat lifesavers in enhanced

first-aid procedures.

z Requisition class VIII supplies from the squadron aid station.

z Recommend locations for troop casualty collection points.
Mission Command 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 2-13 

z Provide guidance to the troop’s combat lifesavers as necessary.

z Advise the troop commander and 1SG on mass casualty operations.

z Keep the 1SG informed on the status of casualties.

z Coordinate with the 1SG for additional Army health system requirements.

COMBAT REPAIR TEAM 

2-65. The maintenance team chief is responsible for all 20-level repairs to keep all assigned vehicles, 

weapons, and equipment mission capable. The team chief is responsible for requesting and receiving all 

necessary parts and consumables from higher headquarters to maintain the troop equipment fleet. The 

maintenance team chief provides internal troop vehicle recovery capability. The maintenance team chief 

coordinates with the executive officer for maintenance and supply activities. The maintenance team chief 

advises the troop commander in developing a maintenance plan that includes regular routine preventive 

maintenance and emergency maintenance so that the troop can maximize its operational readiness. 

CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, RADIOLOGICAL, AND NUCLEAR 

NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER 

2-66. The CBRN noncommissioned officer is responsible for troop CBRN defense activities. The NCO 

supervises CBRN monitoring, detection, and decontamination operations. The CBRN noncommissioned 

officer assists in maintaining CBRN equipment and training CBRN equipment operators and

decontamination teams. The noncommissioned officer operates from the troop command post and assists the 

XO in executing mission command operations. The CBRN noncommissioned officer advises the troop 

commander and XO on contamination avoidance measures and obscuration, flame, and CBRN 

reconnaissance support requirements. Additionally, the CBRN noncommissioned officer monitors reports of 

CBRN attacks and advises the commander of their impact. The CBRN noncommissioned officer is the CBRN 

expert and advises the commander on the integration of the CBRN reconnaissance section and platoon if the 

troop has that requirement. 

SUPPLY SERGEANT 

2-67. The supply sergeant picks up, transports, and issues supplies and equipment to the troop. The supply 

sergeant works closely with the 1SG to accomplish these tasks. The supply sergeant leads the logistics 

package to the linkup point or, if the situation dictates, moves it forward to the supported unit’s location. The 

supply sergeant also evacuates enemy prisoners of war and other detainees and assists in the evacuation of 

deceased Soldiers to the mortuary affairs collection point. 

ARMORER AND SUPPLY SPECIALIST 

2-68. The armorer and supply specialist performs organizational maintenance and repairs on the troop’s 

small arms weapons. The specialist evacuates weapons to the direct support maintenance unit if required. 

Normally, the specialist assists the supply sergeant in the brigade support area, but may operate forward with 

the troop command post to support continuous command post operations. 
This page intentionally left blank. 
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 3-1 

Chapter 3 

Reconnaissance Tasks 

Cavalry troops conduct reconnaissance to determine enemy composition and 

disposition as well as to gather information on terrain and populations. Reconnaissance 

tasks enable all units to seize, retain, and exploit the initiative across the range of 

military operations by identifying, creating, and capitalizing upon opportunities. 

Reconnaissance tasks provide commanders with information, facilitate 

decisionmaking, and concentrate unified efforts against decisive points.

SECTION I – BASICS OF RECONNAISSANCE TASKS 

3-1. Cavalry troops use visual means or other detection assets to conduct reconnaissance missions to gather 

information. The information may be identifying enemy or civilian population activities and resources within 

the area of operations or it may be information regarding meteorological, hydrographical or geographical 

characteristics within the area of operations. 

RECONNAISSANCE FUNDAMENTALS 

3-2. The Cavalry troop commander uses the same seven reconnaissance fundamentals when developing the 

reconnaissance plan and in the deployment of reconnaissance assets. (Refer to FM 3-90.2 and FM 3-98 for 

more information.) The seven reconnaissance fundamentals are—

z Ensure continuous reconnaissance.

z Do not keep reconnaissance assets in reserve.

z Orient on the reconnaissance objective.

z Report all information rapidly and accurately.

z Retain freedom of maneuver.

z Gain and maintain enemy contact.

z Develop the situation rapidly.

RECONNAISSANCE TECHNIQUES 

3-3. Two reconnaissance techniques that the Cavalry commander must understand and recognize while 

conducting reconnaissance are reconnaissance push and reconnaissance pull. (Refer to FM 3-98 for 

more information.) 

3-4. Reconnaissance push occurs when the higher maneuver commander develops a course of action, and 

pushes the reconnaissance units to confirm or deny specific information gaps that will confirm or deny the 

suitability of the course of action. Reconnaissance push requires a higher fidelity of the enemy and friendly 

situations as well as the terrain. 

3-5. Reconnaissance pull occurs when the friendly maneuver commander does not have a course of action, 

and sends the Cavalry units to find information that will pull the rest of the organization into a course of 

action. The Cavalry unit has to find and communicate the enemy situation and terrain information so that the 

maneuver commander can develop a course of action based on the information the Cavalry provides. 

Reconnaissance pull requires a broad and detailed plan on the part of the Cavalry commander. The plan must 

be adaptable and flexible to address an evolving situation. 
Chapter 3 

3-2 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

RECONNAISSANCE METHODS 

3-6. Cavalry troop commanders use the mission variables of METT-TC to determine which method is best 

when conducting reconnaissance missions. Cavalry troops use combinations of methods to ensure that the 

unit is providing depth and redundancy throughout the area of operations. There are four methods of 

reconnaissance; dismounted, mounted, aerial, and reconnaissance by fire. 

DISMOUNTED RECONNAISSANCE

3-7. The dismounted method collects detailed information about the enemy, terrain, society, and 

infrastructure within a given area, zone, or along a route. The trade-off for conducting dismounted 

reconnaissance is that it is very time consuming. The platoons conduct dismounted reconnaissance when in 

close proximity to enemy positions and when encountering danger areas. Dismounts are highly effective 

using optics at long ranges and identifying the enemy and potential courses of action early, as well as shaping 

the fight through indirect fires. Additional situations in which the troop commander would direct the platoons 

to conduct dismounted reconnaissance are when stealthy or detailed reconnaissance is required, time is 

available, and restrictive terrain limits mounted reconnaissance. 

3-8. Of the three types of BCTs, the IBCT is the only organization that has a dedicated dismounted troop. 

The IBCT dismounted troop can assume a motorized reconnaissance role if given additional mobility assets. 

They are well suited to air assault operations if assault aviation assets are available to insert and extract them. 

The commanders of the other BCT Cavalry troop types can task organize their mounted Scouts to conduct 

dismounted reconnaissance when the situation requires the use of that reconnaissance method. However, they 

are limited in the number of Scouts that they can dismount without leaving Scout vehicles unmanned. 

MOUNTED RECONNAISSANCE

3-9. Mounted reconnaissance permits a more rapid and forceful tempo at the expense of stealth. The Scout 

platoon uses the LRAS3 or other organic optics to observe the enemy from a distance. These are the primary 

means of collecting information while conducting mounted reconnaissance. Units conducting mounted 

reconnaissance operations must keep in mind that dismounted activities are required for security reasons. 

3-10. The troop commander plans mounted reconnaissance when there is―

z Limited time.

z Known enemy locations.

z Distances requiring mounted movement.

z No primary concern with stealth.

z The ability to provide the same information as the dismounted method.

z Terrain in the vicinity of a target or named area of interest that allows the use of vehicles.

AERIAL RECONNAISSANCE

3-11. Aerial reconnaissance provides a flexible, low-risk means for gaining basic information in the least 

amount of time. Cavalry troops conduct aerial reconnaissance using organic UAS or Army aviation assets 

placed under the operational or tactical control of the troop. 

3-12. The troop commander plans the use of or requests aerial reconnaissance when there are—

z Extreme time limits.

z Objectives at extended ranges.

z Target requiring verification.

z No available ground reconnaissance elements.

z High risk to ground reconnaissance assets.

z Complex terrains and favorable weather conditions.

3-13. The troop commander must take into consideration some of the limitations of aerial reconnaissance: 

z Weather and environmental conditions are not always conducive for aerial reconnaissance.
Reconnaissance Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 3-3 

z Aerial reconnaissance usually relies on visual cues (imagery) and does not gather audio cues that

might assist in answering information requirements.

z The fidelity of the imagery might be poor based on optical constraints or concealment from aerial

observation.

z Depending on the platform, aerial reconnaissance is not always conducive for stealthy

reconnaissance.

RECONNAISSANCE BY FIRE

3-14. Reconnaissance by fire places direct or indirect fire on positions where there is a reasonable suspicion 

of enemy. The goal is to cause the enemy to move or return fire, thereby disclosing their disposition to fight. 

Commanders may direct reconnaissance by fire when expecting enemy contact, under time limitations, or 

reconnaissance elements cannot maneuver to develop the situation. 

3-15. A reconnaissance by fire technique requires one element firing while another element observes the 

area. Another technique is to use indirect fires while the Cavalry units are in position to observe the area 

where the indirect fires impact to observe any reaction from the enemy. Indirect fires may not cause any 

reaction if the enemy has fortified overhead cover. 

RECONNAISSANCE SENSOR ASSETS 

3-16. A Scout directly observing a target is the most versatile reconnaissance asset because that Soldier can 

assess the enemy’s moral and react to unforeseen circumstances to accomplish the mission. A commander 

uses internal sensors, such as unmanned ground sensors with external sensors, such as artillery radars, to 

enhance the troops’ reconnaissance capabilities. 

RECONNAISSANCE MANAGEMENT 

3-17. No single means of reconnaissance management can answer every information requirement and there 

are rarely enough reconnaissance assets to cover every requirement. Troop commanders manage their 

reconnaissance assets using cueing, mixing and redundancy. Additionally, they may task organize any of 

their organic or attached elements. (Refer to FM 3-98 for more information.) 

COMMANDERS RECONNAISSANCE GUIDANCE 

3-18. The troop commander develops a reconnaissance plan based on the squadron commander’s guidance 

and overall plan. The squadron commander’s guidance enables the troop commander to clarify their own 

intent for subordinate leaders. Reconnaissance and security guidance is contained in the five-paragraph 

operation order. The commander’s reconnaissance guidance is how the commander communicates the way 

to conduct the directed form of reconnaissance. Commanders may adjust guidance by phases. The 

commander’s guidance consists of focus, tempo of reconnaissance, engagement and disengagement criteria, 

and displacement criteria. (Refer to ATP 3-20.96 and FM 3-98 for more information.) 

3-19. The troop commander evaluates the required tasks and the troop’s capabilities to accomplish the 

mission. If the troop does not have the time or resources to complete all of the tasks, the troop commander 

informs the squadron commander. The squadron commander issues further guidance on tasks the troop must 

complete, restates the priority of the tasks (usually clear from the reconnaissance objective) or augments the 

troop. If after starting the reconnaissance, the troop commander determines that the troop cannot complete 

an assigned task it must report to the squadron commander and await further instructions. 

FOCUS 

3-20. Focus allows the troop commander to determine which tasks the troop must accomplish first, where to 

concentrate the reconnaissance activities, and the assets required. It narrows the scope of operations to get 

important information to squadron operations. Reconnaissance focus links the tasks of answering the higher 

commander’s critical information requirement, supporting targeting, and filling information requirement 
Chapter 3 

3-4 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

voids. The focus might be terrain-oriented, oriented on enemy security forces, or oriented on the civilian 

population. 

3-21. The troop commander narrows the focus further by defining a reconnaissance objective. The troop 

commander uses information from the intelligence preparation of the battlefield process and asset capabilities 

and limitations to decide the reconnaissance objective. The reconnaissance objective consists of (confirm or 

deny) information about a specific geographical location, civilian population, or threat activity, allowing the 

unit to set priorities and focus on the reconnaissance objective when under time limits. 

TEMPO OF RECONNAISSANCE

3-22. Tempo of reconnaissance refers to the level of detail and covertness required of the Cavalry troop to 

accomplish reconnaissance tasks. Tempo of reconnaissance uses four terms; rapid, deliberate, stealthy, and 

forceful (see FM 3-98). The commander must clearly articulate for the subordinates how to interpret these 

terms. 

3-23. Reconnaissance tempo uses factors such as planning time, movement formations, and methods. The 

troop commander visualizes the tempo of reconnaissance through the analysis of three mission variables of 

METT-TC: mission, enemy, and time. 

ENGAGEMENT/DISENGAGEMENT CRITERIA 

3-24. Establishes which targets the troop is to engage, under which circumstances to use direct or indirect 

fires, and which targets they are to hand over to a maneuver element. The commander develops engagement 

and disengagement criteria based on established rules of engagement and analysis of the mission variables 

of METT-TC variables. Commanders plan engagement/disengagement and displacement criteria for all 

missions, even during security tasks. The commander issues guidance to define—

z Engagement and disengagement criteria.

z Bypass criteria.

z Priority of fires.

z Fire support coordination measures.

z Weapons control status (free, tight, or hold).

z Direct fire planning.

z Guidance on actions on contact.

z Reconnaissance handover criteria.

z Rules of engagement.

DISPLACEMENT CRITERIA 

3-25. Displacement criteria defines triggers for a planned withdrawal, passage of lines, or reconnaissance 

handover between units. As with engagement and disengagement criteria, the conditions and parameters set 

out in displacement criteria integrate the commander’s intent with tactical feasibility. 

SECTION II – FORMS OF RECONNAISSANCE 

3-26. Cavalry troops use four of the five forms of reconnaissance in combination with other ground and 

aviation reconnaissance assets to perform reconnaissance missions. Organizations, such as engineers, civil 

affairs, and chemical units, have specific reconnaissance tasks to perform that complement the troop’s overall 

reconnaissance effort. The BCTs use their organic or attached Cavalry troops primarily to conduct 

reconnaissance tasks. The five forms of reconnaissance tasks are zone, area, route, special reconnaissance, 

and reconnaissance in force. 
Reconnaissance Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 3-5 

ZONE RECONNAISSANCE 

3-27. Zone reconnaissance is a form of reconnaissance that involves a directed effort to obtain detailed 

information on all routes, obstacles, terrain, and enemy forces within a zone defined by boundaries (ADRP 

3-90). 

3-28. Commanders choose to task organize the reconnaissance force to mitigate risks associated with an 

increased tempo of operations. Task organizing the force provides Cavalry organizations with an increased 

ability to develop the situation through action in close contact with the enemy and civilian populace. (Refer 

to FM 3-98.) 

TASKS

3-29. The troop commander, in conjunction with the squadron commander, determines the priority of tasks 

that best answer PIRs then focuses the troop’s collection efforts against these requirements. Tasks associated 

with zone reconnaissance are—

z Find and report all enemy forces within the zone.

z Based on engagement criteria, clear all enemy forces in the designated AO within the capability

of the unit conducting reconnaissance.

z Determine the trafficability of all terrain in the zone, including built-up areas.

z Locate and determine the extent of all contaminated areas in the zone.

z Inspect and classify all bridges within the zone.

z Locate fords or crossing sites within the zone.

z Inspect and classify all overpasses, underpasses, and culverts.

z Locate and clear all mines, obstacles, and barriers in the zone (within capability).

z Report reconnaissance information.

3-29. Based on priority, the commander may direct the following: 

z Reconnoiter all terrain within the zone.

z Reconnoiter specific terrain within the zone.

z Locate bypass around built-up areas, obstacles, and contaminated areas.

MISSION COMMAND GRAPHIC CONTROL MEASURES

3-30. The squadron assigns a line of departure, a series of lateral boundaries, and a limit of advance to 

identify the zone. The troop commander further divides the area of operations with additional lateral 

boundaries to define platoon zones. The commander includes additional phase lines and contact points at 

necessary locations allowing platoons operating abreast to make physical contact and coordinate movement 

and information exchange. Commanders designate recognizable landmarks as checkpoints. The higher 

headquarters may include airspace coordinating measures to facilitate aerial reconnaissance within the 

troop’s area of operations and fire control measure. (See figure 3-1, page 3-6.)
Chapter 3 

3-6 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 3-1. IBCT Troop Zone Reconnaissance 

ZONE RECONNAISSANCE CONSIDERATIONS

3-31. The commander develops a plan based on the mission variables of METT-TC. During troop leading 

procedures, the commander considers the following criteria. The commander determines commander’s 

reconnaissance guidance by evaluating information requirements against troop capabilities. 

Friendly Forces 

3-32. The commander incorporates the status of friendly forces into a plan. Friendly force considerations for 

zone reconnaissance include—

z Mission of adjacent and follow-on forces.

z Reconnaissance objectives of higher headquarters and follow-on forces.

z Commander’s critical information requirement of higher headquarters and follow-on forces.
Reconnaissance Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 3-7 

z Higher commander’s reconnaissance focus, tempo of reconnaissance, engagement,

disengagement, and displacement criteria including considerations for adjusting tempo and

engagement criteria during reconnaissance.

z Missions of elements operating within the troop’s area of operations but not under troop control.

z Capabilities and limitations of other elements, such as ground sensors attached to or controlled by

the troop.

Enemy Forces 

3-33. The commander develops a plan focusing largely on how to collect information relating to the priority 

intelligence requirement while considering enemy forces. Enemy force considerations include—

z Type and capabilities of likely enemy weapon systems, surveillance systems, ground sensors,

signal intercept, night observation devices, and related systems.

z Anticipated enemy course of actions including an event template depicting composition, known

and templated disposition, enemy decision points, and potential engagement areas.

Terrain and Weather 

3-34. The commander must consider the effects of terrain and weather on both friendly and threat forces in 

planning considerations. The commander should note that the terrain and weather might affect threat forces 

differently than they effect U.S. reconnaissance forces. Terrain and weather considerations include: 

z Effects on weapon systems effective ranges, laser designators, and night observation devices.

z Effects on UAS and other aviation assets for reconnaissance, transport, resupply, fire support, and

medical evacuation.

z Effects on cross-country mobility.

z Effects on fords and bypasses.

z Effects on civil functions and services.

Civil Consideration 

3-35. When the zone includes civilian populations, and especially when the focus of the zone reconnaissance 

is on civilian populations, the troop leadership must consider the six civil characteristics of ASCOPE (areas, 

structures, capabilities, organizations, people, and events) in relation to the operational variables of PMESII-PT

(political, military, economic, social, infrastructure, information, physical environment, and time). 

3-36. The supported commander’s PIR may be in relation to the ASCOPE factors of key infrastructure 

facilities to include government agencies, political party offices, and nongovernmental organizations. It also 

may include the locations of power and transformer facilities, water treatment plants, food distribution points, 

communications networks, and media outlets. 

3-37. Ensure the leaders know the locations of police stations, armories or barracks, encampments, weapons 

holding areas, and staging areas. Priority intelligence requirements collection may also focus on the ASCOPE 

factors of military forces to include the composition and dispositions of regional and local military, 

paramilitary, and law enforcement organizations and their uniforms, insignias, vehicles, markings, and equipment. 

3-38. Priority intelligence requirements collection activities routinely focus on the ASCOPE factors of 

economics to include the locations, factions, key leaders, compositions, and dispositions of known friendly, 

neutral, and belligerent (criminal) elements. The supported command may also have PIR related to 

identifying ASCOPE characteristics on social variables to include recent trends in public opinion and the 

intensity levels of current and past disturbances, and the effects of lethal force against civilians. Using the 

civil characteristics of ASCOPE to assess the political variable and information activities is also a potential 

for the Cavalry troop zone reconnaissance plan as it relates to the supported commander’s PIR.
Chapter 3 

3-8 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS

3-39. The commander develops a concept of operation that describes the scheme of maneuver. The concept 

should develop focus and tempo for reconnaissance, engagement, disengagement, and displacement criteria 

including changes to tempo based on anticipated contact or requirements.

3-40. The supported commander’s PIR and LTIOV in relation to reconnaissance considerations drive the 

focus and tempo of reconnaissance and engagement criteria. The commander must decide if platoons should 

conduct zone, area, or route reconnaissance, or a combination of the three to enable the troop to complete its 

zone reconnaissance mission to answer the supported commander’s PIR. The troop commander further 

identifies subordinate element tasks, including reconnaissance and security as required, while determining 

task organization and subordinate unit area of operations based on tasks and METT-TC factors. 

3-41. The commander integrates reconnaissance methods such as dismounted, mounted, aerial, and 

reconnaissance by fire in conjunction with deployment methods and selecting movement techniques that 

support the desired tempo of operations. In zone reconnaissance, the troop identifies infiltration routes against 

potential or confirmed enemy positions that allow the use of organic information collection systems, against 

those positions. Determine positons that allow the surveillance of named areas of interest. 

3-42. The commander should plan to establish a screen upon reaching the limit of advance. The commander 

develops target acquisition assignments synchronized with reconnaissance tasks that provide target 

description, location (known or templated), method of engagement, desired target effect and purpose, and 

criteria requiring change from target surveillance to designation (illumination). 

3-43. The troop determines locations and criteria for reconnaissance and target handover. The troop 

coordinates the handover plan with external units, and coordinates engagement criteria between units, 

develops passage of lines graphic control measures to support noncentralized linkup procedures, and 

recommends infiltration routes for the follow-on units during reconnaissance handover planning. 

3-44. Graphic control measures, which support the concept of the operation, include the following: 

z Boundaries identifying the troop’s area of operations, platoon area of operations, line of departure,

and limit of advance.

z Routes or lanes and designated start points, release points, check points, and rally points for each

route.

z Phase lines, checkpoints, and contact points for coordination with other elements.

z Terrain index reference systems or grid index reference systems assist in controlling subordinate

movements and reporting.

3-45. Commanders carefully plan sustainment operations for Cavalry assets before, during, and after their 

commitment as a vital part of maintaining reconnaissance capabilities. Sustainment considerations include 

priorities and security of sustainment assets. Commanders plan movement and positioning of trains and 

sustainment supply points. The commander plans casualty consolidation and evacuation, vehicle recovery 

including secured collection points and maintenance procedures, and equipment and supply destruction 

criteria. Resupply, including emergency resupply and caches, covers the following: 

z Caches for classes I, III, IV, and VIII and other mission-specific items such as batteries.

z Drop points away from vehicle hide positions and observation posts.

3-46. Communications considerations include positioning of the commander, XOs, and the command post. 

If necessary, the commander requests the squadron retransmission team to maintain communications with 

the higher headquarters and other designated elements. Additionally, the commander considers methods and 

techniques for communications between mounted and dismounted elements, and establishes responsibilities 

and procedures for integrating supporting units. 

Integration of Other Elements or Assets 

3-47. The troop integrates other elements or assets into the reconnaissance effort. Other elements or assets 

include UAS and Army aviation assets such as attack reconnaissance units to reconnoiter routes, possible 

infiltration lanes, or key and restricted terrain within the area of operations. The troop uses signals intelligence 

collection assets provided by the BCTs military intelligence to monitor communications traffic or 
Reconnaissance Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 3-9 

transmissions within designated areas containing suspected enemy or supporting forces. Additionally, the 

troop employs LRAS3 and unmanned ground sensors on avenues of approach into the troop’s flanks. Finally, 

the troop integrates engineers to assist with classification of bridges, overpasses, culverts, fords, routes, 

obstacles, infrastructure, environment, and other classifications related to area damage control in the 

designated zone. 

Fires 

3-48. During reconnaissance operations, the troop commander provides the commander’s guidance for fires 

to the fire support officer. The commander’s guidance emphasizes in broad terms when, where, and how the 

commander intends to synchronize the effects of fires with other elements of combat power for mission 

accomplishment. The commander's guidance for fires should include intent and end state. Understanding the 

commander’s intent makes it easier for the fire support officer to advise the commander on how to maximize 

indirect fire capabilities to support all phases of the operation and to achieve the desired end state. 

3-49. The commander provides the fire support officer with platoon priority of fires by phases. Priority of 

fires is the commander’s guidance to the staff, subordinate commanders, fires planners, and supporting 

agencies to employ fires according to the relative importance of a unit’s mission (ADRP 3-09). 

3-50. Once the commander provides the fire support officer with guidance for fires, the fire support officer 

develops a fire support plan. The following are considerations the troop fire support plan should include as a 

minimum: 

z Guidance on establishment of primary and alternate mortar firing points to keep the mortar section

in position.

z Displacement and movement criteria for the mortar section positioning. (See chapter 6 for more

information on use of mortars.)

z Guidance on the establishment of primary and alternate observer positions.

z Trigger points the mortar section can cover as the platoons bound forward.

z Trigger for each of the planning targets.

z Restrictions from higher.

z Attack guidance.

z Fire support tasks in the task, purpose, effect format.

z Priority of fires by phase.

z Assessments (measure of performance and effectiveness).

AREA RECONNAISSANCE 

3-51. An area reconnaissance is a form of reconnaissance that focuses on obtaining detailed information 

about the terrain or enemy activity within a prescribed area (ADRP 3-90). An area reconnaissance provides 

information about a specified area such as a town, ridge, woods, or other feature critical to operations. The 

commander specifies exactly what to look for and why. There are two ways of conducting area 

reconnaissance, by maneuvering elements through the area or by establishing observation posts within or 

external to the area of interest. (Refer to FM 3-98 for more information.) 

TASKS

3-52. Area reconnaissance tasks are the same as the zone reconnaissance tasks mentioned above. Based on 

time and intent, the commander may direct the reconnaissance towards specific information requirements 

only. Primary tasks associated with an area reconnaissance include the following: 

z Find and report all enemy within the area.

z Reconnoiter specific terrain within the area.

z Report reconnaissance information.

3-53. Other tasks include the following: 

z Reconnoiter all terrain within the area.
Chapter 3 

3-10 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Inspect and classify all bridges within the area.

z Locate fords or crossing sites near all bridges within the area.

z Inspect and classify all overpasses, underpasses, and culverts.

z Locate and clear all mines, obstacles, and barriers in the area within capability.

z Locate a bypass around built-up areas, obstacles, and contaminated areas.

AREA RECONNAISSANCE CONSIDERATIONS

3-54. As with the zone reconnaissance, the troop commander ensures that the troop has all known

information and intelligence pertaining to the area of operations. The squadron may designate troop 

infiltration lanes. The troop commander determines the infiltration method and sequence. At times, the 

commander may be required to identify the infiltration lanes. If so, the troop conducts reconnaissance during 

troop leading procedures to identify and select infiltration lanes. The troop commander coordinates for 

support from other reconnaissance and surveillance assets available to the squadron and BCT to assist with 

this reconnaissance. Information from signal intelligence and imagery intelligence can help the commander 

to develop and complete the scheme of maneuver during troop leading procedures. The troop commander 

uses intelligence and imagery, along with a detailed map reconnaissance, to determine how terrain supports 

movement. The commander views the terrain not only from the perspective of how it supports the mission 

success, but also from the enemy’s perspective. Measurement and signature intelligence assets previously 

coordinate for and provided from echelons above brigade intelligence organizations should focus on 

restricted terrain or high-speed avenues of approach to provide early warning of potential enemy movements. 

Aviation and UAS assets can provide early warning and reconnaissance of areas that are inaccessible to the 

ground troop. (See figure 3-2, page 3-11.)
Reconnaissance Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 3-11

Figure 3-2. ABCT Troop Area Reconnaissance 

AREA RECONNAISSANCE PLANNING

3-55. While developing an area reconnaissance plan during troop leading procedures, the commander 

considers the following. (See zone reconnaissance considerations for a detailed list under each category.) 

MISSION VARIABLES OF METT-TC

3-56. The commander considers each mission variable when planning an area reconnaissance. See zone 

reconnaissance planning above. The commander should develop an operations sketch that portrays key 

terrain. The commander sketch also should highlight restricted or protected areas designated by the rules of 

engagement and hazardous areas, intersections, and bridges; and known hostile, belligerent, or criminal areas. 

Commanders should have major terrain features, such as parks; industrial complexes; airports and buildings 

that mask or interfere with communications or Global Positioning Systems (GPSs); assembly areas, including 
Chapter 3 

3-12 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

main thoroughfares and improved road surfaces; escape evasion routes or corridors, access routes, and 

subterranean routes in their sketch. 

3-57. The commander develops a concept of operation. The considerations specific to area reconnaissance 

are below: (See zone reconnaissance for a detailed list of additional considerations under each category.) 

3-58. Focus and tempo for reconnaissance should include the movement to the areas to reconnoiter, including 

techniques and formations if applicable. Commanders select movement techniques that support the tempo of 

reconnaissance and that avoid known enemy forces outside the areas to reconnoiter, they select the route(s) 

and establish a march order on each route, identify filtration route(s) against a higher threat and establish an 

order of march. Additionally commanders identify dismount points and suitable concealed locations to 

position vehicles prior to conducting the reconnaissance and identify vehicle positions that allow use of 

onboard optics, such as LRAS3, to assist in observation and provide overwatch. The commander’s planning 

ensures reconnaissance of the designated areas answers information requirements. 

3-59. Commanders ensure they synchronize and integrate all of the command assets to include target 

acquisition assignments, UAS and Army aviation assets, ground sensors, and engineers with reconnaissance 

tasks. They also integrate available joint sensors into their reconnaissance effort. 

3-60. The commander plans for the area reconnaissance by determining locations and criteria for 

reconnaissance and target handover and priorities and use of fires to maintain maximum range forward of 

platoons. Additionally the commander designates bypass and engagement criteria during both movement to, 

from, and during reconnaissance of designated areas. 

3-61. Finally, the commander develops the disengagement and displacement criteria and actions of the higher 

headquarters reaction force or reserve to support the troop’s conduct of reconnaissance. The commander 

develops graphic control measures that support the concept of operation including boundaries that identify 

the troop’s area of operations, each subordinate element’s area of operations, the line of departure, 

checkpoints and phase lines, fire support coordination measures, and specific areas of interest to be examined 

within a given area of operations. 

INFILTRATION AND EXFILTRATION

3-62. Cavalry troops frequently employ infiltration and exfiltration in executing forms of reconnaissance and 

security to avoid detection and direct fire contact with enemy elements. Infiltration and exfiltration can occur 

during zone, route, or security tasks, but this ATP discusses infiltration and exfiltration as part of area 

reconnaissance, primarily for dismounted troops. Cavalry troops can employ infiltration and exfiltration 

during any form of reconnaissance or security. Area reconnaissance, in particular, is a form of reconnaissance 

that is especially effective for infiltration and exfiltration. Infiltration and exfiltration occurs mounted, 

dismounted, or using a combination of the two methods. Preceding infiltration, the troop may require 

insertion into the area of operations where it conducts infiltration Insertion may be by ground, air, or water 

assets (if they are available and the tactical situation permits). The troop exfiltrates at the conclusion of the 

mission, extraction may be required using ground, air, or water assets. 

3-63. The following list is a sequence of operational events used to mitigate the chance of reconnaissance 

assets being compromised: 

z Insertion (if required) by ground, air, or water assets.

z Execution of the reconnaissance mission.

z Extraction (if required) by ground, air, or water.

z Infiltration (mounted, dismounted, or combination).

z Exfiltration (mounted, dismounted, or combination).

3-64. As an example of infiltration and exfiltration, the troop must emplace observation posts as part of a 

reconnaissance mission. The mission variables of METT-TC dictate deliberate and stealthy emplacement of 

the observation posts. Vehicles infiltrate the area of operations to insert dismounted Scouts who conduct 

infiltration on foot to the observation post locations. The dismounts establish the observation posts to confirm 

or deny the commander’s priority intelligence requirement. When this mission is complete, the dismounted 

Scouts conduct exfiltration to an extraction point (different from the insertion point in most cases) for pickup 

by the vehicles, which then conduct exfiltration to move back to the line of departure. 
Reconnaissance Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 3-13

INFILTRATION

3-65. Infiltration is a form of maneuver in which an attacking force conducts undetected movement through 

or into an area occupied by enemy forces to occupy a position of advantage behind those enemy positions 

while exposing only small elements to enemy defensive fires (FM 3-90-1)intelliggenc. Historically, the scope 

of the mission for the infiltrating force has been limited. Infiltration is also a march technique used within 

friendly territory to move forces in small groups at extended or irregular intervals. (See FM 3-90-2 for a 

discussion of infiltration as a movement technique.) The elements avoid enemy detection when moving 

through or into an area occupied by enemy or friendly forces. The troop infiltrates through the area of 

operations without engaging the enemy or fighting through prepared defenses. Infiltration is slow and often 

conducted under reduced visibility conditions. Synchronized reconnaissance and security operations using 

other assets, as well as intelligence preparation of the battlefield, provide the troop with additional security 

by locating likely enemy positions and identifying infiltration routes that avoid enemy contact. The troop’s 

higher headquarters uses UAS cued by geospatial intelligence, Prophet, and ground sensors to locate gaps in 

enemy positions and assist the troop in infiltrating. 

3-66. Enemy dispositions may require the BCT to attack and destroy specific elements in the enemy’s 

disruption zone or to penetrate the defense so the troop can infiltrate. The BCT also can conduct a feint or 

demonstration as a military deception so the troop can infiltrate at another point. 

Planning Considerations 

3-67. Infiltration and exfiltration requires centralized planning and decentralized execution planning and 

movement security considerations for infiltration and exfiltration are similar. Infiltration is one of the troop’s 

most difficult missions and must be resourced and supported by its higher headquarters. The troop requires 

detailed knowledge of the terrain and current enemy information to enhance survivability and maximize 

chances for success. The BCT higher headquarters, as part of its IPB process, gathers detailed terrain analysis, 

focusing on identifying potential infiltration routes and likely enemy positions. The corps or division analysis 

and control elements of the headquarters to which the BCT attaches, uses several databases to provide 

detailed enemy dispositions and compositions to support infiltration planning. The S-2 evaluates intelligence 

shortfalls. The BCT battalion or brigade operations staff officer (S-3) tasks information collection assets to 

obtain more detail to support the infiltration mission. For example, the BCT S-3 may task UAS to conduct 

aerial reconnaissance of the proposed infiltration lanes to obtain a current picture of the area of operations 

prior to and during movement of the ground Scouts. 

3-68. The troop commander, XO, forward support officer, first sergeant, operations sergeant, platoon 

leaders, platoon sergeants, and the leaders of any supporting organizations review terrain analysis and enemy 

data to identify gaps within enemy dispositions and potential infiltration routes. The troop commander 

participates in this analysis and determines whether to move the troop as a unit or in echelon on single or 

multiple infiltration lanes. The overriding factor in determining to use single or multiple lanes is the ability 

to remain undetected. Space and time separate forces moving along the infiltration lane. Moving the troop 

by platoons is faster and easier to control. Conversely, echeloned movement by sections or individual vehicles 

lessens the likelihood of detection due to the smaller size of the moving elements. 

3-69. The higher headquarters and troop commander plan adequate time for infiltration. The higher 

headquarters and troop commander allow time for potential delays. The higher headquarters and troop 

commander ensure that the troop has sufficient time to reach its area of operations and subsequent primary 

or alternate rally points. The contingency plan addresses actions on contact, aborting the infiltration, shifting 

elements during reconnaissance, and actions if an element fails to arrive or arrives late at the primary rally 

point. The contingency plan designates alternate rally points to use if the enemy occupies the primary rally 

point, the primary rally point becomes compromised, or the rally point identified is unsuitable. 

3-70. The concept of the operation describes the infiltration method, sequencing (by unit of echelon), and 

timing, as well as the higher headquarters’ military deception actions and their purpose or relation to the 

infiltration. The commander uses the concept to identify potential observation posts, objective rally points, 

and vehicle hide positions. The commander also uses the concept to prescribe actions on contact and 

infiltration abort criteria. The commander integrates indirect fires to support the infiltration, including priority 

of fires, and uses the assigned named areas of interests and information requirements to develop 
Chapter 3 

3-14 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

reconnaissance focus and objective. The commander identifies primary and alternate rally points. The first 

Scout element reaching the rally point establishes security and then uses FBCB2 or radio voice to identify 

and exchange recognition signals with follow-on troop elements is an example of actions at rally points. 

3-71. Terrain analysis uses the products of the intelligence preparation of the battlefield process, imagery, 

and ground reconnaissance to enable the troop to identify primary and alternate infiltration routes. These 

routes should avoid enemy positions, obstacles, populated areas, main avenues of approach, and heavily 

populated routes and trails. In addition, movement along the routes must not expose vehicle or Soldier 

silhouettes along crest lines. 

3-72. Graphic control measures include checkpoints or terrain index reference systems to control movement 

and provide mission command flexibility in response to anticipated and unanticipated events. The troop can 

use a checkpoint as a rallying point if a Scout element becomes lost or it must move off the infiltration route 

or observation post. 

3-73. Threat analysis is another planning consideration. Threat analysis assists in identifying the enemy’s 

probable lines for deployment. Threat analysis also assists with identifying lines of contact, battle positions, 

fighting positions, obstacles, security forces deployed for counterreconnaissance, and identifying times of 

reduced alert status. 

3-74. Availability of signal support is also a planning consideration available to the troop commander. 

Possible signal support includes the provision of digital identification means and combat net radio 

retransmission capabilities in follow-on sections to maintain contact with the lead elements. 

3-75. Other planning considerations are the weather, casualty evacuation procedures, and an emergency 

resupply plan. Weather analysis helps to identify periods of reduced visibility. The weather analysis can also 

predict the effectiveness of troop and enemy night observation devices. 

Execution 

3-76. The paragraphs below describe the operational considerations that apply when executing the 

infiltration. Other considerations may apply dependent on the situation. The size of the infiltrating element 

depends on the assigned mission, time available, the amount of available cover and concealment, and the 

acquisition capabilities of both friendly and enemy forces. The troop can infiltrate as a whole or by platoons. 

Infiltration can be executed mounted, dismounted, or a combination of the two. Scouts insert into the area of 

operations by ground vehicle, aircraft, or watercraft depending on the availability of equipment and the type 

of mission. The troop may use single or multiple infiltration lanes or zones. The lanes or zones must have 

sufficient width to allow the infiltrating elements to change their planned routes to avoid contact. The troop 

commander enforces radio listening silence except when the troop is in contact or when directed by the 

commander. Infiltration planning includes indirect fire. The troop employs fires only if the infiltrating 

element makes contact or if the commander employs fires at another location to divert attention from the 

infiltration lane. Fires can be in the form of troop mortars, artillery, rotary- or (in rare circumstances) fixedwing air support, or a combination of all four. The commander’s for guidance engagement and disengagement 

criteria must state actions on contact clearly. If the unit makes visual contact undetected, it continues the 

mission. If detected, elements execute actions on contact. 

Infiltration Order of Movement 

3-77. The troop commanders position themselves in the infiltration order of movement where they can best 

exercise mission command. If a penetration is required, they may initially locate with the maneuver force 

command group. The troop command post and the commanding officer may collocate with the stationary 

force command post to coordinate a forward passage of lines. The commander and the command post 

commanding officer track forward movement using FBCB2. They input radio voice reports into the FBCB2. 

The commander modifies the troop’s scheme of maneuver based on the mission variables of METT-TC and 

directs necessary changes using FRAGORDs via FBCB2 or radio voice to combat net radio to maneuver the 

troop and ensure synchronization of effort. 
Reconnaissance Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 3-15

Inifiltration Methods 

3-78. The troop movement can be as a unit or echeloned by individual platoons. As noted earlier, infiltration 

can be executed mounted, dismounted, or as a combination of the two. Insertion by ground vehicle, rotarywing aircraft, or watercraft depends on the availability of equipment and type of mission. The techniques and 

procedures may also address shifting to alternate infiltration lanes, actions at rally points or objective rally 

points, and actions upon loss of communications. 

Employment by Unit 

3-79. Employment by unit lends itself to mission command as the entire troop is infiltrating at once. The 

troop uses multiple lanes to gain flexibility. The troop infiltrates mounted and dismounted to conduct 

different Cavalry missions. 

Employment by Section 

3-80. The entire troop can infiltrate at one time, which allows the commander to retain control over all troop 

elements. A troop can use multiple lanes to gain increased flexibility. The troop infiltrates using situationally 

appropriate mounted and dismounted movement techniques to conduct different tactical missions. 

Dismounted Infiltration 

3-81. The troop commander directs Scouts to conduct dismounted infiltration when there is—

z Available time.

z A requirement for stealth.

z Expected or achieved enemy contact through visual means.

z Terrain or enemy occupied or dominated areas that Scout vehicles cannot move through.

z A primary concern for security.

Mounted Infiltration 

3-82. Though an infiltration may be primarily mounted, dismounted activities may be required during the 

operation to achieve stealth and security. The troop commander directs Scouts to conduct mounted infiltration 

when there is—

z Limited time.

z Known enemy locations.

z Distance requiring mounted movement.

Aerial Insertion 

3-83. The planning and conduct of a troop aerial insertion is similar to an air assault operation. FM 3-99 

discusses air assault operations in detail. The planning team must include the squadron commanding officer; 

the S-2, S-3; the battalion or brigade logistics staff officer (S-4); the battalion or brigade signal staff officer 

(S-6); the fire support officer; the aviation liaison officer; the Air Force air liaison officer; and the troop 

commander. The plan accounts for deceptive actions, use of reserves, suppression of enemy air defense, 

actions at the landing and pickup zones and sustainment to include casualty and medical evacuation. 

Single-lane Infiltration 

3-84. The least desirable technique of infiltration is on a single lane. It requires all infiltrating groups to move 

at intervals in the same lane. The troop commander uses the single lane technique when analysis of the 

mission variables of METT-TC supports the identification of only one gap in the enemy position. The troop 

commander considers the number of vehicles and dismounted Soldiers, time available, route concealment, 

and vehicle and Soldier time and distance interval used to prevent detection. 
Chapter 3 

3-16 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Multiple-lane Infiltration 

3-85. The multiple-lane infiltration technique is the preferred method of infiltration. The troop infiltrates by 

multiple lanes through two or more gaps found in the enemy’s defense. 

Infiltration Actions on Contact 

3-86. When Cavalry elements infiltrate, the detection of one subordinate element may alert the enemy and 

compromise the entire mission. The troop rehearses techniques and procedures for actions with known and 

chance contact during infiltration. For example, if detected subordinate elements return fire, break contact, 

and report. If the Cavalry unit makes visual contact but remains undetected, it bypasses the enemy force and 

continues the mission. The commander’s intent clearly states what the unit should do upon contact with 

the enemy. 

EXFILTRATION

3-87. Exfiltration is a tactical mission task where a commander removes Soldiers or units from areas under 

enemy control by stealth, deception, surprise, or clandestine means (FM 3-90-1). If the troop infiltrates to 

conduct its mission, it can expect to exfiltrate once the mission is complete. The commander conducts plans 

for exfiltration in conjunction with infiltration and refines the plan as the mission progresses. The commander 

plans for contingency exfiltration in the event conditions force the troop or its subordinate elements to 

conduct an unplanned exfiltration. The troop order addresses actions for both planned and unplanned 

exfiltration. 

Planning Considerations 

3-88. Planning considerations for an exfiltration are similar to those for infiltration. The principles of route 

selection, movement formations, and movement security previously discussed in relation to infiltration apply 

during movement along exfiltration routes or to the extraction site. Exfiltration operations require additional 

time to account for unforeseen circumstances, such as inadvertent contact with enemy forces or unexpected 

restricted terrain. Exfiltration timing is critical from a standpoint of morale and mission accomplishment. 

Commanders plan extraction before the operation, with alternate plans for contingencies, such as the 

evacuation of sick or injured personnel. The plan must address actions in the event communications are lost. 

When an element has missed a certain number of required transmissions, the commander assumes that the 

element has a communications problem, is in trouble, or both. The commander must prescribe a plan for no 

communication, resupply, and exfiltration that accounts for all possibilities. In addition, the plan must address 

alternate forms of exfiltration in addition to a linkup with the element’s vehicles. The OPORD may specify 

dismounted exfiltration or defending in place with a later linkup with advancing friendly forces. If the 

element’s vehicles cannot extract the element or if capture is imminent, use any of these means as an 

alternative. 

3-89. Exfiltration extraction points for dismounts should be far enough away from observation posts to 

ensure the enemy does not hear vehicle or helicopter noises. Mountains, dense foliage, and other similar 

terrain features can screen these noises. In flat, open terrain on a clear night, rotary-wing aircraft lose most 

of their audio signature at approximately a five-kilometer distance. Commanders must plan movement routes 

that put ridgelines, rivers, and other restricted terrain between the unit and enemy forces. Near and far 

recognition signals should be coordinated, disseminated, and rehearsed prior to the mission. Lastly, primary 

and alternate linkup points should never be on a single azimuth leading away from the observation post of an 

exfiltration route. 

Exfiltration Methods 

3-90. Ground exfiltration is the preferred method when scouts are in a stay-behind mode (withdrawal or 

delay). Exfiltration by ground is used when—

z Friendly lines are close.

z Widely dispersed enemy forces are present.

z Largely uninhabited areas exist along the route.
Reconnaissance Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 3-17

z Other methods are not feasible.

z Enemy forces are not conducting aggressive or active counterreconnaissance and security activities.

z Terrain degrades the enemy’s ability to maneuver against the exfiltrating element.

z Units must reach an extraction point after the execution phase of the mission is complete.

Extraction 

3-91. Availability of ground vehicles makes extraction the most common method of exfiltration for troop 

elements. Generally, platform-based extraction is used when—

z Covering long distances.

z Cover and concealment are lacking.

z Time of return is essential.

3-92. Extraction by air or water assets is favored under the following conditions: 

z Resources are available.

z Time requirements preclude any other extraction method.

z Heavily populated hostile areas obstruct ground extraction.

z Use does not compromise the mission.

z Enemy does not have air or naval superiority.

3-93. Extraction points should be far enough away from the enemy so extraction assets remain undetected. 

The commander plans movement routes that put restricted terrain between the unit and enemy forces. The 

commander should never put primary and alternate extraction points on a single azimuth leading away from 

the objective. 

ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE 

3-94. Route reconnaissance is a directed effort to obtain detailed information of a specified route and all 

terrain from which the enemy could influence movement along that route. (ADRP 3-90) That route may be 

a cross-country mobility corridor. It provides new or updated information on route conditions, such as 

obstacles, bridge classifications, enemy, and civilian activity along the route. The commander normally 

assigns this mission when wanting to use a specific route for friendly movement. When the reconnaissance 

tempo is necessarily rapid or the desire for specialized route information is high, the Scout platoon should 

augment with engineer reconnaissance capability. 

TASKS

3-95. Route reconnaissance requires the accomplishment of certain tasks, unless otherwise directed by the 

squadron commander. These tasks are not a checklist or arranged sequentially, as some may not be necessary 

for mission accomplishment. If limited by time, the commander directs the reconnaissance only towards 

specific information requirements. The following are tasks associated with a route reconnaissance: 

z Find, report, and, based on engagement criteria, clear within capabilities all enemy forces that can

influence movement along the route.

z Reconnoiter and determine the trafficability of the route.

z Reconnoiter all terrain the enemy can use to affect movement along the route.

z Reconnoiter all built-up areas along route.

z Reconnoiter all lateral routes. Conduct out-posting along lateral routes to identify potential enemy

positions and forces that could influence the route. (See ATP 3-20.96.)

z Inspect and classify all bridges within the area.

z Reconnoiter defiles along the route, clear of enemy and obstacles (within capability), or locate a

bypass.

z Inspect and classify all overpasses, underpasses, and culverts.

z Locate fords or crossing sites near all bridges on the route.
Chapter 3 

3-18 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Locate and clear all improvised explosive devices (IEDs), mines, obstacles, and barriers on the

route within capability.

z Locate bypasses around built-up areas, obstacles, and contaminated areas.

z Report route information.

ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE CONSIDERATIONS

3-96. The higher headquarters specifies the route, including the start point, release point, and other critical 

points along the route. It establishes airspace coordinating measures, specifies the reconnaissance start time, 

and designates a completion time. The troop commander analyzes the terrain to gain an appreciation of the 

danger areas within the area of operations and the nature of the potential enemy using the provided IPB 

products to include imagery. The troop commander determines how much terrain on each flank of the route 

to reconnoiter. Higher headquarters constraints or restrictions may also influence how much terrain to 

reconnoiter. The troop commander coordinates with other reconnaissance and surveillance assets to ensure 

support is available to the squadron and BCT prior to and during reconnaissance. The commander may also 

direct a platoon to conduct a route reconnaissance as a specific task in another mission. (See figure 3-3.) 

Figure 3-3. SBCT Troop Route Reconnaissance 
Reconnaissance Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 3-19

ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE PLANNING

3-97. The troop normally performs a tactical road march to the line of departure and deploys to execute route 

reconnaissance. The commander determines security requirements for the move to the line of departure based 

on the amount and quality of intelligence known about the enemy. The commander also considers the effect 

final disposition of forces has on the troop’s follow-on mission. The commander develops an operational 

concept (see below) that describes route reconnaissance procedures. The zone reconnaissance planning 

considerations in paragraphs 3-31 to 3-38 apply to the conduct of a route reconnaissance with the following 

additional civil considerations. (See zone reconnaissance for additional considerations.) 

z Local government jurisdictions that encompass the route.

z Relief agencies and other nongovernmental organizations using the route.

z Dislocated civilians using the route.

3-98. The commander develops the focus and tempo of reconnaissance and reconnaissance of the route to 

answer the applicable information requirements including identifying requirements to reconnoiter and 

classify the route or designated portions of the route; requirements to conduct an area reconnaissance of 

designated terrain on the flanks of the route; and selecting movement techniques that support the tempo of 

reconnaissance. Considerations for sustainment and communications during the route reconnaissance are the 

same as those for zone reconnaissance discussed in section III of this chapter. The troop commander specifies 

actions at built-up areas and actions on contact with enemy forces or civilians. The commander specifies the 

transition to the follow-on mission after completing the reconnaissance or reaching the limit of advance. 

Additionally, the commander plans for the following: 

z Synchronizing target acquisition assignments with reconnaissance tasks.

z Integrating other elements or assets into the reconnaissance effort including Unmanned Aircraft

System and Army aviation assets.

z Prophet, ground sensors, engineers, and CBRN reconnaissance elements (to reconnoiter for

contamination and bypasses).

z Reconnaissance handover locations and criteria.

z Maintaining maximum indirect fire range forward of the platoons using fires and priorities of fires.

z Bypass and engagement criteria.

z Graphic control measures that support the concept of the operation including—

 Boundaries identifying the troop’s area of operations.

 Subordinate element boundaries lateral to the route to support reconnaissance on the flanks.

 Routes including start points, release points, and checkpoints for other critical points.

 Phase lines and contact points for coordination with other elements.

 Limit of advance.

RECONNAISSANCE IN FORCE

3-99. A reconnaissance in force is a deliberate combat operation designed to discover or test the enemy’s 

strength, dispositions, and reactions or to obtain other information (ADRP 3-90). Battalion-size task forces 

or larger organizations usually conduct a reconnaissance in force. A commander assigns a reconnaissance in 

force when the enemy is operating within an area where the commander cannot obtain adequate intelligence 

by any other means. A unit may also conduct a reconnaissance in force in restrictive terrain where the enemy 

is likely to ambush smaller reconnaissance forces. A reconnaissance in force is an aggressive reconnaissance, 

conducted as an offensive operation with clearly stated reconnaissance objectives. The overall goal of a 

reconnaissance in force is to determine enemy weaknesses to exploit. It differs from other reconnaissance 

operations because it normally attempts to gain information about the enemy and not the terrain. The 

commander plans for the retrograde or reinforcement of the force in case it encounters superior enemy forces. 

The commander also plans to exploit success. 
Chapter 3 

3-20 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

3-100. A Cavalry troop usually conducts its portion of a higher reconnaissance in force as an attack or a 

zone reconnaissance. The Cavalry troop requires augmentation to conduct a reconnaissance in force since it 

must penetrate the security area of a larger enemy force. These augmentations include—

z Tanks or mobile gun systems.

z Helicopter or UAS reconnaissance.

z Artillery (or missile) fire support.

z Engineer mobility and countermobility assets.

z Short-range air defense.

z CBRN reconnaissance assets.

TASKS

3-101. Tasks for reconnaissance in force include—

z Penetrate the enemy’s security area and determine its size and depth.

z Determine the location and disposition of enemy forces.

z Attack enemy positions and attempt to force the enemy to react by using local reserves or major

counterattack forces, employing fires, adjusting positions, and employing specific weapon

systems.

z Determine weaknesses in the enemy’s disposition for exploitation.

z Locate obstacles and create lanes as specified.

z Entering areas of operation in complex terrain not previously occupied by friendly forces, such

as urban environments.

3-102. A unit conducting a reconnaissance in force performs tasks within its capabilities. If it does not have 

the time or resources to complete all of these tasks, the troop commander informs the higher commander 

assigning the mission. The higher commander then issues further guidance on which tasks the troop must 

complete or restates the priority of tasks, which is usually clear from the reconnaissance objective. If, after 

starting the reconnaissance in force, the troop determines that it cannot complete an assigned task it must 

report to the higher commander and await further instructions. 

3-103. The tasks for the Cavalry troop are attack or zone reconnaissance to support the squadron 

reconnaissance in force. Reference zone reconnaissance tasks in this manual for tasks conducted. Refer to 

FM 3-98 for the tasks of the higher command during a reconnaissance in force. 

COMBAT FORMATIONS

3-104. The troop uses different formations based on the mission variables of METT-TC. The troop may use 

a combat formation as part of a reconnaissance in force. The troop moves in one of the movement formations 

during tactical operations—column, line, echelon, box, wedge, or vee. The troop uses two types of 

formations, coil and herringbone, to provide security during halts. All of these formations are flexible in 

execution. The troop commander can modify them according to the situation, enemy, terrain, and factors 

within the troop itself (task organization, combat losses). To ensure the troops can transition into and out of 

the various movement formations easily and quickly, the formations must become second nature for all troop 

elements. (Refer to FM 3-90-1 for more information.) 

TROOP COLUMN AND STAGGERED COLUMN

3-105. The troop uses the column formation when moving on a designated route, when speed is essential, 

and contact with the enemy is not expected. Column and staggered column formation moves the troop quickly 

and efficiently from one place to another. The troop usually moves at a designated speed and with a set 

distance between vehicles when moving in a column formation. The situation and the troop SOP determines 

the march speed and distance between the vehicles. In most situations, the column formation allows the 

fastest movement of any formation. The column formation facilitates effective control of the troop during the 

move, but leaves the troop vulnerable to enemy air or ground attack. 
Reconnaissance Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 3-21

3-106. The staggered column is a modified column formation with elements offset rather than in roughly 

straight alignment (as in the column). Advantages of the staggered column include all-around observation 

and fields of fire and enhanced overwatch capability. The staggered column often entails vehicles moving 

off or near the edge of the roadway, so leaders must exercise extreme caution to avoid IEDs and mines. 

Troop Line 

3-107. The troop line formation, in which elements are roughly abreast during movement, is applicable in 

nearly all troop missions, including during the conduct of defensive tasks. The line formation affords 

maximum reconnaissance (and firepower, if applicable) forward over a wide frontage. A key disadvantage 

is the requirement for overwatch from external or adjacent elements because vehicles or elements moving on 

line can provide only limited security. 

Troop Vee 

3-108. The troop vee formation is common for reconnaissance or security missions. The purpose is to 

provide maximum reconnaissance or firepower forward and to enhance mission command. The forward 

platoons conduct most of the information gathering, reporting, and security tasks while the rear platoons and 

headquarters element, positioned in-depth, provide overwatch, protection, and control the forward movement 

of the troop. 

3-109. In addition to positioning maximum assets forward, the vee formation allows the troop commander 

to mass combat power at the decisive point. The vee also gives the troop depth, flexibility, and immediate 

mutual support during movement. Disadvantages include limited firepower to the front and somewhat limited 

security compared to other formations. 

Note. One means of enhancing security in the vee is to position the troop mortars in or near the 

center of the formation to provide indirect fire support across the troop front. 

3-110. The troop split-vee is a variation of the vee formation. Its use is in conjunction with the traveling 

overwatch movement technique in reconnaissance and security missions. In the split-vee formation, the 

forward platoons move approximately abreast to provide maximum reconnaissance or security. The rear 

platoons, if the troop has three or more platoons, work in-depth, but each rear platoon initially follows one 

of the forward platoons while it conducts the operation. The rear platoons key their movement on the progress 

of the forward platoons based on guidance from the troop commander. 

3-111. The split-vee allows the rear platoons to maintain positions from which they can provide support 

rapidly to the forward platoons as necessary. In turn, the forward platoons can reconnoiter routes and 

positions for the rear platoons. A key disadvantage of the split-vee is limited firepower to the front. 

Troop Wedge 

3-112. The wedge formation, though not ordinarily a typical Cavalry formation, may occur when enemy 

contact is likely and the troop must fight for information. The wedge provides elements with effective local 

security and mutual support. The formation allows the troop to employ responsive firepower to the front and 

flanks and to shift fires rapidly. A disadvantage of the wedge is limited reconnaissance capability to the front. 

Troop Coil and Herringbone 

3-113. The troop uses the coil and herringbone formations to establish effective all-around security when it 

must halt during an operation. The troop commander should develop SOPs for the formations and conduct 

rehearsals so that correct execution becomes automatic for all elements. 

3-114. The coil formation provides a perimeter defense during extended halts or lulls in the operation. 

Platoons and other elements position themselves in a roughly circular formation to cover enemy avenues of 

approach to the position. 
Chapter 3 

3-22 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

3-115. The troop uses the herringbone when it must assume a hasty defense, with 360-degree security, 

during a short halt. Scouts may dismount to provide greater security, and elements should move off the road 

if terrain allows. 

Note. When executing the coil or herringbone formation, platoons and other elements must 

exercise extreme caution to avoid IEDs and mines emplaced off or along the edge of the roadway.

SPECIAL RECONNAISSANCE

3-116. Special reconnaissance is reconnaissance and surveillance actions conducted as a special operation 

in hostile, denied, or politically sensitive environments to collect or verify information of strategic or 

operational significance, employing military capabilities not normally found in conventional forces (JP 3-

05). These actions provide an additive capability for commanders and supplement other conventional 

reconnaissance actions. Even with long-range sensors and overhead platforms, some information in the target 

area may only come from visual observation or other collection methods. Special operations forces can gain 

access to denied, hostile areas, worldwide communications, and specialized aircraft and sensors so they can 

conduct special reconnaissance against targets that are inaccessible to other forces. 

3-117. Cavalry troops are the most likely to encounter special reconnaissance forces; therefore, Cavalry 

troops must prepare to conduct reconnaissance handover with special reconnaissance forces. Special 

reconnaissance activities include environmental and armed reconnaissance, target and threat assessment, and 

post strike reconnaissance. (Refer to JP 3-05 for more information.) 

SECTION III – RECONNAISSANCE HANDOVER 

3-118. Reconnaissance handover is the action that occurs between two elements in order to coordinate the 

transfer of information and/or responsibility for observation of potential threat contact, or the transfer of an 

assigned area from one element to another (FM 3-98). Reconnaissance handover may cover an area or zone, 

such as an area of operations, a named area of interest, and a target area of interest. Reconnaissance handover 

may involve visual, electronic, digital, or analog observation and information sources or any combination of 

these. A reconnaissance handover is usually associated with a designated reconnaissance handover 

coordination point or a phase line designated as a reconnaissance handover line. 

3-119. A reconnaissance handover provides the information connection, the overlapping communications, 

and the commander’s reconnaissance focus required when planning and executing layered reconnaissance 

and surveillance operations with multiple assets. The commander’s focus may differ for each echelon. (Refer 

to FM 3-98 for more information.) 

RECONNAISSANCE HANDOVER PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 

3-120. Reconnaissance handover shares several tasks with battle handover including relief in place, linkup, 

and passage of lines. (Refer to FM 3-90.2.) Unlike battle handover, however, it does not imply direct fire contact. 

PREPARATION 

3-121. The troop begins coordination as soon as they identify reconnaissance handover requirements 

between units. The commander finds handover criteria in the higher headquarters order. Coordination 

includes establishing a communication plan between the units as necessary. The communication plan 

includes radio frequencies, net identifications, needlines for enhanced position location reporting systems, 

host files required to conduct the linkup (if units are from different maneuver control systems), and 

communications security variables for communications. Recognition signals are established and confirmed 

to prevent fratricide. If necessary, the troop coordinates indirect fires and fire support coordination measures, 

critical friendly zones, preplanned targets, final protective fires, and obscuration missions, 

3-122. Troops conduct coordination to identify the transfer of command relationships for subordinate 

platoons and elements between units as necessary. A technique is for the troop to leave a Scout section in 

contact with an enemy security element while the rest of the troop continues reconnaissance farther into the 
Reconnaissance Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 3-23

area of operations. As the squadron shifts the handoff between the units, the follow-on unit may accept 

operational or tactical command of the Scout section until one of its own sections is able to relieve the original 

Scout section that is observing the enemy element. Additionally, the higher headquarters may issue on-order 

missions to other information collection assets to assist in the handover. A technique is to task a UAS to 

establish and maintain contact with a moving force while conducting a reconnaissance handover between the 

troops and a follow-on unit. As reconnaissance handover becomes imminent and final coordination begins, 

this level of coordination supports the reconnaissance handover by allowing the UAS maximum time on 

station and ensuring redundant observation during handover. 

3-123. Rehearsals are important before executing any reconnaissance handover. During rehearsals, 

elements involved in the reconnaissance handover synchronize their plans and SOPs to ensure clarity and 

understanding during execution. (See FM 6-0 for additional information on the conduct of rehearsals.) 

EXECUTION 

3-124. The troop may conduct reconnaissance handover with follow-on or security (stationary) forces, 

accept reconnaissance handover from a forward force, or control the handover between subordinate elements. 

The requirement to maintain liaison and exchange information becomes even more important as the distance 

closes between the forces executing reconnaissance handover. Units may establish liaison by collocating their 

commanders, XOs, and command posts, if applicable. The follow-on unit may attach a Scout section to the 

troop to facilitate coordination and handover. Establish face-to-face liaison, if this is not possible, units must 

establish a reliable digital and/or voice linkup to exchange critical information. 

3-125. When conducting face-to-face linkup, units complete final coordination and exchange information, 

and then confirm that reconnaissance handover is complete based on the specified criteria. If conducting 

target handover, the accepting unit acquires the target before handover is complete. The unit that is handing 

over responsibility supports the unit accepting handover by executing responsibilities of the stationary unit 

while conducting a forward passage of lines or relief in place. If follow-on forces are conducting an attack, 

the unit handing over the reconnaissance may facilitate the attack by conducting reconnaissance pull, 

executing targeting, and employing previously coordinated indirect fires. (See FM 3-90-2 for a discussion of 

those responsibilities.) 
This page intentionally left blank. 
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 4-1 

Chapter 4 

Security Tasks 

Troop missions will often transition from reconnaissance to security along the front, 

flank, or rear of friendly units, facilities, population, or areas that require protection 

from unforeseen circumstances. Security tasks provide the protected force with 

reaction time and maneuver space. Troops often perform security tasks as part of a 

squadron security task, but they can perform security independently as situations allow.

The main difference between the conduct of security and reconnaissance is that 

security orients on the force, area, facility, or population to protect, while 

reconnaissance seeks information on enemy, terrain, populations, and infrastructure. 

SECTION I – BASICS OF SECURITY TASKS 

4-1. Security tasks provide higher commanders with reaction time and maneuver space to react to the enemy 

and to develop the situation. There are five security tasks, screen, guard, cover, area security, and local 

security. Cavalry troops are incapable of cover and cannot conduct guard without significant augmentation. 

4-2. The Cavalry troop organization and organic equipment makes it difficult to execute a security mission 

above screen without augmentation. The troop may participate in some other security tasks as a member of 

a robust combined arms force. Commanders at all levels must consider the mission variables of METT-TC 

when employing their units in a security role. 

4-3. Current trends stress the likelihood of Cavalry troops conducting operations in noncontiguous, 

extended areas of operations, possibly creating significant gaps. The troop commander uses all available 

assets to minimize these gaps. Despite the continual evolution of sophisticated sensors and collection assets, 

a troop’s common operational picture is never perfect, especially in periods of limited visibility or adverse 

weather. The troop prepares to conduct security missions because uncertainty is always present in an 

area of operation. 

Note. Troops in the BFSBs Cavalry squadron cannot perform the same set of security missions as 

their counterparts in the Cavalry squadrons of the ABCT, IBCT, and SBCT. The BFSB troops can 

conduct screening missions for a limited time. 

SECURITY FUNDAMENTALS 

4-4. Successful security operations depend on properly applying the five fundamentals of security 

which are: 

z Provide early and accurate warning.

z Provide reaction time and maneuver space.

z Orient on the main body to protect.

z Perform continuous reconnaissance.

z Maintain enemy contact. (FM 3-90-2 discusses each of the five security fundamentals in detail.)

Note. During stability operations, providing early and accurate warning is much harder to 

achieve. Proximity to the local population results in less distance and less reaction time because. 

When friendly forces alienate the local populace, detecting threats becomes more difficult because 

locals are less likely to warn U.S. forces of pending threats and threat developments. 
Chapter 4 

4-2 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

METHODS AND MANAGEMENT 

4-5. Security is not divorced from reconnaissance. Security fundamentals and reconnaissance fundamentals 

complement each other. Cavalry units conduct security tasks using reconnaissance methods and management. 

COMMANDER’S SECURITY GUIDANCE 

4-6. The squadron commander assigning a security mission and the troop commander must address special 

considerations, such as those listed below, when conducting security task planning. (Refer to ATP 3-20.96 

and FM 3-98 for more information.) Similar to the squadron commander, the troop commander must analyze 

the area of operation and build the necessary depth to provide reaction time and maneuver space to the force 

to protect. The troop commander determines appropriate locations and types of observation posts oriented on 

the force to secure. The commander develops requirements such as time to establish an observation post 

(OP), augmentation, intelligence support, and fire support planning, as well as integrating engineers, air 

ground operations, and logistics. Also planned are special requirements in addition to mission command and 

sustainment asset locations. 

4-7. The Cavalry troop commander develops security guidance based on the squadron commander’s 

guidance and overall plan. An understanding of this guidance aids the Cavalry troop commander in planning 

and executing the troop mission. The squadron guidance enables the commander to clarify troop guidance 

and intent for subordinate leaders. Disseminate the Cavalry commanders’ guidance to the lowest level so all 

leaders and Soldiers understand and can execute the mission. The elements and purpose of security guidance 

are similar to reconnaissance guidance. (Refer to FM 3-98 for more information.) 

z Focus (to include security objective).

z Tempo of security.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria.

z Displacement criteria.

SECTION II – FORMS OF SECURITY 

4-8. The five forms of security tasks are screen, guard, cover, area security, and local security. The 

paragraphs below discuss each task. (Refer to FM 3-98 for more information.) 

SCREEN 

4-9. Screen is a security task that primarily provides early warning to the protected force (ADRP 3-90). A 

screening troop is a security element, which primarily observes, identifies, and reports information related to 

a commander’s PIR while aggressively executing counterreconnaissance, which impedes, harasses, or 

destroys the enemy’s reconnaissance effort. Although it provides the least amount of protection of any 

security mission, a screen is appropriate when operations have created extended flanks, when gaps between 

forces exist that are not secured in force, or when early warning is needed over gaps that are not considered 

critical enough to require security in greater strength. 

4-10. Troops plan screens in-depth. Depth prevents the threat from easily identifying and penetrating the 

screen, prevents gaps from occurring when observation posts displace, and facilitates the destruction of 

enemy reconnaissance elements without compromising critical operations (FM 3-98). 

4-11. Troops screen a stationary force to the front, flanks, and rear of the main body. Troops screen a moving 

force to the flanks or rear. Screening operations are not performed forward of a moving force. Cavalry troop 

conduct a zone reconnaissance, reconnaissance in force, or part of a guard forward of the moving force. 

Cavalry troop commanders plan a series of observation posts, augmented with patrols to ensure surveillance 

of dead space to establish a screen. 
Security Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 4-3 

TASKS

4-12. Execution considerations guide screen planning. Tasks that a Cavalry troop conducts for the screen 

include―

z Allow no enemy ground element to pass through the screen undetected and unreported.

z Maintain continuous surveillance of all avenues of approach that affect the main body’s mission.

z Conduct counterreconnaissance to destroy, defeat, or disrupt all enemy reconnaissance elements,

within capabilities and according to engagement criteria.

z When facing an echeloned enemy force, locate and identify the lead elements that indicate the

enemy’s main attack, as prescribed in the enemy’s order of battle based upon IPB.

z Determine the direction of enemy movement, maintain contact, and report threat activities even

while displacing.

z Impede and harass the enemy within capabilities without becoming decisively engaged and while

displacing to provide the protected force commander with additional time and maneuver space.

z Detect and report all enemy elements attempting to pass through the screen, both ground and

aerial, to provide the protected force commander early warning of enemy activities.

EXTENDED SCREENS

4-13. When METT-TC dictates an extended screen across frontages in excess of what the Cavalry troop can 

effectively accomplish, the troop commander, as part of the mission analysis, determines where to accept 

risk in the extended screen based on the IPB analysis and identifies what additional augmentation is required 

to cover the area of operation. 

DEPTH

4-14. Depth allows one element of the screen to pass enemy contact to another element without displacement 

by conducting a reconnaissance handover. The term screen line is descriptive only of the security provided 

along the forward trace. Depth allows the troop to do the following: 

z Prevent the enemy from identifying and penetrating the screen.

z Prevent gaps in the screen from occurring with displaced or destroyed screening elements.

z Facilitate the destruction of enemy elements without compromising critical observation posts.

z Maintain contact with enemy elements without compromising observation posts.

4-15. Troop commanders assign platoons areas of operation that allow multiple observation posts to establish 

a screen and establish depth. Troop commanders plan section level operations in-depth to support their 

security plan. Often the observation posts on a screen do not support each other by direct fire. At a minimum, 

the observation posts must support and overlap by observation, while still observing named area of interests 

and avenues of approach. The mortar section positions behind the screen where they can support all elements 

of the screen. The degree to which depth can be attained is a function of many factors, including 

the following: 

z Higher commander’s intent and concept as expressed in the OPORD.

z Geographical location of the screen based on time-distance analysis.

z Positioning of the protected force, area, facility, or population.

z Engagement criteria.

z Disengagement criteria.

z Displacement criteria.

z Width of the area of operation.

z Terrain and avenues of approach it will support.

z Attachments and detachments.

z Logistical and fire support from the main body.
Chapter 4 

4-4 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

STATIONARY SCREEN 

4-16. Planning considerations include establishing observation posts in-depth and conducting patrols to 

ensure adequate surveillance of the assigned area of operation (see figure 4-1, page 4-6). Screens are active, 

with stationary observation posts as only one part of the mission. To ensure that continuous overlapping 

surveillance occurs, the troop employs observation posts, patrols (mounted and dismounted), aerial 

reconnaissance, and sensors. 

4-17. A troop executing a screen requires the following minimum guidance from higher headquarters. (Refer 

to FM 3-98 for more information.) The troop commander evaluates each consideration discussed in the 

following paragraphs when developing the troop plan and information collection plan. 

z Location of the initial screen.

z Movement or maneuver to occupy the screen.

z Assigned area of operations for subordinate elements.

z Security.

z Air and ground integration.

z Surveillance and acquisition assets.

z Fires.

z Protection.

z Mission command.

z Sustainment.

z Control of displacement to subsequent positions.

z Reconnaissance handover between screening elements.

SCREEN LOCATION

4-18. The troop commander determines the likely enemy avenues of approach based on detailed IPB, and 

directs the screen accordingly. The troop commander utilizes platoon boundaries, phase lines, and 

recognizable terrain features to assign subordinate areas of operations. The troop commander knows the 

capabilities and limitations of organic and attached sensors, and arrays them along the screen line to maximize 

their effects 

SCREEN OCCUPATION

4-19. The troop commander determines if the troop conducts a zone reconnaissance, infiltration, or tactical 

road march to the screen based on time-distance analysis of both friendly and enemy units. The troop 

commander keeps the screening force within logistical and fire support range of the main body. The troop 

commander considers the time required to establish primary positions, identify subsequent positions, rehearse 

displacement lanes, and emplace mortars. 

OBSERVATION POST EMPLACEMENT

4-20. The troop commander is responsible for planning the emplacement of section level observation post 

positions to gain observation on assigned NAIs. The commander provides mission orders and security 

guidance to subordinate platoons and other attachments with the commander’s intent and security guidance. 

That guidance also develops the indicators for subordinates to look for within NAIs. 

DEFINE TRIGGER LINES AND DECISION POINTS

4-21. The troop commander develops specific engagement and disengagement criteria for the platoons to 

trigger specified actions. These can include displacement to secondary observation posts or the initiation of 

direct or indirect fires against the enemy. Producing a well-developed set of engagement, disengagement, 

and displacement criteria for the subordinate units allows the commander to exercise effective control over 

the troop. 
Security Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 4-5 

ENGAGEMENT AREA DEVELOPMENT

4-22. Screens use engagement areas where the commander anticipates engaging enemy reconnaissance 

elements. The commander utilizes the seven engagement area development steps and plans them in-depth 

throughout the screen. Those steps are: 

z Identify likely avenues of approach.

z Identify the enemy scheme of maneuver.

z Determine where to kill the enemy.

z Plan and integrate indirect fires.

z Conduct an engagement area rehearsal.

4-23. The commander understands the battlefield geometry of utilizing indirect in conjunction with aircraft 

and manages airspace utilizing vertical, lateral, and time separation. The commander determines critical 

station times, tasks, and priorities of support for subordinate elements. The troop commander plans mortar 

firing points to provide organic indirect fire support for screening platoons. With assistance from the troop 

fire support team, the troop commander incorporates artillery, casualty evacuation, and aviation assets (refer 

to FM 3-04) to conduct counterreconnaissance, mass effects in engagement areas, engagement of enemy 

high-value and high-payoff targets, support maneuver elements, and assist subordinate elements to disengage 

and displace. 

MOBILITY, COUNTERMOBILITY, AND SURVIVABILITY

4-24. The troop commander addresses the mobility of screening forces during planning by developing a 

detailed terrain and enemy analysis, and subsequently developing a maneuver plan to address those factors. 

The troop commander develops primary and alternate routes and lanes to direct subordinate units during 

displacement. The troop commander impedes enemy maneuver using fires and obstacles. The troop 

commander improves the survivability of the force through detailed planning and synchronization of 

enablers, such as the use of indirect fire obscuration to support displacement. A troop commander is unlikely 

to have a prepared position due to the nature of a screen; thus, the troop commander must use the terrain and 

enabler capabilities deliberately. 

4-25. Passage lanes and passage points. The troop commander coordinates with the supported unit to develop 

passage lanes and passage points to prevent fratricide and enable troop elements to displace, or the protected 

force to pass forward of the screen. The troop commander plans and disseminates near and far recognition 

between the passing and stationary unit. 

4-26. Positioning of mission command nodes. The troop commander places the troop command post in a 

location to maintain communication with subordinate elements and higher headquarters. The troop command 

post should remain outside of enemy contact, and incorporated in the troop displacement plan. 

4-27. Sustainment. The troop commander has to determine how to resupply screening platoons while 

maintaining contact with the enemy. A troop commander can establish troop or platoon level service stations, 

or pre-position caches at planned subsequent positions. At each resupply point, the troop commander 

determines the appropriate type and amount of the required classes of supply. Commanders should plan each 

resupply point so that resupply occurs while the unit is not in contact with the enemy. Casualty collection 

points can serve as troop internal logistic release points established by the first sergeant, where platoon 

sergeants conduct linkup, and transfers of casualties and supplies. The troop commander plans resupply 

following the troop’s displacement and passage of lines prior to conducting a follow-on mission. 

4-28. When elements of the screen displace to other positions, the displacement is normally event-driven. 

The screen continues to maintain contact and provide security while displacing. (See figure 4-1.) The 

following factors may dictate displacement: 

z Approach of an identified and specified enemy element.

z Detection by an enemy force.

z Relief by a friendly unit.

z Movement of the main body.
Chapter 4 

4-6 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 4-1. SBCT Troop Stationary Screen 

MOVING SCREEN 

4-29. The troop can conduct a moving screen to the flank or rear of a moving force. The troop does not 

screen forward of a moving force. Screening the rear of a moving force is essentially the same as a stationary 

screen. As the main body moves, the troop occupies a series of successive positions. The main body 

commander directs time and distance factors to maintain movement. Sensors or UAS can enhance the screen 

during the maneuver of Scout platoons or sections; they can work to extend the areas of coverage, also. 

4-30. The planning considerations for a stationary screen also apply to a moving screen; however, the 

commander must account for the movement of the main body. The moving flank screen poses additional 

considerations. The width of the screen area is not as important as maintaining orientation on the main body 

and maintaining continuous observation of avenues of approach that might affect the main body’s maneuver.
Security Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 4-7 

GRAPHIC CONTROL MEASURES

4-31. The inherent dual orientation of a moving flank screen (the direction of movement versus orientation 

of the screen) poses challenges for operational control. Graphic control measures facilitate both orientations. 

The use of these control measures provide maximum flexibility in terms of mission execution. Troop 

commanders issue FRAGORDs to adjust their plans to the enemy situation using these control measures. The 

procedures in the following paragraphs apply when using graphic control measures to a moving flank screen. 

4-32. While use of graphic control measures and the requisite planning seems excessive, they provide 

maximum flexibility in terms of mission execution. The troop commander can issue FRAGORDs to adjust 

the plan to the enemy situation. 

Phase Lines 

4-33. Troop commanders use phase lines to control the unit’s movement. The troop commander plans to use 

these phase lines as on-order boundaries to control platoon movement (parallel to the main body direction of 

travel). The commander places phase lines based on planned width of a Scout platoon’s screen (perpendicular 

to the main body direction of travel). The troop commander does not divide avenues of approach with a phase 

line. Troop commanders use phase lines rearward of the initial screen to control retrograde movement (toward 

the main body). The troop commander uses phase lines as subsequent (on-order) screen lines. 

Objectives, Checkpoints, and Axis of Advance 

4-34. The commander can also use objectives, checkpoints, or an axis of advance to control the movement 

of task organized maneuver platoons and teams in a command relationship to the troop. The commander 

positions these forces to support the Scouts on the moving screen. If the Scouts make enemy contact, the 

commander can use these control these control measures to designate battle positions for these maneuver 

forces to occupy. The commander should also plan subsequent (on-order) battle positions between the screen 

limit of advance and the main body. The conduct of a delay by the troop using these battle positons will 

provide additional time for the protected force to react to the enemy attack. 

Mortar Firing Points 

4-35. The commander uses mortar firing points or checkpoints to control movement of the mortar section. 

The commander positions firing positions rearward of the screen line where they allow the mortars to fire 

two-thirds maximum range forward or cover likely avenues of approach. The commander plans subsequent 

(on-order) mortar firing points between the screen line and the main body. 

Note. Displacement criteria for the moving screen should be event-driven It should take the form 

of triggers related to the movement of the main body in conjunction with survivability 

considerations for the screening elements.

OCCUPYING THE SCREEN

4-36. The troop can use three basic techniques for occupying a moving force’s flank screen. The factors that 

determine the employment of a specific technique, or a combination of techniques, are the enemy situation 

(and the knowledge available about the enemy), the squadron commander’s intent, the speed at which the 

main body is moving, the screening force’s capability, and the terrain. All three techniques require the troop 

to maintain contact with the main body, orient the screen in relation to the main body’s maneuver, and 

conduct reconnaissance and screen in two directions (to the flank of the main body and to the direction 

of travel). 

4-37. The troop crosses the line of departure separately from the main body in the first technique and 

conducts a tactical road march within an area of operation parallel to the force. The troop then deploys from 

a release point to the initial screen positions and orientation. Platoons occupy observation posts as they reach 

them. Unmanned Aircraft Systems can conduct surveillance forward of the troop or assist in maintaining 

contact with the main body. Sensors can augment observation posts by providing long-range surveillance of 

enemy avenues of approach. The parallel tactical road march technique is the fastest but least secure 
Chapter 4 

4-8 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

technique for providing a flank screen for a moving force. The technique is appropriate to employ when the 

main body is moving very quickly, the line of departure is not a line of contact, or earlier reconnaissance and 

security indicates enemy contact is not likely in the area through which the troop is moving. 

4-38. In the second technique, the troop crosses the line of departure separately from the main body and 

conducts a zone reconnaissance within an area of operation parallel to the force. Platoon elements establish 

the screen as they arrive at their positions. The second technique is appropriate when the main body is moving 

slower, the line of departure is not a line of contact, or earlier reconnaissance indicates enemy contact is 

possible in the troop area of operation. 

4-39. In the third technique, the troop crosses the line of departure with the main body and conducts a zone 

reconnaissance out to the screen. The technique requires more time but provides the most security for the 

main body. The third technique is appropriate when the main body is moving slowly, the line of departure is 

the line of contact, or the enemy situation is vague or enemy contact is expected. 

REPOSITIONING THE SCREEN

4-40. The speed of the main body, distance to the objective, and the enemy situation determines the 

movement of the screen. Troop movement centers on a designated route of advance. The route is parallel to 

the axis of advance of the main body and is large enough to accommodate rapid movement of the troop and 

to facilitate occupation of the screen. The troop keeps the route clear to ensure rapid movement of the troop’s 

enablers, sustainment, and mission command assets. Sustainment elements should remain off the main route 

unless moving or traveling on alternate routes in depth. 

4-41. Both ground and aerial reconnaissance assets use the four basic movement methods: alternate bounds 

by observation posts, alternate bounds by units, successive bounds, and continuous marching to reposition 

the screen. (Refer to FM 3-90-2 for more information.) 

LIMITED VISIBILITY

4-42. Troop commanders must plan for limited visibility conditions, as these conditions often occur during 

the conduct of a screen mission. Troop commanders should never allow gaps in the screen when aircraft 

cannot fly or Scouts cannot observe their assigned area. The troop can take the following actions to guard 

against gaps: 

z Adjust ground observation posts.

z Employ night and thermal observation devices.

z Increase the use of electronic surveillance devices, ground-based sensors, and LRAS3.

z Place trip flares and observation posts along dismounted avenues of approach.

z Conduct dismounted patrols.

4-43. Depth in the screen facilitates acquisition of enemy forces that may elude forward elements. 

Coordinating the conduct of patrols prevents misidentification and fratricide. Rigorous noise, light, and litter 

discipline during limited visibility prevents compromise and bypass of observation posts by enemy forces. 

Additional observation posts established as listening posts take advantage of the extended distance sound 

travels at night. Observation posts plan and use indirect fires illumination rounds as necessary. 

GUARD 

4-44. Guard is a security task to protect the main force by fighting to gain time while also observing and 

reporting information and preventing enemy ground observation of and direct fire against the main body. 

Units conducting a guard mission cannot operate independently because they rely upon fires and functional 

and multifunction support assets of the main body (ADRP 3-90). 

4-45. A guard is a form of security operation whose primary task is to protect the main body (see figure 4-2,

page 4-10; figure 4-3, page 4-11). The guard fights to gain time while observing and reporting information. 

The guard force differs from the screen because it prevents observation and direct fire on the force, area, or 

facility to protect. The guard normally fights the enemy when necessary to gain time, and allows freedom of 

maneuver for the main body. The guard force reconnoiters, attacks, defends, and delays to prevent enemy 
Security Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 4-9 

ground observation and direct fire against the main body. (Refer to ADRP 3-90, FM 3-98, and ATP 3-20.96 

for more information.) A guard is appropriate when—

z Contact is expected.

z An exposed flank or an enemy force is to the rear.

z The main body is conducting a retrograde.

z A requirement exists for greater protection than a screen can provide.

4-46. A troop does not commonly conduct a guard mission unless augmented with additional combat power. 

A squadron conducting a moving guard normally tasks a troop with the conduct of a zone reconnaissance or 

a screen. The troop conducts a screen or defense during a stationary guard. On order, the troop collapses the 

screen depth or width to provide overlapping fires to the guard force. Existing knowledge of the terrain or 

enemy situation, speed of advance of the main body, and nature of the main body objective may determine 

which mission the troop receives. (Refer to chapter 3 of this ATP for zone reconnaissance and reconnaissance 

in force.) 

4-47. Guard tasks. Troops do not commonly conduct a guard. Tasks listed below are squadron tasks. 

Squadrons conducting a guard perform certain tasks. Staffs consider whether subordinate units conducting a 

guard mission require augmentation to execute their mission. The tasks for a guard are as follows: 

z Destroy the enemy advance guard causing the enemy main body to prematurely deploy, within

their capabilities.

z Guard forces maintain surveillance of avenues of approach into the AO.

z While displacing, the guard force impedes and harasses the enemy within their capability denying

the enemy the ability to place effective direct fires on the protected force.

z The squadron causes the enemy main body to deploy, and then reports its direction of travel.

z Guard forces deny the enemy ground elements the ability to pass through the security area

undetected and unreported.

z The guard force destroys or causes the withdrawal of all enemy reconnaissance patrols

z Maintains contact and reports enemy activity during all operations the guard force maintains

contact with the protected force and other forces operating on its flanks.

z The guard force prevents direct fires upon the main body.

z Troop commanders analyze requirements and notify the squadron commander of those tasks they

will be unable to accomplish. If unable to augment, the squadron commander notifies the protected

force commander who then task organizes more augmentation or provides guidance on the

prioritization of tasks.

4-48. Cavalry troops, as part of a squadron, should conduct engagement area (EA) development when 

conducting a guard or a defense. Troop and platoon leaders should also conduct an abbreviated or limited 

form of EA development during screens, area security missions, or any time employing observation posts. 

Commanders may use the acronym “I ID PEPR” to aide in EA development. The engagement area is where 

the troop commander intends to mass fires and their effects on the enemy. Indirect fire, attack aviation, or 

close air support should be the preferred forms of engagement. After considering the mission variables of 

METT-TC, the commander conducts EA development. During steps 4, 5, and 6 the troop emplaces obstacles 

first to ensure they tie into terrain and shape the EA, then emplaces observation and direct fire to overwatch 

those obstacles, and finally plans indirect fires to support the plan and cover any dead space that the EA 

might have. However, the commander may conduct Steps 4 to 6 in any order. The steps for EA development 

are--

1. I- Identify likely enemy avenues of approach.

2. I - Identify most likely enemy course of action.

3. D - Determine where to kill the enemy.

4. P - Plan and integrate obstacles.

5. E- Emplace direct fire weapon systems.

6. P - Plan and integrate fires.

7. R - Rehearse the execution of operations within the engagement area.
Chapter 4 

4-10 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 4-2. ABCT Troop as Part of Squadron Guard 
Security Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 4-11

Figure 4-3. IBCT Troop as Part of Squadron Flank Guard 

COVER 

4-49. A covering force is a self-contained force capable of operating independently of the main body, unlike 

the screen or guard force, to conduct the cover task (FM 3-90-2). The covering force develops the situation 

early and deceives, disorganizes, and destroys enemy forces. Cavalry troops conduct either zone 

reconnaissance or screen operations depending on the squadron commander’s scheme of maneuver. (Refer 

to chapter 3 and the paragraphs discussing the guard in this ATP for more information. Refer to FM 3-98 and 

ATP 3-20.96 for more information.) The covering force fights to gain time while observing, reporting 

information, and preventing enemy ground observation of and direct fire against the main body. A covering 

force reconnoiters attacks, defends, and delays to prevent enemy indirect fires, direct observation, and direct 

fires against the main body. A covering force accomplishes all the tasks of screening and guard forces. A 

covering force or portions of it often engage with enemy forces; therefore, the covering force must have 

substantial combat power to engage the enemy and still accomplish its mission. Covering forces perform the 

following functions―

z Operate beyond the artillery range of the main body.

z Determine the distance from the main body using the mission variables METT-TC.

z Develop the situation earlier, fight longer and more often, and defeat larger enemy forces.

z Prevent enemy units from bypassing the covering force.

z Subordinate elements of the covering force perform the following actions:

 Reconnoiter.

 Screen.

 Attack.
Chapter 4 

4-12 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

 Defend.

 Delay.

AREA SECURITY 

4-50. Area security is a security task conducted to protect friendly forces, installations routes, and actions 

within a specific area (ADRP 3-90). It includes the reconnaissance of the area. Area security missions include 

protecting personnel, airfields (as well as terrain around airfields from which surface-to-air missiles can be 

launched), convoys, facilities, main supply routes, lines of communications, terrain features, towns, 

equipment, and critical points. Area security prevents the enemy from influencing friendly actions in a 

specific area and denies the enemy use of an area for its own purposes. Area security may include occupying 

and establishing a 360-degree perimeter around the area or taking actions to destroy enemy forces already 

present in that area. Area security operations may require the execution of a wide variety of supporting 

operations and tasks. When assessing the mission variables of METT-TC, the supported commander should 

identify the troop that may require augmentation when performing area security. 

TROOP TASKS

4-51. A troop can execute the following tasks when conducting area security operations―

z Screen.

z Route security.

z Convoy security.

z Local security.

z Zone, area, and route reconnaissance.

z Offensive and defensive tasks (within capabilities).

AREA SECURITY TECHNIQUES

4-52. The troop conducts an area security mission by preventing enemy ground elements from directly 

observing friendly activities within the secured area. The troop prevents (within capabilities) enemy 

maneuver forces from penetrating the defensive perimeter of the defended force or installation. The troop is 

more likely to be in close contact to a local population in area security, requiring a close relationship with 

local leaders and security forces to assist in identifying enemy forces. 

4-53. The commander has the platoons employ a variety of enabling tasks such as patrolling, establishing 

observation posts, conducting convoy security, occupying battle positions, conducting ambushes, and 

establishing combat out-postings to accomplish security tasks. The commander can react to unforeseen 

contingencies using a quick reaction force or through retasking platoons or sections. The troop can execute 

ambushes and preemptive strikes with greater precision by integrating information collection platforms and 

techniques with the products of the IPB process. 

4-54. Early warning of enemy activity is paramount in area security and provides the commander with time 

and space to react. Successful operations require proper reconnaissance planning coupled with dismounted 

or mounted patrols and aerial reconnaissance especially when securing fixed sites. METT-TC determines 

augmentation requirements for the troop; thus, consideration for the needs of aviation, maneuver forces, 

engineers, and artillery is given. Failure to conduct continuous reconnaissance can create a vulnerable 

location for the enemy to infiltrate or attack. 

4-55. A troop conducting area security conducts an area reconnaissance of its assigned area of operations to 

detect and then eliminate enemy forces and capabilities that can damage or destroy the protected force. The 

troop establishes a defensive perimeter to protect the unit, installation, facility, or activity if situationally 

appropriate. Troop commanders typically divide the perimeter into platoon areas with boundaries and contact 

points. Perimeters vary in shape and distribution of assets based on the results of intelligence preparation of 

the battlefield and METT-TC. The most probable direction of attack may require extra weighting of assets 

to defeat an attack or infiltration. The troop orients on the force to protect. 
Security Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 4-13

4-56. The troop commander ensures platoons integrate observation posts, ground-based sensors, UAS, 

human intelligence, and mounted and dismounted patrols. Organic or attached tanks, Cavalry fighting 

vehicles, mobile gun systems, and other antiarmor weapon systems orient on high-speed avenues of approach. 

Unmanned aircraft systems and ground-based sensors provide overlapping surveillance coverage at extended 

distances from the perimeter. 

4-57. Platoons can establish perimeters around critical infrastructures, and high-value assets, while other 

units conduct operations to provide security and assist with the provision of minimum essential stability tasks. 

The troop commander also can position reaction forces between several secured locations. Other missions or 

tasks to support area security may include screening along zones of separation or other designated areas to 

detect violations of peacekeeping agreements, conducting route and convoy security, conducting checkpoint 

operations to monitor or control movement, and patrolling between secured locations. 

CONVOY SECURITY

4-58. Both military and civilian convoys are subject to attack from insurgents, necessitating constant 

security. Civilian convoys do not have an internal security force like most military convoys; therefore, a 

security force often escorts convoys of two or more vehicles. The size of the convoy determines the number 

of required security force elements. The general rule of thumb is one platform for every five vehicles in the 

civilian convoy.

4-59. The commander ensures artillery and mortar support planning for the entire route of movement. The 

commander integrates troop mortars into the escort element itself or positions artillery elements to provide 

fire support along the route. The commander coordinates with the squadron fires cell to provide fire along 

the route of movement to ensure that fire support teams can enter the radio voice or digital fire direction 

center net, send routine location reports, and request and adjust fires at a moment’s notice. The commander 

coordinates call signs, frequencies, areas of employment, schedules of movement, and target numbers prior 

to convoy movement. 

4-60. The troop addresses air defense of the convoy if an air threat is possible. The convoy elements review 

small arms air defense procedures and establish orientation areas. The commander integrates air defense 

reinforcements into the movement and defense plan. If the route falls under an existing air defense umbrella, 

the squadron staff, along with the controlling air defense headquarters, should make the appropriate 

coordination. 

4-61. Convoy security operations in an urban or built-up area require different emphasis and techniques than 

those in rural areas. The population density and characteristics of the area may require the use of nonlethal 

weapons and the careful application of lethal weapons. To ensure they apply minimum essential force to 

minimize loss of life and destruction of property, leaders must conduct detailed planning, coordination, and 

control. Convoys should move through populated areas when these areas are least congested and therefore 

less dangerous to the security of the convoy whenever possible. Convoy operations may require assistance 

from military or local police and other government agencies to secure the route before the convoy enters the 

built-up area. 

4-62. The commander, the XO, and the 1SG plan for sustainment in convoy security operations. Fuel and 

maintenance elements should be included in the convoy itself or pre-positioned in secure areas along the 

route. Troops perform a detailed precombat inspection before the convoy starts movement to ensure that 

vehicles are full of fuel, perform preventive maintenance checks and services, and eliminate potential 

maintenance problems. Troops plan and rehearse casualty evacuations in detail along the entire movement 

route. To ensure that immediate medical support is available, coordination occurs and is maintained among 

the convoy security force, the troop command post, the troop trains command post (when deployed), and the 

designated units along the route. Troops plan and rehearse aerial medical evacuation in detail. The preferred 

means of evacuation is aerial medical evacuation because of the possibility of operating over extended 

distances from the squadron aid station. 

ROUTE SECURITY TECHNIQUES

4-63. Enemy forces use various methods to sever supply routes and lines of communications. Roads, 

waterways, and railways may have mines or improvised explosive devices along them. The enemy can locate 
Chapter 4 

4-14 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

ambush sites adjacent to the route or can destroy bridges and tunnels by demolitions making long routes 

difficult to secure. 

4-64. Route security is a subset of area security. Cavalry troops and other forces conduct route security to 

prevent a threat from attacking, destroying, seizing, containing, impeding, or harassing traffic along the route. 

Troops prevent the enemy from placing obstacles on or destroying portions of the route to interdict traffic. 

Route security operations are defensive in nature and, unlike screen missions, are terrain-oriented. 

Route Security Force Tasks 

4-65. The troop commander deploys platoons on and to the flanks of a designated route. The troop performs 

the following functions to accomplish the route security mission: 

z Conducts mounted and dismounted reconnaissance of the route and key locations along it to ensure

the route is trafficable.

z Conducts route clearance. (If required, task organizes with attached engineers and other elements.)

z Conducts intelligence preparation of the battlefield to identify sections of the route to search for

suspected enemy locations.

z Establishes roadblocks and checkpoints along the route and lateral routes to stop and search

vehicles and persons on the route and those entering the route, which may require augmentation

from other units, such as an Infantry platoon.

z Occupies key locations and terrain along or near the route.

z Aggressively conducts ground and aerial reconnaissance and surveillance to maintain route

security.

z Establishes observation posts (covert and overt) or ambushes at critical points to watch for

enemy activity.

Route Security Techniques 

4-66. The following discussion highlights two techniques that the Cavalry troop can use to execute route 

security depending on the nature of the enemy, purpose of the security mission, and characteristics of the 

route. 

4-67. In the first technique, the troop conducts route reconnaissance at irregular intervals to avoid developing 

a pattern that the enemy may exploit. The troop reconnoiters the route, including conducting zone 

reconnaissance to either flank. Organic or attached UAS or supporting aviation assets can reconnoiter in 

advance of ground troops or assist in screening the flanks. In addition to conducting reconnaissance, troop 

elements may escort engineers conducting route clearance, improvement, or maintenance; clearing terrain at 

potential ambush sites; and repairing damage caused by enemy actions. 

4-68. The second technique entails out-posting (see ATP 3-20.96). The troop employs out-posting on critical 

portions of a route or key avenues of approach to the route to provide early warning of enemy elements 

attempting to interdict the route. The primary purpose of out-posting is to acquire the enemy and direct 

employment of reaction forces or indirect fire to destroy them. The troop can employ out-posting either 

covertly or overtly 

4-69. Based on METT-TC, the troop can employ out-posting either covertly or overtly. Covert techniques 

involve designated personnel discreetly staying behind once vehicles stop at a predetermined location and 

everyone has dismounted then remounted the vehicles. Patrolling under limited visibility to the out-posting 

site is another technique for covert employment. Overt employment involves parking a vehicle along the 

route or establishing visible observation posts to provide security to the route possibly to influence the enemy 

to conduct activities such as IED emplacement on another route preferably one with covert out-posting. Outposting can include fire support assets, troop mortars, or howitzer sections that can mass fires to support the 

observation posts. 

Route Security Procedures 

4-70. Troop mortars deploy into fixed firing positions collocated with command posts on the route. Fire 

support assets are controlled and deployed so fire support is available to all reconnaissance elements along 

the route. Fire support can mass effects at critical positions or into areas of most frequent enemy activity. 
Security Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 4-15

Fire plans should have priority targets to support convoy or patrol movement and final protective fire to 

support checkpoints or out-posting. 

4-71. Enemy forces may emplace IEDs, mines, and demolitions; create craters or abatises; and establish 

ambushes or roadblocks to interdict or destroy traffic; therefore, units conduct patrols at irregular intervals 

along the route based on enemy trends and recent activities. Air, mounted, and dismounted patrols facilitate 

detection of enemy forces before they can emplace obstacles or execute ambushes. Leaders organize patrols 

with sufficient forces to reconnoiter off-route ambush sites and with enough combat power to survive initial 

enemy contact. Engineers, Infantry, military police, and other assets should augment reconnaissance patrols 

to increase combat effectiveness based on enemy capabilities. Other techniques to defeat enemy attempts to 

interdict the route or ambush convoys include the following: 

z Deceptive mock convoys under escort to determine enemy reactions.

z Ambushes along known or suspected dismounted approaches to the route.

z Registered indirect fires triggered by sensor cues such as an improved remotely monitored

battlefield sensor system, followed by patrols.

4-72. Although UAS cannot secure the route, they can assist in observing the route, cover large areas in a 

short time on a continuous basis, and provide depth to the screen securing the route. Ground sensors are a 

technique to use for surveillance of key avenues of approach or areas that do not require continuous 

surveillance by scouts. Ground sensor and UAS employment reduce the Soldier requirement and logistical 

demands on the troop’s resources.

LOCAL SECURITY 

4-73. Local security consists of observation posts, local security patrols, perimeter security, and other 

measures to provide close-in security for a force. The amount of training on these latter tasks and the 

resources devoted to conducting them in an area of operation depends on the mission variables of METT-TC. 

4-74. Local security includes any measure the troop takes against threat and enemy actions. Local security 

includes finding any enemy forces in the immediate vicinity and knowing as much as possible about their 

intentions. Local security prevents surprise and is important to maintaining the initiative. 

4-75. The troop provides local security by—(See ATP 3-37.10 for a detailed discussion of local security 

activities.) 

z Establishing a contiguous defensive perimeter around its location.

z Employing obstacles and command detonated mines around and within that defensive perimeter.

z Conducting stand-to.

z Using effective camouflage.

z Using observation posts and patrols.

z Employing strict movement control.

z Enforcing noise and light discipline.

z Enforcing operations security.

z Employing proper communications procedures.

z Establishing specific alert levels within the troop.

Note. The troop can use mutual overwatch to enhance 360-degree security. While overwatch may 

not prevent the enemy from attacking a particular element, it can mitigate the enemy’s ability to 

engage decisively all friendly forces at once allowing friendly elements to interdict, defeat, and 

destroy attacking enemy forces before they can withdraw.
Chapter 4 

4-16 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

COUNTERRECONNAISSANCE 

Counterreconnaissance is a tactical mission task that encompasses all measures taken by a commander to counter 

enemy reconnaissance and surveillance efforts. Counterreconnaissance is not a distinct mission, but a component 

of all forms of security operations (FM 3-90-1). The focus of counterreconnaissance is to deny the enemy any 

information about friendly operations. Units deceive, defeat, or destroy enemy reconnaissance efforts to deny 

them information. 
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-1 

Chapter 5 

Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

The squadron’s fundamental role is to conduct reconnaissance and security during the 

BCT’s execution of decisive action tasks. The squadron conducts offensive, defensive, 

and stability tasks as a part of the BCT to acquire accurate information about the 

disposition of enemy forces to shape the situation for the decisive operation. The 

squadron prohibits the enemy from acquiring accurate information about friendly 

forces and conducts reconnaissance and security while the BCT is in transition. 

Cavalry troops conduct reconnaissance and security as part of a squadron during the 

BCT’s execution of decisive action tasks. The Cavalry troop conducting 

reconnaissance and security builds the BCT commander’s situational understanding, 

provides reaction time and maneuver space, and allows the commander to seize, retain, 

and exploit the initiative.

SECTION I – RECONNAISSANCE AND SECURITY IN THE OFFENSE 

5-1. The techniques described in this chapter are complimentary to the reconnaissance and security chapter 

discussions. For readers’ ease, comprehension, and concision, the techniques are in a separate chapter. A 

vignette illustrates each task and shows appropriate Cavalry troop techniques for each task execution in a 

decisive action context. The techniques show how to apply doctrinal concepts to actual situations and 

missions. The solutions to each tactical problem are not prescriptive. Commanders must always determine 

the most effective employment for their unit in a given situation. However, these vignettes provide basic 

planning considerations that troop commanders should address when preparing task executions. The selected 

examples below do not cover every form of reconnaissance and security. 

5-2. The commander briefs subordinates using the five-paragraph field order as seen in the first vignette. 

For simplicity and brevity, the vignettes presented discuss in detail only select planning considerations, 

guidance, graphics, and warfighting functions that apply to each solution. Actual mission analysis and 

planning require more detail than what is in the examples below. 

SECURITY TASKS IN SUPPORT OF THE OFFENSE 

5-3. A squadron conducts security operations during BCT offensive operations to provide reaction time and 

maneuver space, which allows the BCT commander to develop audacity, concentrate combat power, achieve 

surprise, and maintain tempo of the operation. When a squadron provides security in the offense, it is 

generally by conducting an advance guard, flank guard, or moving screen. 

5-4. A troop may conduct security tasks as part of the Cavalry squadron during BCT to focus on the conduct 

of offensive tasks within decisive action. The troop provides reaction time and maneuver space so the BCT 

commander can develop audacity, concentrate combat power, achieve surprise, and maintain the operation’s 

tempo. 

MOVING SCREEN

5-5. A moving screen operates to the flank or rear of BCT offensive operations. A squadron conducts a 

moving screen during offensive operations with Cavalry troops and scout platoons. The Cavalry troops and 

scout platoons work in coordination to establish a series of observation posts that provide early warning to 

the main body of potential enemy threats and defeat enemy reconnaissance efforts. 
Chapter 5 

5-2 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Squadron Mission 

5-6. The squadron mission for this vignette is in a five-paragraph operations order. References to annexes 

and appendixes are notional. The vignettes after moving screen do not adhere to the standard five-paragraph 

format. They include only essential information for the vignette. 

Situation 

5-7. The situation paragraph for this vignette is in the following subparagraphs. 

z Terrain, see annex B, Intelligence.

z Weather, see annex B, Intelligence.

z Enemy forces, intelligence reports indicate that enemy forces control the town of RUFU and are

using it as a local command and control center. (See figure 5-1, page 5-6.) The enemy is composed

of irregular forces operating in six- to eight-man teams. The enemy protects the command and

control center using small arms, mortars, and antitank guided munitions in defensive positions.

The town of RUFU has friendly ties with the towns of LQUI and KWILL. LQUI and KWILL

have up to 30 enemy fighters that may reinforce RUFU. Teams of 3-5 men will attempt to use

mountain passes to reinforce defensive positions in RUFU.

z Friendly forces, see annex C, Operations.

z Interagency, intergovernmental, and nongovernmental organizations, see Annex V, Interagency

Coordination.

z Civil considerations, see annex K, Civil Affairs Operations.

z Attachments and detachments, see annex A, Task Organization.

5-8. For these vignettes, coordinating instructions, below, list task organization as squadron available 

resources. The troop commander should determine when to request available resources. 

Mission 

5-9. The squadron mission statement is as follows. The IBCT squadron conducts a screen of phase line 

(PL) COLTS from 030400DEC20XX to 070400DEC20XX to protect the BCTs attack into objective (OBJ) 

LEON. 

Execution 

5-10. Commander’s intent is as follows:

z Purpose. The purpose of this operation is to conduct a moving screen along PL COLTS to provide

the BCT maneuver space and reaction time. Doing so will prevent enemy reinforcements from

affecting rifle BN’s during their attack into OBJ LEON (RUFU).

z Key tasks are—

z Identification of enemy reinforcements.

 Rapid interdiction by indirect fires and close air support (CAS).

 Maintaining redundant mission command capability.

 Synchronization with the rifle battalion’s movement (triggers).

5-11. End state. Reinforcements prevented from observing the rifle battalions (enemy); approaches to OBJ 

LEON retained (terrain); collateral damage minimized (civil); squadron consolidated, reorganized, and 

preparing for future operations (friendly). 

5-12. Commander’s reconnaissance and security guidance. Commanders issue reconnaissance and 

security guidance to complement the commander’s intent. For this vignette, commander’s reconnaissance 

and security guidance is in coordinating instructions. (Refer to FM 3-98.) 

5-13. Concept of operations. (See figure 5-1, page 5-6). The concept of operation has five phases: Phase I, 

prepare for operations; Phase II, occupation of AO Joey; Phase III, occupation of AO Ben; Phase IV, 

occupation of AO Jessie; Phase V, consolidation and reorganization. 

z Phase I, Prepare for Operations. Phase I begins upon receipt of this OPORD and ends with the

insertion of C Troop at landing zone (LZ) STRAWBERRY. Sustaining operation 1: B and C
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-3 

Troops assist fire support cell (FSC) in preparing speedballs for emergency resupply. Critical to 

this phase are pre-combat inspections, execution of the air mission brief, and rehearsals. 

Conditions to transition to the next phase require completed air mission briefs, built resupply 

packages, green medical evacuation conditions, A Troop postured to provide convoy security to 

protect the ground assault convoy, and troop rehearsals and squadron confirmation briefs are 

complete. 

z Phase II, Occupation of AO Joey. Phase II begins with the insertion of C Troop at LZ

STRAWBERRY and ends with the insertion of B Troop into LZs PLUM and GRAPE. Critical to

this phase is the rapid establishment of a dismounted screen of PL COLTS in AO Joey. Shaping

operation 1: C Troop establishes OPs within AO Joey focused on PL COLTS. Conditions to

transition to the next phase require that C Troop establish OPs, B troop postures in pickup zone

(PZ), and the squadron tactical command post (TAC) positions to control the operation.

z Phase III, Occupation of AO Ben. Phase III begins with the insertion of B Troop into LZs PLUM

and GRAPE and ends with the insertion of C Troop into LZs PEACH and APPLE. Critical to this

phase is the rapid establishment of a dismounted screen of PL COLTS in AO Ben. Shaping

operation 2: B Troop establishes OPs within AO Ben oriented on PL COLTS. Conditions for

transitioning to the next phase require that C Troop displaces from their OPs, IBCT rifle battalions

reach PL BROWNS (trigger for C Troop movement), and FSC postures to conduct planned

resupply.

z Phase IV, Occupation of AO Jessie. Phase IV begins with the insertion of C Troop into LZs

PEACH and APPLE and ends with the displacement of B and C Troops, when IBCT rifle

battalions secures OBJ LEON. Critical to this phase is the rapid establishment of a dismounted

screen of PL COLTS in AO Jessie. Decisive operation: C Troop establishes OPs within AO Jessie

focused on PL COLTS. Conditions to transition to the next phase require IBCT rifle battalion to

secure OBJ LEON and to complete aerial resupply of B and C Troops.

z Phase V, Consolidation and Reorganization. Phase III begins with the displacement of B and C

Troops from their respective zones and ends when the squadron closes on the tactical assembly

area (TAA) and prepared for future operations. Critical to this phase is synchronizing the

withdrawal from zones Ben and Jessie and the air movement to the squadron TAA. On order, B

and C Troops will displace from their OPs in zones Ben and Jessie, and conduct air movement to

the squadron TAA once OBJ LEON is secure.

5-14. Scheme of movement and maneuver. The squadron conducts the scheme of movement and maneuver 

in five phases. Phase I, prepare for operations; Phase II, occupation of AO Joey; Phase III, occupation of AO 

Ben; Phase IV, occupation of AO Jessie; and Phase V, consolidation and reorganization. 

z Phase I, Prepare for Operations. A Troop’s (ground assault convoy security) planning priorities

are downed aircraft recovery, reinforce IBCT rifle battalion in vicinity of OBJ LEON, reinforce

the IBCT squadron screening PL COLTS, secure emergency resupply tactical convoy operation

(TCO), and assume REDCON 2 no later than (NLT) XXXX.

 B Troop supporting effort 2 (SE2) conducts mission planning, rehearsals, and an air mission

brief to prepare for security operations. B Troop also assists the FSC in constructing four

speedballs (CL I, V, VIII) for resupply operations during Phase IV.

 C Troop (SE1) conducts mission planning, rehearsals, and air mission brief to prepare for

security operations. C Troop assists FSC in constructing four speedballs (CL I, V, VIII) for

resupply operations during Phase IV and assumes PZ posture at squadron LZ NLT XXXX.

 FSC main effort (ME) constructs eight speedballs (CL I, V, VIII) for aerial resupply

operations during Phase IV.

 Headquarters and headquarters troop (HHT) supporting effort (SE3) secures the squadron

main command post and maintains RETRANS Team 1 at REDCON 2 to support mission

command across the squadron’s area of operations.

z Phase II, Occupation of AO Joey. A troop (convoy security). No change to planning priorities.

 B Troop (SE1) assumes PZ posture at squadron LZ NLT XXXX to enable rapid infiltration

of AO Ben.
Chapter 5 

5-4 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

 C Troop main effort (ME) conducts air assault to LZ STRAWBERRY (refer to FM 3-99) and

establishes a screen of PL COLTS in AO Joey. C Troop establishes platoon OPs focused on

NAIs 7 and 8 to provide early warning and reaction time to IBCT rifle battalion during their

movement to OBJ LEON. The squadron TAC will move with C Troop throughout the

operation.

 FSC (SE2) is ready to conduct emergency resupply as necessary.

 HHT (SE3), no change.

z Phase III, Occupation of AO Ben. A troop (convoy security). No change to planning priorities.

 B Troop (ME) conducts air assault to LZs PLUM and GRAPE and establishes a screen of PL

COLTS in AO Ben. B Troop establishes platoon OPs focused on NAIs 4 and 5 to provide

early warning and reaction time to IBCT rifle battalion during their movement to OBJ LEON.

 C Troop (SE1) maintains their OPs in AO Joey to provide early warning and reaction time to

the rifle battalions. C Troop moves to PZ BANANA and assumes PZ posture once the IBCT

rifle battalion reaches PL BROWNS (trigger for movement).

 FSC (SE2), no change.

 HHT (SE3), no change.

z Phase IV, Occupation of AO Jessie. A Troop, (convoy security). No change to planning priorities.

 B Troop (SE1) maintains their OPs in AO Ben to provide early warning and reaction time to

the rifle battalions. B Troop assumes PZ posture for exfiltration at LZs PLUM and GRAPE

once the rifle battalions secure OBJ LEON. BPT receive aerial resupply at LZs PLUM and

GRAPE, if required.

 C Troop (ME) conducts air assault air from PZ BANANA to LZs PEACH and APPLE and

establishes a screen of PL COLTS in AO Jessie. C Troop establishes platoon OPs oriented

on NAIs 1 and 2 to provide early warning and reaction time to IBCT rifle battalion while

securing OBJ LEON. On order, receive aerial resupply at LZs PEACH and APPLE. C Troop

assumes PZ posture for exfiltration at LZs PEACH and APPLE once the rifle battalion’s

secures OBJ LEON.

 FSC (SE2) conducts aerial resupply to C Troop at LZs PEACH and APPLE to enable long

duration security operations. Be prepared to conduct aerial resupply of B Troop at LZs PLUM

and GRAPE, if required.

 HHT (SE3), no change.

z Phase V, Consolidation and Reorganization. A Troop (convoy security). No change to planning

priorities.

 B Troop (SE1) conducts air movement from PZs PLUM and GRAPE to the squadron LZ to

begin consolidation and reorganization activities. B Troop is second in the order of movement

for exfiltration.

 C Troop (ME) conducts air movement from PZs PEACH and APPLE to the squadron LZ to

begin consolidation and reorganization activities. C Troop is first in the order of movement

for exfiltration.

 FCS (SE3) provides area sustainment support to maintain the squadron’s combat power.

 HHT (SE2) provides helicopter landing zone control of the squadron’s LZ to enable

exfiltration operations.

 Tasks to subordinate units. See annex C, Operations.

5-15. Coordinating instructions. Normally, the commander includes reconnaissance and security guidance 

with commander’s intent. For this vignette, it is included under coordinating instructions along with PIR and 

available squadron resources. The remaining vignettes, only list relevant aspects of the five-paragraph field 

order, commander’s reconnaissance and security guidance, PIR, and available squadron resources.

z Commander’s security guidance includes the following:

 Focus. Your focus is to ensure the freedom of maneuver for the main body. Identify any

enemy attempting to mass and engage our main body with direct fires and indirect fires.
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-5 

 Tempo of security. The duration of this operation is long duration. Plan for 96 hours. Platoons

will conduct a combination of both long- and short-duration observation posts. The main

body’s movement rate drives the tempo of security.

 Engagement/disengagement criteria. Destroy enemy armed with mortar or heavy machine

guns with attack aviation or indirect fires. Troops should disengage only to maneuver to a

position of advantage over the enemy.

 Displacement criteria. Troops will displace on order. Main body movement rates will drive

displacement.

5-16. Squadron staff and the troop commander break down consolidated PIR into indicators for platoons. 

The following are PIR and indicators—

z Squadron PIR # 12. Will the enemy attempt to reinforce RUFU from NAIs 8, 7, 5, 4, 2 or 1?

Supports BCT commander’s decision to continue attack into OBJ Leon (RUFU).

 Troop SIR # 67. Is there evidence of crew served weapons? Troop SIR # 68. Are there groups

of fighting-age men carrying weapons? Answers Squadron PIR # 12. Will the enemy attempt

to reinforce RUFU from NAI 8 or NAI 2? Which supports BCT commander’s decision to

continue attack into OBJ Leon (RUFU).

z Squadron PIR # 14 Are vehicles prestaged in towns to transport enemy dismounts in NAI 6 will

or NAI 3 (LQUI)? Supports BCT commander’s decision to continue attack into OBJ Leon

(RUFU)?

 Troop SIR # 69. Are there vehicles in NAI 3 (LQUI) that could transport fighters to mountain

passes? Answers squadron PIR # 14, are vehicles prestaged in towns to transport stage

dismounts in NAI 3 (LQUI)? Which supports BCT commander’s decision to continue attack

into OBJ Leon (RUFU)?
Chapter 5 

5-6 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 5-1. IBCT Squadron Moving Screen, Offense 

Troop Mission 

5-17. Situation: See squadron situation above. 

5-18. Mission: C Troop screens to disrupt enemy forces along PL Colts in AO Joey and on order AO Jessie 

from 030400DEC20XX to 070400DEC20XX to protect the BCT’s attack into Objective Leon.

5-19. Execution: Commander’s Intent, Expanded Purpose: Prevent enemy usage of the town of RUFU for 

command and control of the province and allow local forces to regain control. (See figure 5-2, page 5-7.) 

Key tasks include the following: 

z Prevent enemy disruption on the main body.

z Ensure communication with higher and adjacent headquarters at all times.

z Retain security and freedom of maneuver at all times.

z End State, Enemy: Enemy forces unable to reconnoiter or disrupt main body within AO Joey and

Jessie. Friendly: All Soldiers consolidated with squadron at the town of RUFU and postured for

follow-on operations. Terrain: Town of RUFU secured. Civil: Collateral damage minimized.

Commander’s security guidance includes the following:

 Focus. Platoons should focus on the enemy. Identify their movement, information collection

positions, and indirect fire positions. Squadron and troops remain oriented on the main body.
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-7 

 Tempo of security. The duration of this operation is long duration. Plan for 96 hours. Platoons

will conduct a combination of both long- and short-duration observation posts. The main

body’s movement rate will drive the tempo of security.

 Engagement/disengagement criteria. Destroy enemy indirect fire and heavy weapons systems

with aviation fires or indirect fire. Small arms should engage enemy elements of less than

five dismounts.

 Displacement criteria. Displacement will occur in two steps. First step begins when the main

body reaches PL Cowboys. Platoons will begin collecting all assets in preparation for

movement while maintaining observation. Second step, the troop commander retains

authority to begin movement to the PZ.

Figure 5-2. IBCT Troop Moving Screen 

Moving Screen, Phase I 

5-20. The moving screen will occur in four phases. Phase I is movement to AO Joey and movement to the 

observation post. Phase I begins with the troop in PZ posture and ends with the selection of actual observation 

posts and troop locations at AO Joey. 

5-21. The key tasks during this phase are to establish security and communication with troop and squadron 

at the LZ. Next, conduct tactical movement to and set primary and alternate observation posts, mortar firing 

points, a casualty collection point, and the troop command post. Finally, report location of all personnel and 

equipment and observation of assigned NAIs. 
Chapter 5 

5-8 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

5-22. Establish security and communication, allowing the troop to establish a foothold in the area of 

operation and report. Platoons will provide radio checks to the command post prior to moving to their 

observation posts. Troop reports will provide situational understanding to higher headquarters and ensure 

synchronization of sequential or simultaneous events within the brigade. 

5-23. Conduct tactical movement. Platoons have templated observation posts, and the freedom to choose a 

suitable position based on the terrain. While not templated by troop, platoons will select alternate observation 

post locations. When selecting observation posts, platoons must ensure the locations can identify the 

indicators as soon as possible to provide early and accurate warning. Providing the early warning will give 

the main body more time to react to any possible threat. The troop headquarters element will set the troop 

command post, mortar firing point, and casualty collection point. The troop will report the command post 

location to the squadron. The troop also will share the casualty collection point location with the platoons. 

The troop command post should locate in a position that allows the command team to command their 

elements, maintain situational awareness of their area of observation, and report to the squadron. 

5-24. Platoons report the location of all personnel, equipment, and observation of assigned NAIs. The fire 

support officer recommends to the commander the establishment of fire support coordination measures 

within the troop area of operation. Platoons must immediately report the locations of their primary and 

alternate observation posts to the troop. Platoons report once they begin to observe their assigned named 

areas of interest so the commander can build an operational picture for the squadron. The operational picture 

allows the fire support officer to establish the appropriate fire support coordination measure to support each 

observation post. 

Moving Screen, Phase II 

5-25. Phase II is a screen of AO Joey. Phase II begins with platoons establishing observation posts and ends 

with all aircrafts loaded. Key tasks during this phase are establishing operations, security and displacement 

to PZ Banana, routine and priority casualties for evacuation to higher levels of care and the evacuation of the 

remains of personnel killed in action. (See figure 5-3, page 5-9.)

5-26. Establishing observation posts. The platoons must improve their positions continually throughout the 

duration of the observation point. It is imperative that the platoons emplace sensors and obstacles to protect 

the observation posts and allow them to maintain contact with enemy forces. Identify dead space and establish 

restricted operation zones (ROZs) for organic unmanned aircraft systems. Maintaining enemy contact allows 

platoons to provide early and accurate warning to the main body of any enemy personnel moving to reinforce 

the town of RUFU. Maintaining enemy contact also gives the main body reaction time and maneuver space, 

allowing the commander to redirect combat power to neutralize the threat. 

5-27. Security and displacement to PZ Banana. The troop must control the displacement of the platoons to 

PZ Banana. Security must control the displacement of the platoons while ensuring continuous reconnaissance 

of the NAIs and while conducting a deliberate reconnaissance handover with a sensor. 

5-28. Load all routine and priority casualties for evacuation to higher levels of care. Evacuate the remains of 

and personnel effects of personnel killed in action. To maintain continuous reconnaissance, priority and 

routine casualties remain on the screen line and do not evacuate prior to troop movement to the PZ unless 

they transport with the urgent casualties to the troop casualty collection point. 

Moving Screen, Phase III 

5-29. Phase III is movement to AO Jessie and screen set along PL Colts. (See figure 5-3.) Phase III begins 

with aircraft departure from PZ Banana and ends with movement to screen. Key tasks during this phase are—

resupply from troop to platoon level, conduct tactical movement to and set primary and alternate observation 

posts, mortar firing points, the casualty collection point, and the troop command post. Platoons report 

locations of all personnel and equipment and observation of assigned NAIs. 

5-30. Resupply from troop to platoon level. The resupply will take place using the prepackaged supplies 

prepared prior to the start of the mission. Aerial delivery with speedballs is a technique used to deliver 

resupply from helicopters. The speedball in this operation consists of prepackaging supplies of class I 

(subsistence to include water) and class V (ammunition) into aviation kit bags, duffle bags, human remains 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-9 

pouches, or other suitable containers. Helicopters fly as close to the drop point as possible, reduce speed, 

drop supplies, and leave the area quickly. Troops pack the supplies in shock-absorbing material to minimize 

damage. The speedball will travel on the aircraft to LZ Apple and LZ Peach at the same time the platoons 

are displacing by helicopter into AO Jessie, allowing the platoons to continue to operate and still perform 

continuous reconnaissance. The remaining key tasks are similar to phase I. 

Figure 5-3. IBCT Troop Moving Screen, Phase II and III 

Moving Screen, Phase IV 

5-31. Phase IV screen of AO Jessie. Phase IV begins with platoons establishing observation posts and ends 

with all casualties loaded. Key tasks during this phase are establishing observation posts (See figure 5-4,

page 5-11), load all routine and priority casualties and remains of KIAs for evacuation to higher levels of 

care, and conduct tactical movement to Objective Leon. 

5-32. Establishing observation posts. See phase II. 
Chapter 5 

5-10 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

5-33. Load all routine and priority casualties and remains of KIAs for evacuation to higher levels of care. To 

maintain continuous reconnaissance, priority and routine casualties remain on the screen line. The platoon 

does not evacuate KIAs prior to troop movement to the PZ unless they transport with the urgent casualties to 

the troop casualty collection point. 

5-34. Conduct tactical movement to OBJ Leon. To displace from a screen, a troop may use a variety of 

methods to conduct a tactical movement by foot to OBJ Leon. The troop commander controls the 

displacement of the platoon observation posts to ensure security and to maintain continuous reconnaissance 

until the troop is prepared for movement to OBJ Leon. 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-11

Figure 5-4. IBCT Troop Moving Screen, Phase IV and V 
Chapter 5 

5-12 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Warfighting Function Considerations 

5-35. The warfighting function is one technique commanders can use to verify their planning. The 

warfighting considerations described below apply to the above scenario. These are examples for illustrative 

purposes only, other considerations may apply. 

Mission Command 

5-36. Facilities. Establish troop command posts in a manner that is mobile, yet maintains the ability to battle 

track and provide guidance to subordinates. The commander does not have to be physically present in the 

command post but must maintain mobility, retaining the ability to make decisions and provide positive 

leadership. Locate troop command post in a position that best allows the command team to synchronize their 

elements, maintain situational awareness of the area of operation, and report to squadron. 

5-37. Systems. troop commanders must consider the effects of intervisibility lines and equipment capabilities 

on communications when on the move. Troops will establish retransmission sites without compromising 

observation posts. Retransmission antennas only need to be elevated to a minimum height necessary to 

provide line of sight communication. In addition, the commander must consider redundancy in retransmission 

sites when on the move. Units must maintain communication capability while bounding to retransmission 

sites. During a moving screen, troops should plan to use lower tactical infrastructure and establish their 

command posts in a location where they can communicate with subordinate, adjacent, and higher 

headquarters elements, and are able to coordinate resupply and casualty evacuation or other emergency 

requests. 

5-38. Graphics. Create shared understanding by providing troop graphics for a moving screen to the force to 

protect. In addition, the troop must receive a copy of the graphic control measures from the force to protect 

to provide a common operational picture for the operation. Graphic control measures are event based and 

commanders must disseminate changes to subordinates and adjacent higher echelons due to the highly mobile 

nature of this operation. 

Movement and Maneuver 

5-39. Aerial/aviation. Troops must utilize the five phases of the air assault to synchronize efforts with 

aviation elements. Troops must conduct planning as early as possible with the aviators who will support this 

operation. At a minimum, the aviators must be there for the operations order and integrated into a combined 

arms troop rehearsal. 

5-40. Dismounted. To orient on the force to protect, the screening force must operate far enough forward to 

provide reaction time and maneuver space. The main body will dictate the tempo of this operation. The troop 

must prepare to displace or conduct long duration observation posts based on the tempo of the main body. 

Intelligence 

5-41. To ensure continuous reconnaissance, layer area forward of the troop with sensors and ensure an event 

based information collection plan. When nonorganic sensors are not available, the Cavalry troop organic 

sensors (Raven) should cover the gaps in the information collection plan. 

Fires 

5-42. Plan mortar firing point and artillery position bounds to ensure the screening force does not move 

beyond the range of indirect fire support. Planned mortar firing points and pre-planned targets allow for quick 

organic indirect fire support. No fire areas and coordinated fire lines require updates frequently from platoon 

through to BCT level to maintain enemy contact without risking injury to friendly troops. Deconflict airspace 

between troop mortars and available air assets to ensure timely fires and continuous reconnaissance. 

Sustainment 

5-43. Troops should consider resupply methods to enhance continuous reconnaissance. For this scenario, the 

aerial resupply method uses rotary wing assets to deliver preconfigured speedballs. An important planning 

factor is the resupply plan after the speedball is on ground. Before the mission, rehearsals should cover the 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-13

resupply process from the troop to the platoon level. Every Soldier should know when the resupply is taking 

place and the process of how supplies are broken down to the lowest level. If there is a need for an emergency 

resupply, the troop should consider the tailgate resupply method to allow continuous reconnaissance. 

5-44. During a moving screen, evacuate priority and routine casualties during displacement operations. 

Evacuate urgent casualties from the observation posts to higher levels of care without compromising the 

information collection to ensure continuous reconnaissance. The troop commander and 1SG need to place 

special attention on the treatment and evacuation plan for casualties due to the troop operating away from 

normal medical support. 

Protection 

5-45. The commander will designate minimum requirements for the observation posts based on mission 

variables. These minimum requirements include weapon systems, optics (mixture of thermal and night 

vision), personnel strength, and proximity to civilians. The main body tempo will contain uncertainty; 

obstacles emplaced should be flexible enough to move multiple times without significant effort. Commanders 

will ensure platoons maintain the ability to shape avenues of approach for the enemy without reduction of 

the obstacle compromising speed of the moving screen and thus security of the main body. Troop commanders 

should consider the use of spider mines and seismic sensors for longer duration observations posts. 

RECONNAISSANCE TASKS IN SUPPORT OF THE OFFENSE 

5-46. Troops conduct reconnaissance operations during BCT offensive operations to allow commanders to 

understand the situation, visualize the battle, and make decisions. When a troop conducts reconnaissance tasks, 

it conducts zone reconnaissance, area reconnaissance, route reconnaissance and a reconnaissance in force. 

RECONNAISSANCE IN FORCE

5-47. A reconnaissance in force to support BCT offensive operations is a deliberate operation to collect 

information about enemy forces and other information. The troop fights for information to determine enemy 

weaknesses to exploit. The troop is seeking to gain direct contact with enemy forces. A squadron may conduct 

a reconnaissance in force prior to the BCT offensive operation as the only means to satisfy information 

requirements. The example below demonstrates a reconnaissance in force to collect information about a cave 

complex utilized by enemy forces. The BCT cannot collect information by any other means and smaller 

reconnaissance units are subject to ambush. 

Squadron Mission 

5-48. BCT area of operation. The BCT was unsuccessful in obtaining information about the cave complex 

through sensors and needs the squadron to conduct a recon in force to obtain details on the cave complex 

defense for a possible follow on clearance operation. Intelligence estimates assume 75 to 300 fighters 

guarding the complex with Man-Portable Air Defense Systems (MANPADs), recoilless rifles, small arms, 

and mortars. Mission: SBCT squadron conducts a reconnaissance in force to attack by fire in the vicinity of 

OBJ Neal, Barrington, and Hoisington NLT 030400DEC20XX in order to cause the enemy force to deploy 

into their defensive positions. Execution: Squadron will conduct a reconnaissance in force NLT 

030400DEC120XX. Order of march is B Troop, C Troop, and A Troop. B Troop will set SBF oriented on 

OBJ Neal. C Troop will set SBF oriented on OBJ Hoisington. A Troop, with attached mobile gun system 

(MGS) platoon, will follow and assume either troop’s mission. Once establishing direct fire contact, B and 

C Troops continue to execute reconnaissance by fire to determine the extent and orientation of defensive 

positions surrounding the cave complex. On order, A Troop assumes the mission and continues the fight until 

the squadron has met the displacement criteria. (See figure 5-5, page 5-15.)

5-49. Squadron commander’s reconnaissance guidance.

z Focus. Your focus is to determine the composition and disposition of enemy defensive positions.

Identify how the enemy is going to defend the cave complex, including positioning of mortars,

recoilless rifles and obstacles.
Chapter 5 

5-14 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Tempo of reconnaissance. The tempo for this operation is forceful. The approach march will be

overt to cause the enemy to deploy into defensive positions. During actions on the objective, I

want you to gain and maintain direct contact with enemy forces.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. Conduct an aggressive operation. Enemy contact is desired

and imminent. Maintain contact with enemy personnel to observe defensive techniques and to

exploit their weakness. Disengage only to reestablish contact in a position of advantage over

enemy defenses.

z Displacement criteria. We will displace when satisfying the information requirements.

5-50. Squadron consolidated PIR is broken into indicators for platoons by the squadron staff, troop 

commander, or both. Following are PIRs and indicators. 

5-51. Division PIR #2. Where is the enemy’s logistics storage located? (Linked to division commander 

decision to commit combat forces.) Indicators could be— 

z Improved positions near cave complex in division NAI XX (Refined to BDE NAI 1, 2, 3), NAI

YY, NAI ZZ.

z Threat forces protecting complex terrain with three or more fighting positions in division NAI

XX, YY, ZZ.

5-52. BDE PIR #21. What cave entrances are the enemy utilizing? (Linked to BDE commander decision to 

employ DPICM.) Indicators could be—

z Personnel loitering at entrances in NAI 1, 2, 3.

z Attempts to conceal entrance in NAI 1, 2, 3.

5-53. Squadron PIR #221. What is the size of the force defending the threat logistic storage sites? (Linked 

to squadron commander’s decision to halt at PL Lions.) An indicator could be—

z How many enemy dismounts are on the objective?

z Signs of routine vehicle traffic near caves in NAI 1, 2, 3.

z Signs of fires, cooking, sleeping, hygiene, or human waste in NAI 1, 2, 3.

z Signs of cleared fields of fire for heavy weapon systems in NAI 1, 2, 3.

5-54. Squadron PIR #222. What is the force array for high value targets? Where is threat reconnaissance 

force? (Linked to squadron commander’s decision to employ counter reconnaissance hunter or killer teams.) 

Indicators could be—

z Location of antennas in NAI 1 or NAI 3.

z Location of any tripods in NAI 1 or NAI 3.

5-55. Available resources. The following resources are available to the troop upon request: 

z Modified table of organization and equipment.

z MGS platoon.

z UAS with full motion video over 10,000 feet.

z Human intelligence collection team(s).

z Priority of fire 155-mm artillery.

z Signals intelligence.
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-15

Figure 5-5. SBCT Squadron Reconnaissance in Force, Offense 

Troop Mission 

5-56. Situation: See squadron situation above. Mission: A Troop conducts reconnaissance by fire on NAI 1 

NLT 030400DEC20XX in order to cause the enemy force to deploy into defensive positions. Commander’s 

intent— (See figure 5-6, page 5-16.) 

5-57. Key tasks include the following: 

z Identify enemy defensive force array.

z Retain freedom of maneuver while fixing enemy within OBJ NEAL.

z Ensure communication with higher and adjacent headquarters at all times.

5-58. End state, enemy: Enemy forces fixed in OBJ Neal after deploying to battle positions. Friendly: Alpha 

Troop conducts recon handover with aerial sensor and postures for follow on operations. Terrain: Key terrain 

for follow-on operation’s attack identified. Civil: Collateral damage minimized. 

5-59. Troop commanders reconnaissance guidance includes the following: 

z Focus. Your focus is to determine the composition and disposition of enemy defensive positions.

The reconnaissance objective is to identify how the enemy is going to defend the cave complex,

including positioning of mortars, recoilless rifles, and obstacles in NAIs 1, 2, and 3.

z Tempo of reconnaissance. The tempo for this operation is forceful and deliberate. Tempo is

deliberate because we are collecting detailed information on enemy forces. The approach march
Chapter 5 

5-16 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

will be overt to cause the enemy to deploy into defensive positions. During actions on the 

objective, I want you to gain and maintain direct contact with enemy forces. 

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. MGS will engage all recoilless rifle positions and

MANPADS with main gun rounds. MGS will not engage with main gun rounds on any other

targets. Mortars will engage only with proximity fuse to reduce obscuration on the objective. Upon

reaching the attack-by-fire position, each vehicle-mounted system will expend 100 rounds of .50

cal. or 10 MK 19 rounds over a five-minute period. Platoons will disengage if the enemy does not

react to our direct fire.

z Displacement criteria. We will displace when the squadron has satisfied the information

requirements.

Figure 5-6. SBCT Troop Reconnaissance in Force 

Reconnaissance in Force, Phase I 

5-60. The troop mission occurs in three phases. Phase I, movement to attack by fire, begins crossing the line 

of departure (LD) and ends when establishing the attack-by-fire position. (See figure 5-7, page 5-18.) Key 

tasks during this phase include establishing mortar firing point 1 prior to crossing PL Lions, quickly closing 

the distance to the objective, and reporting identification of graphic control measures on the ground, such as 

target reference points, restrictive fire lines, casualty collection points, indirect fire targets, and boundaries. 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-17

5-61. The troop establishes a mortar firing point prior to crossing PL Lions to ensure the troop will maintain 

responsive organic indirect fire assets throughout the operations. Mortars can adjust rapidly to changing 

situations that may include supporting the withdrawal of the force, conducting a hasty defense, or executing 

exploitation. Mortars should be able to fire at least one-half to two-thirds of their range to the front of the 

forward elements of the supported friendly force. The mortars utilize only proximity fuse to reduce 

obscuration, allowing the UAS to maintain visual contact with the enemy formations. 

5-62. The troop quickly closes the distance to the objective. The troop must maneuver into position quickly 

to reduce the probability of engagement with recoilless rifles in the open desert. The troop must maintain 

dispersion between vehicles and utilize intervisibility lines to maintain cover and concealment. The order of 

march for Phase I is 2d

 Platoon, mortar section, 1st Platoon. The order of march will allow the mortars and 

2d Platoon the ability to provide support to the remainder of the troop through indirect fires and 

reconnaissance as they maneuver into their support-by-fire positions. 

5-63. Platoons report identification of graphic control measures on the ground (target reference points, 

restricted fire lines, casualty collection points, indirect fire targets, and boundaries). Platoons must 

immediately identify and report the locations of their graphic control measures on the ground, reducing the 

risk of fratricide and allowing the troop command team to control fires as necessary. The troop headquarters 

needs to make changes to the control measures based on reports from the platoon. It is imperative to 

disseminate all changes throughout the troop to maintain a common operational picture. 
Chapter 5 

5-18 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 5-7. SBCT Troop Reconnaissance in Force, Phase I 

Reconnaissance in Force, Phase II 

5-64. Phase II begins with 2d Platoon set at observation posts and ends with specific information 

requirements answered in NAI 1, 2, and 3. (See figure 5-8, page 5-19.) Key tasks during this phase include 

reconnaissance by fire, observing NAIs, and dismounts conducting area reconnaissance of NAI 3. 

5-65. Reconnaissance by fire. Platoons engage targets within their assigned target reference points to achieve 

the desired fire pattern. For this scenario, 1st and 2d

 Platoons will initially employ the reconnaissance method, 

reconnaissance by fire. If no enemy personnel move into battle positions, the troop commander should 

provide the squadron commander with enough information to facilitate a decision point as to whether the 

troop should maneuver beyond PL Seahawks to PL Dolphins. An aggressive maneuver may cause the enemy 

to move out of their hide positions or may determine that no enemy battle positions, routes, cave entrances, 

or high-value target list (HVTL) positions exist within OBJ NEAL. First Platoon will receive a section of the 

mobile gun system and engage from support by fire 2. A section of the mobile gun system and a section of 

reconnaissance vehicle will provide the primary direct fires into their sector of fire while observing NAI 1. Second 

Platoon will engage from support by fire 1 into their sector of fire while observing NAI 1 and NAI 2. Platoons 

must manage and report ammunition status to allow the troop to adjust rates of fire or reposition forces. 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-19

5-66. Observation of NAIs. As the troop’s decisive operation for this scenario, 1st Platoon will accomplish 

the decisive point from a position where they can observe NAIs 1 and 2. Together with 2d

 Platoon, the 

redundancy of assets allows the troop to observe from multiple angles. Taking photos or video will assist 

planners of future missions to understand the enemy’s actions. First Platoon can accomplish assist planners 

of future missions to understand the enemy’s actions using optics and reporting, or they may utilize the 

troop’s UAS and record the video feed. If the current system does not allow playback, then the platoon should 

record the live feed with a camera or other device. 

5-67. Dismounts conduct area reconnaissance of NAI 1. A section of reconnaissance vehicles from 

1st Platoon and all the other platoon dismounts will conduct an area reconnaissance of NAI 2 to assess the 

area as a foothold for follow on operations. Assessing the area allows the troop to provide a recommended 

course of action and may cause the enemy to deploy more dismounts, believing a dismounted force is attacking. 

Figure 5-8. SBCT Troop Reconnaissance in Force, Phase II 

Reconnaissance in Force, Phase III 

5-68. Phase III begins with 1st Platoon dismounts linking up with vehicles and ends once the platoon has 

crossed PL Charger. (See figure 5-9, page 5-20.) Key tasks during this phase include providing handover 

information to aerial sensors, emplacing obscuration, and bounding south of the line of departure and 

transporting casualties. 
Chapter 5 

5-20 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

5-69. Provide handover information to aerial sensors. The troop must ensure that aerial sensors maintain 

visual contact of OBJ Neal prior to leaving their support-by-fire position. Conducting a reconnaissance 

handover with the aerial sensor allows the unit to continue observing the objective, developing the enemy 

situation by evaluating enemy BDA, and observing the enemy’s attempts to repair or improve their battle 

positions. Maintaining visual contact using aerial sensors greatly aids the brigade combat team with planning 

and executing clearance operations. Maintaining visual contact also allows the commander to determine if 

the answers to the PIR gained during the reconnaissance in force have changed due to enemy activity. 

5-70. Emplace obscuration. Before the troop begins movement out of their support-by-fire position, they 

must emplace obscuration if they made enemy contact, since they will be vulnerable as they begin to displace. 

Troops can request smoke missions from supporting artillery, use troop mortars to fire smoke missions, 

employ the smoke grenade launchers on their vehicles, have troops employ handheld smoke grenades, or any 

combination of these methods to achieve the required obscuration. 

5-71. Bound south of the LD and transport casualties. Once the squadron has answered all PIR and all troops 

are prepared to move out of their attack-by-fire positions, the troop will begin to bound south until they have 

moved back to PL Chargers (LD). The troop will transport the priority and routine casualties to a higher level 

of care at this time. The troop needs to keep as many weapon systems as possible focused on the objective so 

they should limit casualty evacuation operations to urgent casualties only during the first two phases. 

Figure 5-9. SBCT Troop Reconnaissance in Force, Phase III 

Warfighting Function Considerations 

5-72. The warfighting considerations described here apply to the scenario above. These are examples for 

illustrative purposes only, other considerations may apply. 

Mission Command 

5-73. Facilities. In this scenario, the commander may need to move with 1st Platoon to achieve the proper 

understanding for decision making and adjacent unit coordination. The executive officer may need to locate 

the command post near 2d

 Platoon so the troop can report information rapidly and accurately to squadron 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-21

while maintaining standoff. The 1SG establishes the casualty collection point in a position that affords cover 

and concealment and if possible, centrally locates the casualty collection point between point of injury and 

ambulance exchange points. 

5-74. Systems. Emplace enemy icons on FBCB2 graphics to facilitate cueing, mixing, and redundancy of 

assets to orient on the reconnaissance objective. For example, 1st Platoon identifies a potential recoilless rifle 

tripod in NAI 1 and emplaces the graphic on FBCB2, which cues 2d Platoon to confirm the specific 

information requirement by mixing with the internal UAS and redundancy through LRAS3. 

5-75. Graphics. The reconnaissance in force scenario requires platoons to understand their sectors of fire 

because the troop must manage their ammo expenditure and prevent target overkill or fratricide. All restricted 

fire lines need to be easily identifiable on the ground and platoons must report identification of graphic control 

measures on the ground. 

Movement and Maneuver 

5-76. Mounted. In this scenario, the use of speed to close the distance enables the troop to reduce the 

firepower overwatch of the recoilless rifles. Once in range, the mobile gun system section and RV 

crew-served weapons may mass upon antitank weapons and allow dismounts to maneuver without risk of 

suppression. Vehicles in the support-by-fire positions must continue survivability moves throughout the 

operation to avoid decisive engagement. Vehicle commanders and squad leaders must communicate to 

manage rates of fire, maintain situational awareness, and to prevent vehicles from running over dismounts. 

5-77. Dismounted. The troop utilizes dismounts to clear intervisibility lines in undulating terrain and to 

provide a higher level of detail during the area reconnaissance of NAI 2. Without the use of dismounts, the 

enemy commander may only deploy antitank weapon systems. Employing dismounts may cause the enemy 

to fully deploy its defensive capabilities, fully answering all PIR. 

5-78. Fires. Planned mortar firing points and preplanned targets allow for quick organic indirect fire support. 

No fire areas and coordinated fire lines require updates frequently from platoon through BCT level to 

maintain enemy contact to avoid risking injury to friendly troops. Airspace needs to be deconflicted between 

troop mortars and available air assets to ensure timely fires and continuous reconnaissance. Use indirect fire 

sparingly during the early phases of the operation to prevent obscuration of the enemy position. Overuse of 

indirect fire may disrupt the enemy deployment from hide sites to battle positions. Employ obscuration fires 

to conceal the movement from attack by fires back to the LD once the troop has satisfied all the information 

requirements. 

Sustainment 

5-79. Sustainment assets should be in position as far forward as possible for resupply and maintenance 

support requirements. Consumption rates of class V will be a higher than normal reconnaissance mission; 

therefore, adjust unit basic loads accordingly. Operators, crews, and maintenance personnel maximize 

momentum by fixing inoperable equipment at the point of malfunction or damage. Self-recovery will be the 

primary method of recovery for this mission followed by like-recovery to the maintenance collection point. 

Platoons should ensure each section has tow bars. 

5-80. Troops will have a casualty evacuation plan, and make every effort to staff and equip nonmedical 

vehicles with medical personnel from point of injury to platoon casualty collection point forward to the troop 

casualty collection point. Troops should plan to use their ambulance Stryker for medical evacuation 

operations from the troop casualty collection point to the squadron ambulance exchange point. Ensure all 

troops know the evacuation plan for casualties. 

Protection 

5-81. Dismounts should consider the use of mine detection equipment during area reconnaissance of NAI 2. 

Given little to no man-made cover or concealment, vehicles will need to find their own natural cover during 

this operation. If the enemy has MANPADs, dismounts must eliminate this threat to allow friendly air assets 

to conduct operations in the area. 
Chapter 5 

5-22 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

ZONE RECONNAISSANCE

5-82. A squadron executing a zone reconnaissance for a BCT offensive operation usually orients on the main 

body’s axis of advance and focuses on the enemy and terrain. A zone reconnaissance normally transitions 

into a security task to protect the main body. The squadron ensures they conduct continuous reconnaissance 

as they occupy their security positions. The squadron could also conduct a zone reconnaissance as the BCT 

offensive operation culminates to create the space and early warning for the BCT, allowing it to consolidate 

and reorganize in preparation for defense operations. 

5-83. The BCT and squadron staff should consider the focus, tempo, and terrain effects when planning all 

reconnaissance operations. These factors can affect the amount of time that is required for a subordinate unit 

to complete their reconnaissance tasks. 

5-84. The squadron completes the zone reconnaissance and enables the BCT transition into the defense. The 

squadron performs zone reconnaissance to identify enemy counterattacks and to establish a screen to expand 

the security area. 

5-85. A squadron executing a zone reconnaissance for a BCT offensive operation is deliberate, oriented on 

the main body’s axis of advance and focused on the enemy and terrain. A zone reconnaissance normally 

transitions into a security task to protect the main body. Troops ensure they conduct continuous 

reconnaissance as they occupy their security positions. (See figure 5-10, page 5-24.)

Squadron Mission 

5-86. Situation: The squadron completes a mission as the advance guard and gathers information enabling 

the BCT to plan for future offensive operations. The squadron performs zone reconnaissance to identify 

enemy support zones and avenues of approach. The town of Tyler is a known staging area for enemy forces 

operating in 10 to 15 man teams. Intel reports the enemy may possess antitank missile capabilities, UAS, and 

BMPs. The enemy is utilizing a subterranean network north of the river to cache weapons in our security 

zone. Mission: ABCT squadron conducts zone reconnaissance to identify enemy support zones and avenues 

of approach NLT 030400DEC20XX in order to enable the main body to conduct offensive operations. 

Execution: ABCT squadron will conduct zone reconnaissance from LD (PL Orange) to LOA (PL Red). 

Subordinate units will move through sector identifying possible surface and subterranean routes that the 

enemy is or could be using. Troops will engage and destroy enemy within engagement criteria. Troops will 

not execute phase lines until given permission from higher in order to maintain security across the zone. 

Squadron commander’s reconnaissance guidance is as follows:

z Focus. Confirm or deny any surface or subterranean infiltration routes. Your focus is to identify

enemy caches in sector.

z Tempo of reconnaissance. The tempo for this operation is deliberate. You will not establish your

screen until you have completed a thorough reconnaissance of the zone. Reconnoiter all surface

enemy infiltration routes that support a squad-size element and any subterranean cache sites.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. Engagement criteria is aggressive—destroy squad size or

smaller elements to expand the security area. If you encounter a superior force, or an enemy force

defending from a subterranean structure, break direct contact but maintain visual contact for

follow-on support.

z Displacement criteria. Once the troops are set at the limit of advance, they will establish

observation posts and screen to the limit of advance. Squadron will displace upon answering all

assigned indicators.

5-87. The supported headquarters provides PIR, which is broken into indicators for platoons. PIR could be 

the following. 

5-88. Division PIR #3. Is the bridge trafficable by tanks? What bridges across the Coryell River support 

72-ton vehicles? (Supports division commander’s decision to cross Coryell River with follow-on forces.) 

Indicators include: 

z Bridge classification signs indicating above 72 tons?

z Observation of tanks crossing bridge in vicinity of Division NAI 12 and Division NAI 13.

z Multiple large semi-trucks co-use of bridge in Division NAI 12 and Division NAI 13.
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-23

5-89. BCT PIR #33. Where are locations to bypass the bridge? (Supports BCT commander’s decision to use 

multiple crossing points.) Indicators could be: 

z Observation of existing bypass usage by vehicle traffic near Division NAI 12 and Division

NAI 13.

z Observation of a ford site near Division NAI 12 and Division NAI 13.

z Observation of sturdy banks that will adequately support a mobile bridge to span (55 feet?) near

Division NAI 12, Division NAI 13, and BCT NAI 1.

5-90. BCT PIR #34. Does Route (RTE) CHARLOTTE facilitate rapid advancement of tank and armored 

vehicles? (Supports BCT commander decision to use march formation to PL Browns.) Indicators include: 

z Paved road capable with width for three or more tanks abreast.

z Soil conditions near Route Charlotte are not muddy, marshy, rubbled, or contain surface drainage

ditches, which support multiple 72-ton vehicles moving in traveling formation.

5-91. Squadron PIR #331. Where are subterranean routes that can facilitate threat rapid dismounted 

movement to impact Route Charlotte, Route New York, or Route Atlanta? (Supports squadron commander’s 

decision to commit attached Infantry company to clear complex terrain.) Indicators include: 

z Heavy foot traffic paths in Squadron NAI 1, 2, 3, 4, 6.

z Observation of small arms fire from Squadron NAI 1, 2, 3, 4, 6.

z Smoke/fire in vicinity of Squadron NAI 1, 2, 3, 4, 6.

5-92. Available squadron resources. The following are available resources. 

z Modified table of organization and equipment.

z Priority of fires for the BCT’s DS field artillery battalion.

z Priority support for the brigade Shadow.

z Low-level voice intercept.

z Engineer reconnaissance team.

z Engineer obstacle-reducing team.

z Human intelligence.
Chapter 5 

5-24 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 5-10. ABCT Squadron Zone Reconnaissance, Offense 

Troop Mission 

5-93. Situation: See the squadron situation above. Mission: B Troop conducts zone reconnaissance to gather 

information throughout the AO from 031100DEC20XX to 040500DEC20XX to enable future BCT offensive 

operations. Commander’s intent, expanded purpose: Deny the enemy a key safe haven for planning and 

conducting operations throughout the province. (See figure 5-11, page 5-25.) Key tasks include the following: 

z Identify and report routes that support friendly armored vehicles throughout the troop area of

operations the zone.

z Destroy enemy forces within capabilities located in troop area of operations.

z Conduct forward passage of lines.

z Evaluate and report subterranean routes that could support platoon size or greater movement.

5-94. End state, enemy: Enemy forces within the zone unable to influence future offensive operations. 

Friendly: Higher echelons informed and enabled to conduct planning for offensive operations. Terrain: 

Primary avenues of approach classified. Civil: Ensure impact upon patterns of life are minimal. The troop 

commander’s guidance includes the following:
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-25

z Focus. The focus is to determine the threat in the zone and identify routes and key terrain leading

up to the town of Tyler. Reconnaissance objective is to ensure no enemy caches remain in the

troop area of operations.

z Tempo of reconnaissance. The tempo for this operation is stealthy and deliberate. The signature

is stealthy because we do not want the enemy to know the BCT will conduct offensive operations

in this area of operation. The amount of detail to collect is deliberate because the BCT has ample

amount of time to plan their offensive operation.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. Bradley fighting vehicles will engage enemy light armor, and

antitank guided munitions between PL Orange and PL Red. The mortar section will provide

suppression of enemy light armor vehicles. Platoons will disengage from more than three heavy

armored vehicles. Platoons will disengage from tunnels when encountering sustained small arms

fire coming from the subterranean feature. The commander retains bypass authority.

z Displacement criteria. Platoons will displace upon LTIOV, answering all assigned indicators, or

upon meeting disengagement criteria

Figure 5-11. ABCT Troop Zone Reconnaissance in the Offense 

Zone Reconnaissance, Phase I 

5-95. Conduct of this operation will be in four phases. Phase I is rural reconnaissance. Phase I begins at LD 

and ends with crossing PL Yellow. (See figure 5-12, page 5-26.) Critical events during this phase are the 

forceful and rapid zone reconnaissance from LD to PL Yellow, the route reconnaissance of all primary and 

secondary routes, identifying and destroying enemy observation posts in zone, and collecting obstacle 

intelligence. 

5-96. Forceful and rapid zone reconnaissance from LD to PL Yellow. Due to the time constraints, the 

commander will need to control the tempo of the zone reconnaissance by phase. The commander is taking 
Chapter 5 

5-26 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

prudent risk by conducting a forceful and rapid zone reconnaissance to PL Yellow because there are no NAIs 

that require the platoons to conduct an area reconnaissance. Zone reconnaissance missions are time intensive 

and the commander must communicate to subordinate platoons where the troop is willing to assume risk. 

5-97. Route reconnaissance of all primary and secondary routes. The platoon must conduct reconnaissance 

of all routes within the zone, including routes moving north to south and routes moving east to west. Platoons 

may be inclined to focus on south to north routes because this will be the general direction of travel for the 

main body attack. However, it is imperative that the platoons understand that the BCT may utilize the east to 

west routes as an axis of advance. 

5-98. Identify and destroy enemy observation posts in zone. Enemy observation posts on today's battlefield 

have many characteristics. Platoons must search for covert, military-style observation posts as well as enemy 

personnel disguised as civilians collecting information on friendly forces. Platoons will need to engage with 

civilian personnel to attempt to discern intent and discourage curious bystanders. 

5-99. Collect obstacle intelligence. Platoons should focus on tactical, enemy prepared obstacles, naturally 

occurring obstacles and civilian created obstacles for their reports. An example of an enemy prepared obstacle 

would include mine and wire obstacles, tank ditches, and dragon’s teeth. An example of a naturally occurring 

obstacle would include escarpments, changes in soil composition, and creek beds. Examples of civilian 

created obstacles include civilian traffic patterns, rock quarries, and market places. 

Figure 5-12. ABCT Troop Zone Reconnaissance, Phase I 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-27

Zone Reconnaissance, Phase II 

5-100. Phase II, urban recon, begins with crossing PL Yellow and ends with crossing PL Brown. (See 

figure 5-13, page 5-28.) Critical events during this phase are identifying bypass routes around urban areas 

and conducting area reconnaissance of NAI 4 and 3. 

5-101. Identify bypass routes around urban areas. Moving through an urban area can slow a unit for a 

number of reasons, which may encourage a commander to bypass urban areas along the axis of advance. 

Bypassing an urban area, especially while en route to an objective, allows a commander to expedite 

movement and avoid lethal engagement with enemy forces or avoid nonlethal engagement with the 

population, both of which have the ability to significantly slow movement to the objective. During a zone 

reconnaissance, a troop should identify bypass routes around urban areas so follow-on units have the option 

of bypassing those urban areas where bypassing will not affect mission accomplishment negatively. When 

identifying a bypass, the troop must consider the trafficability of the bypass by all the vehicles within the 

follow-on force as well as the ability of enemy forces within the urban area to influence friendly movement 

on the bypass. 

5-102. Conduct area recon of NAI 4. In this scenario, NAI 4 is an open area where the enemy has possibly 

used a subterranean network to cache weapons. The troop has a variety of methods available to them to 

conduct reconnaissance in this NAI. At some point, the troop should conduct dismounted reconnaissance 

through the NAI looking for the presence of the templated subterranean networks. It is highly unlikely the 

troop would be able to find signs of a subterranean network by observing the NAI from a distance. The troop 

should employ mine-detecting equipment if available to aid in discovering the subterranean network or 

cached weapons. 

5-103. Conduct area recon of NAI 3. Reconnaissance of NAI 3, which is in an urban area, will require 

special consideration by the commander. If the commander is attempting to observe normal patterns of life 

or enemy activity in the urban area without influencing the enemy or civilian actions, the troop will need to 

utilize optics with enough standoff to conduct surveillance undetected. To develop the situation rapidly, the 

troop may need to conduct active reconnaissance in the village with dismounted observation posts. If the 

commander is looking to provoke a reaction from possible enemy forces in the urban area, the troop can 

move in an overt, aggressive manner without taking steps to avoid detection. As the reconnaissance of NAI 

3 is an area reconnaissance within a larger zone reconnaissance mission, the troop should avoid becoming 

decisively engaged in the town to retain their freedom of maneuver. 
Chapter 5 

5-28 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 5-13. ABCT Troop Zone Reconnaissance, Phase II 

Zone Reconnaissance, Phase III 

5-104. Phase III, crossing point recon, begins with crossing PL Browns and ends with identification of a 

trafficable crossing point. (See figure 5-14, page 5-29.) Critical events during this phase are conducting the 

linkup and confirming locations for the troop command post, mortar firing point, and casualty collection 

point; conducting area reconnaissance of NAI 12 and 13, and identifying fording and armored vehicle-launch 

bridge sites. 

5-105. Conduct linkup and confirm locations for the troop command post, mortar firing point, and casualty 

collection point. Upon crossing PL Browns, the platoons will converge at the intersection of RTE New York 

and RTE Miami. At this point, troop commanders should select a coordination point to confirm the location 

for the troop command post, mortar firing point, and casualty collection point during this phase. Phase III 

also requires the most security as it is closest to the enemy main body in the town of Tyler. The troop should 

plan to conduct this phase of the operation under limited visibility conditions, thus the troop may need to 

adjust its tempo during other phases or pause prior to executing this phase. 

5-106. Conduct area reconnaissance of NAIs 12 and 13. Prior to moving dismounts forward to classify the 

bridges in NAI 12 and 13, the troop must establish proper security measures. Platoons will stop short of the 

bridges and establish overwatch positions. Platoons will use optics and additional sensors to observe the far 

side of the bridge and to inspect the bridge for obstacles or explosives. The approach to and classification of 

the bridges should be done using the most stealthy method available to reduce the chance of contact with the 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-29

enemy. If available, the commander should equip platoons with engineers to remove or disable explosives. 

The site may contain a small guard force or be reinforced with tactical obstacles. The troop commander must 

understand engagement criteria from squadron and prepare to fight for the information, develop the situation 

rapidly, and prepare to gain and maintain contact utilizing additional enablers from the brigade. 

5-107. Identify fording and armored vehicle-launch bridge sites. Should the bridges be untrafficable for 

tanks, the troop must continue to orient on the reconnaissance objective by finding a bypass route at a fording 

site, finding an alternate bridge, or providing a recommended site for an armored vehicle-launch bridge or 

other type of bridge. 

Figure 5-14. ABCT Troop Zone Reconnaissance, Phase III 

Zone reconnaissance, Phase IV 

5-108. Phase IV, forward passage of lines, begins with observation posts set observing NAIs 10, 12, and 13 

and ends after forward passage of lines. Critical events during this phase are observation of NAIs 10, 12, and 

13; forward passage of lines; and reconnaissance handover. 

5-109. Observation of NAIs 10, 12, and 13. During this critical event, the platoons will orient on several 

NAIs: NAI 10 with PIR 5, NAI 12 with PIR 1 and 2, and NAI 13 with PIR 1 and 2. The BCT must know 

about the trafficability of the bridges leading across the river to ensure the BCT can access their objectives. 

The platoons must develop the situation rapidly, yet remain stealthy according to the commander’s 

reconnaissance guidance, to provide the information to the BCT. The information gained from NAIs 10, 12, 

and 13 must be reported rapidly and accurately to the BCT so the BCT can complete their course of action 

development. To avoid keeping reconnaissance assets in reserve, the troop can use its organic UAS (Raven) 

to collect on PIR 5 in NAI 10. Since the platoons will be operating around an urban area, this phase has the 

most risks involved and should occur during hours of limited visibility. The platoons should have the most 
Chapter 5 

5-30 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

information collection assets available to mitigate risks. Redundancy and mixing of collection assets will 

provide the BCT with information in greater detail while information collection assets are not assuming as 

much risks. As all units observe their NAIs, each collection asset must maintain visual contact with any threat 

indicator until the reconnaissance handover with the BCT is complete. 

5-110. Forward passage of lines and reconnaissance handover. The reconnaissance handover is critical to 

the mission because it ensures continuous reconnaissance. The forward passage of lines will pass the BCT 

forward of the troop’s area of operation while the troop’s observation posts stay in place and continue to 

observe the NAIs for any change in information. As the BCT is moving through the troop, a designated unit 

must linkup, either on the ground or through digital communications, with the troop command posts to 

receive the most up-to-date graphics, positions of friendly forces, and information about the NAIs. 

Warfighting Function Considerations 

5-111. The warfighting considerations described below apply to the above scenario. These are examples 

for illustrative purposes only, other considerations may apply. 

Mission Command 

5-112. Facilities. Platoons should update the troop command post throughout the operation with answers to 

indicators. The troop command post must establish each phase in a location where the troop can communicate 

collected information rapidly and accurately to squadron command posts. All collected information is vital 

to the planning timelines within the brigade, thus information collected requires timely refinement and 

reporting. 

5-113. Systems. The distance over which the troop moves during this operation may extend beyond the 

reach of frequency modulation or digital systems. The commander must request retransmission sites or 

communicate via satellite routing from the troop to squadron. 

5-114. Graphics. Troops must create shared understanding through graphics in mission orders, especially 

when forces converge or collectively transition the tempo of reconnaissance. In this scenario, creating the 

coordination point allows the commander to adjust the troop’s tempo to balance with security, reposition 

forces to support the next area reconnaissance, and ensure the right amount of information is collected and 

provided to the squadron during critical events. 

Movement and Maneuver 

5-115. Mounted. In this scenario, the unit must identify routes that are able to support tanks. The platoons 

must continuously seek bypass routes for any points where trafficability reduces below that level. If contact 

is possible or likely, and the follow–on force will need to transition to traveling overwatch or bounding 

overwatch, then the platoons should report whether the routes will support only a column or will support unit 

dispersion. 

5-116. Dismounted. The trafficability of areas off the main roads may increase the chances for vehicles to 

be stuck or roll over. Use of dismounts to clear safety areas is paramount to speed, but leaders must inform 

the troop commander and higher for situational understanding. Dismounted reconnaissance within NAIs is 

more likely to find caches, especially when supported with mine detection devices, site exploitations kits, 

and cameras. 

5-117. Subterranean. The troop commander must fully understand the squadron commander’s guidance in 

dealing with subterranean networks. (Refer to ATTP 3-06.11 for more information.) Commanders must 

weigh the priority of reconnaissance in subterranean areas with other named areas of interest. 

Intelligence 

5-118. Synthesizing and reporting information collected to the squadron command post in a timely manner 

will drive the BCTs future offensive operations. The zone reconnaissance will take place during the brigade’s 

planning process as a reconnaissance pull technique. Troops should expect changes and additions to PIRs 

and NAIs throughout the operation. 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-31

Fires 

5-119. If the movement of the troop extends beyond the range of available artillery assets, the troop must 

emplace the mortar firing point to support both platoons. The troop plans final protective fires during phase 

four due to the troop’s proximity to the enemy main body. The troop establishes no fire areas and ensures all 

friendly areas include critical infrastructure. 

Sustainment 

5-120. The executive officer must coordinate to receive ammunition resupply in a timely manner that does 

not sacrifice availability if the mission requires a large amount of mortar employment. The troop should 

request the field maintenance team be as far forward as possible to assist in maintenance operations. Recovery 

operations during this scenario should include self-recovery at the platoon level followed by like recovery to 

pull vehicles to the squadron maintenance collection point. Troops must plan sustainment for all four phases. 

Resupply may not be necessary during the mission; however, plan resupply for phase four prior to conducting 

follow-on operations. Troops should plan multiple casualty collection points throughout the operation to 

allow for frequent casualty evacuations. 

Protection 

5-121. When stationary, troops use camouflage nets to conceal friendly positions from UAS. Troops should 

be cautious of enemy attempts to employ IEDs throughout the zone. 

SECTION II – RECONNAISSANCE AND SECURITY IN THE DEFENSE 

5-122. By executing reconnaissance and security tasks, the Cavalry squadron allows the BCT commander 

to disrupt enemy tempo, create flexibility in planning, maneuver, mass and concentrate combat power, 

conduct operations in depth, and provide preparation and security. Today’s hybrid threat challenges the 

traditional military application of defensive operations by utilizing conventional and unconventional means 

to disrupt our defensive positions. The vignettes in this section are unique to these specific scenario examples.

5-123. Cavalry troops conduct both reconnaissance and security tasks while supporting the BCT defense. 

The troop orients on the BCT while conducting security tasks unless the BCT commander specifies 

otherwise. 

SECURITY TASKS IN SUPPORT OF THE DEFENSE 

5-124. Security supporting BCT defensive operations provides early warning of activities that affect the 

main body. A screen can establish and expand the security area, which provides time and maneuver space so 

the main body has freedom of movement to establish their defensive plan. Troops conducting a screen may 

provide early warning of enemy formations that are conducting spoiling attacks on friendly forces. These 

activities do not have to be enemy centric; they can include civilian considerations. For example, a troop 

could screen during a BCT defense by providing early warning of violence between factions separated by 

natural and manmade geographical boundaries. 

GUARD

5-125. A squadron’s guard supporting an offensive BCT operation usually has platoon size (+) units 

working in coordination to establish battle positions that prevent observation or direct fire against the main 

body. The squadron conducts defensive tasks and limited offensive tasks to deny the enemy the ability to 

disrupt the friendly forces’ main body. To maintain the tempo of the BCT attack, the Cavalry troops must 

have the ability to move quickly and decisively to maintain contact with the enemy and protected force. A 

guard supporting BCT defensive operations defeats or causes the withdrawal of enemy reconnaissance 

elements. A guard establishes and expands the security area to provide time and maneuver space to the main 

body. A troop as part of a squadron guard attempts to force the enemy main body to deploy early. A Troop, 

as a part of a squadron guard, could establish around an airfield during retrograde operations. 
Chapter 5 

5-32 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

SQUADRON MISSION

5-126. Situation: The BCT is protecting the airfield where an international Red Cross evacuation of political 

refugees from a neighboring country is underway. (See figure 5-15, page 5-33.) Insurgent enemy forces have 

declared their intent to strike at coalition forces in order to demonstrate strength and counter coalition 

messaging that the enemy has been defeated. Intelligence reports expect an attack on the airfield by a 

company-sized element in the next 96 hours. Intel reports that the enemy is operating in 20 man teams armed 

with portable, unguided, shoulder-launched antitank rocket-propelled grenade launcher (RPG-7s), ПК

Модернизированный: "Kalashnikov's Machine-gun Modernized (PKM), and Avtomat Kalashnikova (AKs) 

and use technical mounted (DsKHs). In addition, insurgent enemy forces conducted a recent attack using 

suicide bombers leashed together and led by skilled team leaders to detonate on point targets to initiate a 

larger attack. Additionally, significant hostile armor formations are located across the international border 

approximately 15 kilometers away to the northeast. For political considerations, the squadron guards the 

airport until the evacuation is complete as an economy of force so tensions do not escalate with the 

neighboring hostile country during the evacuation. Mission: ABCT squadron conducts a guard from 

050600DEC20XX to 090600DEC20XX vicinity of HICKMAN Airfield in order to protect the airfield during 

evacuation operations. Execution: A Troop, B Troop, and C Troop conducts a zone reconnaissance to PL 

Red where the squadron transitions into a guard, with troops conducting area defense. Upon completion of 

B Troop’s zone reconnaissance of the area between PLs Blue and White, D Company conducts tactical road 

march and establishes TAA Colts. Once the evacuation is complete, the squadron conducts rearward passage 

of lines with 1-XX CAB and withdraws. Squadron commander’s security guidance includes the following:

z Focus. Your focus is to defeat enemy personnel attempting to disrupt the main body. Search all

vehicles that attempt to access the airfield. Divert vehicles with three axles or more. Report groups

of 10 or more military-aged males within 2 kilometers of airfield perimeter, question them, and

disperse.

z Tempo of security. Tempo of security is a long duration operation. Plan to defend airfield for

96 hours. You will conduct a zone reconnaissance to establish your battle positions. You will

continue to improve your position throughout this operation. Your battle positions will provide

standoff and the ability to control avenues of approach into the security area.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. Conduct this as a discrete operation. Positively identify

enemy elements before engaging. Use escalation of force kits to mitigate civilian casualties. Break

direct contact only to immediately regain contact in a position of advantage over enemy forces.

z Displacement criteria. Displacement will be on order. Once the evacuation is complete and

rearward passage of lines is complete, the squadron will displace. If enemy armor crosses the

international border, the squadron will conduct battle handover with 1-XX CAB and withdraw to

the southwest.
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-33

Figure 5-15. ABCT Squadron Guard, Defense 

Troop Mission 

Situation: See the squadron situation above. Mission: B Troop conducts zone reconnaissance to gather 

information about the AO and establish defensive positions from 050600DEC20XX to 090600DEC20XX 

to protect the evacuation. Execution: Commander’s intent, expanded purpose: Deny the enemy access to the 

airfield. (See figure 5-16, page 5-35.)

5-127. Key tasks include the following: 

z Identify and report routes that support enemy vehicles movement in the AO in addition to the

major roads.

z Destroy smaller size enemy forces within the troop AO.

z Conduct battle handover to 1-XX CAB.

z Conduct rearward passage of lines through 1-XX CAB.

5-128. End State, Enemy: Enemy forces within the troop area of operations. Friendly: Higher echelons 

informed and enabled to conduct refugee evacuation. Terrain: Primary avenues of approach classified. Civil: 

Ensure impact upon patterns of life are minimal. 
Chapter 5 

5-34 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

5-129. Troop commander’s reconnaissance guidance includes the following:

z Focus. The focus of the zone reconnaissance is to determine the threat in the zone and identify

routes and key terrain leading up to the airfield. Reconnaissance objective is to find any enemy

forces in the zone.

z Tempo of reconnaissance. The tempo for this operation is forceful and rapid. We need to move

quickly throughout the zone and clear any pockets of enemy fighters. Rapidly move to establish

the screen in order to protect the airfield. We need to collect information on avenues of approach

that the enemy may use to access the airfield.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. Platoons will engage enemy light vehicles and enemy

dismounts. The mortar section will provide suppression of enemy light vehicles. Platoons will

disengage from more than three armor vehicles. The commander retains bypass authority.

z Displacement criteria. Platoons will displace upon answering all assigned indicators or upon

meeting disengagement criteria.

5-130. The troop commander plans both reconnaissance and security guidance when required. 

Commander’s security guidance includes—

z Focus. The focus of this phase will be enemy dismount teams attempting to influence the

evacuation.

z Tempo of security. The security tempo is long duration. Platoons will plan for 96 hours of

sustainment.

z Engagement/disengagement. Platoons will utilize indirect fire and direct fire to develop the

situation and deny enemy elements the ability to penetrate. Indirect fires will be the primary

means to engage enemy dismount elements; but if indirect fire is not feasible, observation posts

and security patrols can conduct attack by fire to destroy enemy elements of squad size or less.

Dismounted observation posts and patrols will maintain contact with larger elements (greater

than squad size and under platoon strength) and conduct battle handover with a tank platoon.

z Displacement criteria. If the enemy conducts platoon size or larger assaults on an observation

post, the platoon will displace to subsequent observation posts. The platoon will use alternating

bounds to ensure they maintain enemy contact by conducting reconnaissance handover within

the platoon or with UAS. If enemy armor formations cross the international border, prepare for

battle handover with 1-XX CAB currently located south of the airfield.
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-35

Figure 5-16. ABCT Troop Guard 

Guard, Phase I 

5-131. Conduct of this operation will be in three phases. Phase I is zone reconnaissance. (See figure 5-17,

page 5-36.) Phase I begins at LD and ends with PL Red, the limit of advance. Critical events during this 

phase are forceful and rapid zone reconnaissance from LD to PL Red. Conduct route recon of all primary 

and secondary routes. Identify and destroy enemy observation post in zone. 

5-132. Forceful and rapid zone reconnaissance from LD to PL Red. The commander will need to control 

the tempo of the zone reconnaissance by phase. The commander is taking prudent risk by conducting a 

forceful and rapid zone reconnaissance to PL Red. The tank platoon will provide overwatch on the routes 

and at NAIs to facilitate speed. 

5-133. Route recon of all primary and secondary routes. The platoon must conduct reconnaissance of all 

routes within the zone. Platoons may focus on the routes for the enemy attack. However, the platoons must 

understand that BCT forces may utilize all routes. 

5-134. Identify and destroy enemy observation post in zone. Enemy observation post on today's battlefield 

will take on many characteristics. Platoons must search for both covert military style observation posts as 

well as enemy personnel disguised as civilians and collecting information on friendly forces. Platoons will 

need to engage with civilian personnel to discern intent and discourage curious bystanders. 
Chapter 5 

5-36 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 5-17. ABCT Troop Guard, Phase I 

Guard, Phase II 

5-135. Phase II, establish screen and collapse to guard. (See figure 5-18.) Priority tasks at this phase are 

establish screen with observation posts in-depth, develop platoon and troop fire control measures to prevent 

fratricide, maximize use of enablers at traffic control posts, casualty evacuations, and establish battle 

positions. 

5-136. Establish screen with observation posts in-depth. Conducting platoon screens provides early warning 

for forces along the route. The depth provided will assist with establishing battle positions that ensure no 

threat forces pass through undetected or unreported. 

5-137. Develop platoon and troop fire control measures to prevent fratricide. Identify and plot final 

protective fires to enable rapid response by available assets. Maximize use of enablers at traffic control posts.

(See area security and casualty evacuations of dismounted personnel below.) 

5-138. Establish battle positions. Establishing battle positions that maximize the integration of direct and 

indirect fires causes the enemy main body to deploy and provides fighting positions that allow concentration 

and massing of lethal fires into designated sectors of fire. The commander will need to conduct detailed 

planning to employ organic enablers and all direct fire elements. 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-37

Figure 5-18. ABCT Troop Guard, Phase II 

Guard, Phase III 

5-139. Phase III, rearward passage of lines and battle handover. (See figure 5-19, 5-38.) Priority tasks at 

this phase are passage point selection, transfer of information, and displacement to and movement to TAA 

Cobrajock. Battle handover tasks are near and far side recognition and fire control measures. 

5-140. Rearward passage of lines. The troop will conduct a rearward passage of lines with 1-XX CAB upon 

completion of the evacuation from the airfield. Troop commanders must ensure passage points and 

coordination points are clearly identifiable and the troop understands all actions. As the troop is moving 

through the CAB, a designated unit must link up, either on the ground or through digital communications, 

with the troop command posts to receive the most up-to-date graphics, positions of friendly forces, and enemy 

situations. Upon completion of rearward passage of lines, platoons will move to TAA Cobrajock. 

5-141. Battle handover. During this critical event, it is important to consider near and far side recognition 

symbols that are easily recognizable to prevent fratricide, such as FBCB2 and VS 17 panels. Carefully plan 

fire control measures, both direct and indirect, for both units to prevent fratricide and to distribute fires on 

the enemy evenly. 
Chapter 5 

5-38 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 5-19. ABCT Troop Guard, Phase III 

Warfighting Function Considerations 

5-142. The warfighting considerations described below apply to the above scenario. These are examples 

for illustrative purposes only, other considerations may apply. 

Movement and Maneuver 

5-143. Mounted. The troop possesses significant combat power with respect to the threat it faces. The 

M3A3 25-mm Bushmaster provides the troop standoff as compared to the enemy weapon systems. The 

M3A3 can also destroy enemy technical vehicles and vehicle-borne improvised explosive devices. The 

effects of antipersonnel and high explosive rounds can cause considerable collateral damage to the 

surrounding towns. Commanders will need to consider potential collateral damage when employing those 

systems. The TOW system provides additional range but has limits due to collateral damage considerations 

as well. The M1-series tank’s 120-mm main gun provides direct fires with precision, which can reduce the 

risk of collateral damage. The tanks also provide enhanced day and night optics for target identification. 

Coaxial machine guns will create less collateral damage, but the maximum effective range will put the 

Cavalry fighting vehicles within range of enemy machine guns. The terrain is unrestricted to mounted forces 

outside of urban areas. Maneuver in the towns for the Cavalry fighting vehicles will be limited to streets. 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-39

5-144. Dismounted. Dismounts can establish observation posts to provide early warning to the crews of the 

Cavalry fighting vehicles. Cavalry fighting vehicles likely will operate in sections to ensure mutual support 

and security. The commander and platoon leaders can consider using a hunter-killer technique where 

dismount observation posts identify threats and cue the Cavalry fighting vehicles to move into attack-by-fire 

positions to destroy the enemy. The commander can request BCT engineer assets to provide countermobility 

along likely avenues of approach to canalize threats into the troop engagement area. 

Sustainment 

5-145. The FSC will have some sustainment assets located and prepared within the combat trains command 

post to provide emergency resupply if necessary. Retrograde equipment that requires extended repair time to 

the squadron maintenance collection point. 

5-146. Commanders should consider establishing the troop casualty collection point behind the main battle 

area. The 1SG may pull casualties from the platoon casualty collection point or directly from vehicles to 

preserve combat power during evacuation. Rehearsals for these operations are critical and must happen to 

ensure the safety of the casualty, decrease the time from point of injury to the next level of care, and reduce 

risks to first responders. 

AREA SECURITY

5-147. The focus of area security in support of BCT defensive operations is on the protected force, 

installation, route, or area. (See figure 5-20, page 5-40.) A troop could deny the enemy the use of an expected 

or historical ambush site. Another example is to task the troop to assess the vulnerabilities of the BCT defense, 

which would provide the commander with an objective assessment. 

Squadron Mission 

5-148. Situation: The BCT has secured RUFU and a line of communication is in place along Route Cerami. 

Enemy forces have historically occupied the terrain along this route to ambush elements. These forces 

number 3 to 5 personnel and usually have small arms and RPG-7s. Mission: SBCT squadron conducts route 

security to protect tactical combat operations as they move along Route Cerami. Execution: Troops will 

establish mounted and dismounted observation posts oriented on Route Cerami and conduct reconnaissance 

patrols throughout the areas of dead space. Squadron commander’s security guidance includes the following:

z Focus. Your focus is to secure the route to ensure freedom of maneuver for the tactical convoy

operation. Secure all historical ambush sites and terrain that dominates the route.

z Tempo of security. The tempo for this operation is long duration. Plan this operation for 24

hours. Establish observation posts adjacent to the route that are oriented on the route. Conduct

roving patrols to cover dead space between OPs.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. Conduct an aggressive operation. Identify and report any

vehicles that stop along the route or any suspicious dismounted activity. Engage any positively

identified enemy element. Do not disengage without approval from squadron.

z Displacement criteria. Displace once the tactical convoy operation reports last element clear.

5-149. Squadron PIR #511. Where are possible ambush sites? (Supports squadron commander’s decision 

to occupy ambush site.) Indicators include: 

z Choke points is NAI 001.

z Observation of expended brass in NAI 002, 003.

z Observation of disturbed foliage in NAI 002, 003.

z Observation of small arms cache in NAI 002, 003.

5-150. Squadron PIR #521. How is the enemy conducting information collection on U.S. forces? (Supports 

squadron commander decision to detain potential collectors.) 

z What are civilian movement patterns?

z Is the enemy using dismounted or mounted methods?
Chapter 5 

5-40 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Where are civilians moving away from normal lines of drift in vicinity of NAI 001, 002, 003,

and 004?

5-151. Division PIR #5. What is the level of indigenous support for enemy forces? Specific information 

requirement includes: (Supports division commander decision to employ information operations plan XYZ.) 

z Is the enemy resupplying from the population.

z Is the enemy integrating with the population? Observation of population is allowing enemy to

integrate within the social structure.

Figure 5-20. SBCT Squadron Area Security, Route 

Troop Mission 

5-152. Situation: See squadron situation above. Mission: B Troop, SBCT squadron conducts route security 

NLT 300900AUG20XX to protect tactical convoy operations as they move along RTE Cerami. Execution: 

Second Platoon conducts route security by performing a zone reconnaissance and establishing a screen to the 

north of RTE Cerami. First platoon will conduct zone reconnaissance and establish a screen to the south of 

RTE Cerami to prevent the enemy’s influence of the route. The operation will be a three-phase operation. 

Phase I is reconnaissance, Phase II is security, and Phase III is displacement. Commander’s intent: We must 

enable the BCT to resupply in RUFU. Ensure the enemy cannot influence RTE Cerami. Maintain continuous 

observation of infiltration and exfiltration routes and rapidly report all suspicious activity. End State: All 

tactical convoy operations have reached RUFU unhindered by the enemy, identification and reporting of all 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-41

enemy is complete, with minimized collateral damage and limited disruption to civilian patterns of life. (See 

figure 5-21.) Commander’s reconnaissance guidance includes the following: 

z Focus. The focus is to ensure freedom of maneuver for the tactical convoy operation on the route.

Identify all historical ambush sites and terrain that dominates the route.

z Tempo of security. The tempo for this operation is deliberate. Plan to conduct route reconnaissance

at two kilometers per hour and zone reconnaissance at half a kilometer per hour. Ensure a thorough

reconnaissance of all threat avenues of approach.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. Conduct an aggressive operation. Identify and report any

vehicles that stop along the route or suspicious dismounted activity. Engage any positively

identified enemy element. Do not disengage without approval from squadron.

z Displacement criteria. Displace if the enemy conducts platoon-size or larger assault of an

observation post.

Figure 5-21. SBCT Troop Area Security, Route 

Route Security, Phase 1 

5-153. Phase I, reconnaissance, begins with LD at PL Carolina and ends when reconnaissance is complete. 

Critical events during this phase include conducting forward passage of lines, then establishing a troop 

headquarters (mortar firing points, casualty collection point, and troop command post); conducting 

reconnaissance and establishing observation posts while the fire support officer recommends to the 

commander establishment of fire support coordination measures within the troop’s area of operations.
Chapter 5 

5-42 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

5-154. Conduct forward passage of lines. Prior to crossing the line of departure, troops can request feeds 

from SBCT controlled Shadow (RQ-7) UAS to ensure continuous reconnaissance. The commander considers 

missions variables when selecting movement techniques, routes, and orders of march. If enemy contact is 

possible and the troop must conduct a forward passage of lines, the commander considers using traveling 

overwatch and ensures direct coordination with the stationary unit. For the passage of lines, troops should 

collocate command posts to enable the sharing of graphics and information. Far and near recognition signals 

will help prevent fratricide, especially during limited visibility operations. 

5-155. Establish troop headquarters. Commanders consider the terrain when establishing a troop command 

post, a casualty collection point and mortar firing positions. Casualty collection points should be easily 

accessible for casualty evacuation, but provide protection from observation and the effects of fire. When 

terrain restricts line of sight, commanders should consider placing upper tactical internet systems on terrain 

that enables retransmission to ensure reporting of all information rapidly and accurately. Commanders should 

consider placing mortar-firing points in positions to maximize the lowest angle fire possible to ensure the 

best fire support coverage of the platoons. Commanders achieve security for these elements by collocating 

with mounted elements or placing them in mutually supporting positions. 

5-156. Conduct reconnaissance and establish observation posts. In this scenario, due to restrictive terrain 

and task organization, the troop conducts a route reconnaissance with one platoon conducting reconnaissance 

of the physical route and two platoons developing the terrain and lateral routes that influence the primary 

route through zone reconnaissance. Reconnaissance en route to a screen enables the troop to identify enemy 

avenues of approach, ambush positions, and optimal locations of observation posts. Commanders should 

consider the rate of march for dismounted troops maneuvering through restricted terrain. Leaders must assess 

the Soldiers’ approach march, combat and fighting loads, and where to maintain sustainment loads. Leaders 

have latitude on the ground to establish observation posts in positions that achieve the best observation 

balanced with cover and concealment. In areas of little natural vegetation, concealment kits may aide in 

establishing observation posts. Observation posts can use sensors to cue reconnaissance patrols to areas of 

dead space to achieve continuous reconnaissance. The commander employs all available collection assets to 

aide in redundancy and to achieve mixing to task all reconnaissance assets. 

5-157. The fire support officer recommends to the commander establishment of fire support coordination 

measures within the troop area of operation. The fire support officer establishes no fire areas over observation 

posts to prevent fratricide. Dismounts should use available mission command systems to build a common 

operational picture. Dismounts should consider using analog battle tracking to create redundancy. Fire 

support personnel should plan for illumination and obscuration to enable platoon operations in all conditions. 

Fire support officers and commanders must consider and synchronize the multiple layers of assets operating 

in their areas of operations such as aviation, UAS, artillery, and mortars. 

Scheme of Maneuver, Phase I 

5-158. Prior to crossing the line of departure, B Troop commander requests BCT UAS of Route Cerami to 

ensure continuous reconnaissance during this phase. The troop fire support officer creates preplanned targets 

using the allocations from higher to cover dead space and deny the enemy key terrain. (See figure 5-22, 

page 5-44.)

5-159. B Troop crosses the line of departure at PL Carolina and conducts a tactical road march using a 

traveling overwatch movement technique and forward passage of lines through A Troop at passage point. 

Second Platoon conducts initial linkup with A Troop and troop command posts collocate to facilitate mission 

command during passage. Order of march is 2d

 Platoon, mortars; 1st Platoon, trains, command post. B Troop 

passes through A Troop and assumes responsibility for the fight at the battle handover line (PL Ohio) when 

two-thirds of the troop’s combat power has passed through. 

5-160. Second Platoon conducts route reconnaissance of RTE Cerami from checkpoint 1 to the release point 

at checkpoint 2 to develop the situation through action and to retain freedom of maneuver along RTE Cerami. 

As 2d

 Platoon moves beyond PL Ohio, the troop mortar section establishes a mortar firing point in the vicinity 

of mortar firing point 1 to support the platoons’ reconnaissance tasks. Mortar firing point 1 provides twothirds coverage forward of all platoons and is accessible by the Stryker mortar carrier. Mortar priority of fires 

is 1st, then 2d

 Platoon. The most probable threat is to the south and comes from the villages of Lqui and Kwill. 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-43

5-161. At checkpoint 1, 1st Platoon moves south and conducts zone reconnaissance from the line of 

departure at their boundary with 2d

 Platoon, between PL Ohio to PL West Virginia and the brigade boundary. 

First Platoon will identify and deny suspected enemy ambush locations, identify potential enemy infiltration 

routes, and identify any enemy in the area of operations to gain and maintain threat contact. First Platoon 

then establishes mounted and dismounted observation posts to observe NAIs 001 and 002 to provide early 

warning and to prevent the enemy influencing the force to secure on RTE Cerami. 

5-162. At checkpoint 1, 2d

 Platoon moves north and conducts zone reconnaissance from the line of 

departure at their boundary with 1st Platoon, between PL Ohio and PL West Virginia to the division boundary. 

1st Platoon will identify and deny suspected enemy ambush locations, identify potential enemy infiltration 

routes, and identify any enemy in the area of operations. Second Platoon then establishes mounted and 

dismounted observation posts to observe NAIs 003 and 004 to provide early warning and prevent the enemy 

from influencing the friendly force on RTE Cerami. 

5-163. The troop command post will move from checkpoint 1 and establish itself north of RTE Cerami in 

a centrally located position that provides cover and concealment so the command post can report timely and 

accurately to the squadron. The troop fire support officer will request counterfire zones to protect the troop 

from indirect fires, and establish no-fire areas over sections once they establish observation posts. The 

company trains establish a casualty collection point center of sector off the road in covered and concealed 

terrain to support the troop. 

5-164. Once 2d

 Platoon completes the route reconnaissance, it prepares to conduct a forward passage of 

C Troop. Second Platoon provides guides at the passage point vicinity of checkpoint 1 and guides C Troop 

along RTE Cerami to checkpoint 2. PL West Virginia functions as the battle handover line for C Troop to 

assume responsibility of the fight. Phase I is complete when observation posts are established and C Troop 

has completed its passage through the zone. 
Chapter 5 

5-44 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 5-22. SBCT Troop Route Security, Phase I 

Route Security, Phase II 

5-165. Phase II, security, begins when 1st Platoon and a section from 2d Platoon transitions to the screen 

and the other section establishes traffic control posts along RTE Cerami. Critical events during this phase are 

establishing the screen with observation posts in-depth, developing platoon and troop fire control measures 

to prevent fratricide, maximizing the use of enablers at traffic control posts, and casualty evacuations of 

dismounted personnel. 

5-166. Commander’s security guidance includes the following: 

z Focus. The focus of this phase will be enemy dismount teams attempting to influence movement

on RTE Cerami.

z Tempo of security. Tempo is long duration. Platoons will plan for 24 hours of sustainment.

z Engagement/disengagement. Platoons will utilize indirect fire and direct fire to develop the

situation and to prevent enemy elements from penetrating the screen. Indirect fires will be the

primary means to engage enemy dismount elements but if indirect fire is not feasible

observation posts and security patrols can conduct attack by fire to destroy enemy dismount

elements of five personnel or less. Dismounted observation posts and patrols will maintain

contact with larger elements (greater than a 5-man team and under platoon) and conduct battle

handover with mounted observation posts or 2d

 Platoon as the situation dictates.
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-45

z Displacement criteria. 1st Platoon will displace only on order and no earlier than 24 hours. If

the enemy conducts platoon size or larger assaults on an observation post, the platoon will

displace to subsequent observation posts by alternating bounds. The platoon conducts RHO

within the platoon or with UAS assets to ensure they maintain enemy contact. The displacing

sections will consolidate at alternate observation posts to maintain threat contact. B Troop will

contact squadron to halt traffic on RTE Cerami and conduct battle handover with air weapons

teams available from higher.

5-167. Establish screen with observation posts in-depth. Conducting platoon screens provides early warning 

for forces along the route. To ensure no threat forces pass through undetected or unreported, a screen should 

achieve depth. A screen achieves depth with dismounted and mounted observation posts arrayed from the 

forward line of own troop (FLOT) to the rear boundary of the area of operation. Other assets can assist in 

achieving depth such as UAS conducting surveillance in front of the observation posts beyond the line of 

sight. As observation posts identify threats, they pass the enemy to subsequent observation posts and 

surveillance assets for tracking or engagement. Dismounted operations in this scenario can track threats until 

handed off to the Strykers. The Strykers, with their superior weapons systems, will engage and destroy the 

enemy, thus preventing the observation posts from compromise. 

5-168. Develop platoon and troop fire control measures to prevent fratricide. Multiple mounted and 

dismounted elements in a relatively small area will require development and continuous refinement of a 

common operational picture to include indirect and direct fire control measures. Commanders should 

consider techniques to mark friendly positions, understand the enemy’s capabilities, illumination, and 

proximity to adjacent units (Refer to ATP 3-20.98 for more information.) Identify and plot final protective 

fires so available assets can respond rapidly. 

5-169. Maximize use of enablers at traffic control posts. Commanders should request capabilities briefs 

from attached enablers to maximize their effects. When conducting traffic control posts, interpreters, human 

intelligence collection teams and female engagement teams allow the troop to collect information while 

respecting local culture and values. Military working dogs can assist in threat detection and reduce risk to 

ground forces. Obtain traffic control post kits to improve search area organization and reduce risk. Consider 

requesting additional class IV materials to create serpentines and holding areas. Utilize biometric systems to 

identify persons of interest. 

5-170. Casualty evacuation of dismounted personnel. When planning for casualty evacuation in restricted 

terrain, commanders should consider criteria for evacuation, techniques for transporting casualties, and 

extraction when ground casualty evacuation is not possible. The commander must balance the need for 

evacuation and associated personnel versus maintaining continuous reconnaissance. Reconnaissance 

handover from an observation post to another asset may be required to maintain continuous reconnaissance. 

Rehearse and understand casualty evacuation and medical evacuation plans to the lowest level. 

Scheme of Maneuver, Phase II 

5-171. During this phase, the troop will have two platoons screening the flanks (1st and 2d Platoons) and 

one section from 2d

 Platoon conducting route security of RTE Cerami. The narrow width and depth of the 

troop area of operations requires the troop command post and mortar section to remain in position. (See 

figure 5-23, page 5-46.)

5-172. The screens must maintain surveillance of the dismounted avenues of approach to identify all enemy 

and to provide early warning. The screens must prepare to develop the situation using a combination of aerial, 

dismounted, and mounted reconnaissance methods. Platoons will select observation posts that provide the 

best combination of observation, cover, concealment and communications while maintaining the freedom to 

displace to alternate observation posts. To achieve depth in their screens, the platoons establish mounted 

observation posts in the less restrictive terrain and dismounted observation posts in restrictive terrain, and 

utilize unmanned ground sensors and UAS to cue dismount patrols to mitigate dead space. 

5-173. One section from 2d

 Platoon will conduct route security of RTE Cerami from PL Ohio to PL West 

Virginia to protect tactical convoy operations from enemy ambush. The section will accomplish this by 

establishing observation posts oriented on the route, conducting traffic control posts, and mounted and 

dismounted patrols. Available human intelligence collection teams and female engagement teams can collect 
Chapter 5 

5-46 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

information from local national personnel. Military working dogs can facilitate vehicle and personnel 

searches to help protect the force. Biometric usage can identify known enemy personnel transiting in the area 

of operations. Phase II ends when all tactical convoy operations have arrived safely at RUFU and the troop 

receives a change of mission 

Figure 5-23. SBCT Troop Route Security, Phase II 

Route Security, Phase III 

5-174. Phase III. Consolidation and reorganization. Phase III begins with 1st Platoon and one section of 2d

Platoon collapsing screens and moving to tactical assembly area Bravo. Critical events in this phase are 

deliberate displacement of observation posts, establishing a casualty collection point and troop command 

post, establishing tactical assembly area security and communications, conducting resupply, and being 

prepared to conduct rear passage of lines with C Troop. 

5-175. Deliberate displacement of observation post, casualty collection point, and troop command post. 

Displacement from observation posts must be a deliberately planned and rehearsed event. The troop 

headquarters can set conditions for the platoons’ displacement by planning and coordinating for suppression, 

obscuration or deception. Rotary wing lift capabilities can aide in the speed and precision of the exfiltration. 

Dismounted, the platoons should plan primary and alternate routes back to their respective linkup points. 

Mission command systems enable a common operational picture, reducing risk. The commander must also 

consider whether the displacement will be simultaneous or sequential. Reconnaissance handover may be 

necessary and will require coordination with external assets such as a UAS or Scout and attack weapon team. 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-47

5-176. Establish tactical assembly area security, communications, and conduct resupply. Establishment of 

TAA Bravo following an operation enables the troop to consolidate and reorganize for follow-on operations. 

Establishment of a TAA cannot be ad hoc. In planning, the commander should identify a general location for 

the TAA, preferably in an area that provides cover, concealment, and enough space for the troop to spread 

out to mitigate risk. The commander should identify a quartering party task with planning the security for the 

area. The troop XO or 1SG can lead the quartering party with a jump command post to ensure the troop has 

continuous communications with higher when the main command post displaces. The quartering party can 

guide the platoons into designated positions and facilitate re-establishment of the main command post. 

Commanders should also consider when and how to displace their organic mortar systems to ensure coverage. 

Commanders use the TAA for resupply once they have established security. Usually, the troop XO or 1SG 

will linkup with the distribution platoon at a logistics release point and guide the necessary sustainment 

elements to the TAA where they conduct either a tailgate or service station method of resupply. The platoon 

utilizes observation posts to provide additional security and early warning for the tactical assembly area. 

5-177. Prepare to conduct rearward passage of lines with C Troop. During the transition from security, 

operations to follow-on operations the troop should to facilitate passage of other units through its area of 

operations. Use of mission command systems or co-location of troop command posts can reduce risk and 

expedite passage. If this occurs, the troop should prepare to defend or secure the squadron flank. 

Scheme of Manuever, Phase III 

5-178. On order, B Troop transitions from security operations to prepare for follow-on operations. On order, 

move will be command post 1st Platoon, trains, 2d

 Platoon. Mortars will remain in place at mortar firing point 

1 in TAA Bravo. (See figure 5-24, page 5-48.)

5-179. B Troop will conduct reconnaissance handover with UAS or other aviation assets to maintain 

continuous reconnaissance. The platoons will exfiltrate to a platoon rally point in the vicinity of their Strykers 

and conduct linkup with far and near recognition. Upon consolidation, the platoons will conduct a tactical 

road march to TAA Bravo. B Troop must prepare to conduct rearward passage of lines with C Troop and will 

collocate command posts to enable mission command. Upon completion of the rearward passage of lines, PL 

Ohio, B Troop assumes responsibility for the fight. 

5-180. Platoons will establish local security of TAA Bravo in preparation for resupply and reorganization. 

The troop command post will maintain mission command throughout displacement. The troop executive 

officer will lead the quartering party, establish TAA Bravo, and establish an alternate command post allowing 

the troop main command post to relocate to TAA Bravo without loss of communications with the squadron. 

5-181. The logistics release point will be at checkpoint 1. The B Troop 1SG and XO will guide resupply to 

TAA Bravo where platoons will receive service station resupply. 
Chapter 5 

5-48 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 5-24. SBCT Troop Route Security, Phase III 

Warfighting Function Considerations 

5-182. The warfighting considerations described below apply to the above scenario. These are examples 

for illustrative purposes only, other considerations may apply. 

Mission Command 

5-183. Facilities. Terrain effecting line of sight becomes a critical consideration for command post 

placement in this scenario. The troop must be in continuous contact with the platoons and squadron to provide 

them with early and accurate warning. The troop positions the command post center sector to reduce the 

masking effects of the elevated terrain to the northeast and southwest and to maintain the line of sight with 

the squadron. Terrain limits the areas that can support the troop headquarters. If the enemy has situational 

understanding of friendly task organization, capabilities and tactics, techniques, and procedures, they will 

have a high probability of accurately templating the command post’s location. In this scenario, commanders 

consider survivability moves to mitigate this risk. 

5-184. Systems. Despite changes in elevation, the troop can utilize the upper tactical internet to 

communicate. Platoons can utilize mission command systems like Nett Warrior for development and 

exchange of direct fire coordination measures. Utilizing mission command systems greatly enhances the 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-49

platoon’s ability to provide a common operational picture. Troops must obtain adjacent unit graphic control 

measures and signal operation instruction to enable communication and situational understanding. 

5-185. Graphics. Commanders utilize control measures such as platoon boundaries to manage terrain 

among the platoons. Troop commanders can establish coordination and contact points along boundaries to 

facilitate information sharing and coordination with convoys. Utilizing mission command systems will allow 

a common operational picture from platoon through squadron. 

5-186. Task organization. The commander must consider the span of control when task organizing for the 

mission perhaps holding additional enablers at the troop level, or tasked to a platoon to maximize use. 

Commanders clearly delineate command and support relationships for subordinates and attachments to 

ensure proper use. 

Movement and Maneuver 

5-187. Aerial/aviation. The multiple draws and dry creek beds in the troop area of operations provides 

generous cover and concealment to the enemy. These multiple draws and creek beds reduce the effectiveness 

of visual observation, requiring the commander to consider the use of a Scout and attack weapon team and a 

UAS to perform continuous reconnaissance along boundaries to mitigate dead space. When considering the 

utilization of a Scout and attack weapon team, the commander must take into account the capabilities of the 

Scout and attack weapon team. Air ground integration in the scenario is essential as the airspace above the 

troop area of operation has the potential for congestion given the width and depth and the number of enablers 

available. The commander must consider using air control measures to deconflict airspace and ensure that all 

assets, Scout and attack weapon teams, Unmanned Aircraft Systems, and indirect fires can meet the security 

fundamentals. The commander should consider aerial insertion for restricted/severely restricted terrain and 

deep areas. The commander must balance the time available with the squadron commander’s security 

guidance to determine if aerial insertion is appropriate. In this scenario the security focus, PIR and reduced 

width and depth of the troop area of operation argues against the need for aerial insertion. To answer the PIR, 

the troop conducts a zone reconnaissance of the area of operation. The distance traveled and time available 

easily allows mounted and dismounted maneuver. 

5-188. Dismounted. When planning in this area of operation, dismounted movement rates over restricted 

and severely restricted terrain is a significant factor. The commander must consider the Soldier’s load effects 

on movement rates against mission requirements. In this scenario, the requirement for observation posts to 

possess surveillance systems, sensors, and sustainment items for twenty-four hours increases the time 

required to conduct movement. The zone reconnaissance in Phase I reduces the Soldier’s performance but 

not to the extent that it creates tactical risk. The need to ensure the earliest and most accurate warning during 

Phase II outweighs the reduced effectiveness in Phase I. Terrain considerations are the principle concern for 

manning and positioning an observation post in this scenario. The numerous covered and concealed avenues 

of approach are greater than the troop’s capacity to achieve visual observation. The commander must 

determine where limited observation posts can achieve the greatest effect. The commander must plan security 

patrols to extend the ability to observe avenues of approach. The use of reconnaissance sensors and 

Unmanned Aircraft Systems to cue dismounted patrols mitigates dead space and ensures the most efficient 

use of limited dismounted assets. The terrain gives the commander the option to cross-attach personnel to 

maximize dismounts in restricted terrain, but the commander should consider the cost to the element losing 

combat power. In this scenario, consideration was the cross attachment of dismounts from 2d

 Platoon to assist 

in the zone reconnaissance and maximize observation posts during the follow-on screen. The limited ability 

of an SBCT Scout platoon to conduct route reconnaissance in restricted terrain argued against the detachment 

of dismounts from this platoon. Sensors and Unmanned Aircraft Systems were more appropriate solutions to 

the gap in reconnaissance assets. 

5-189. Mounted. Mounted movement rates. The commander must consider the effects terrain has on the 

ability to maneuver combat platforms. In this scenario, the terrain was not a significant obstacle to the conduct 

of the route reconnaissance; however, this was not the case with the zone reconnaissance and follow-on 

screen. The mounted elements halted on the lower slopes of the hills closer to the road to provide support 

during the zone reconnaissance; thus, the mounted elements achieved depth in the screen. If the enemy has a 

situational understanding of friendly task organizations; capabilities; and tactics, techniques, and procedures, 
Chapter 5 

5-50 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

they will have a high probability of accurately templating mounted observation post locations. The 

commander should plan alternate and supplementary mounted observation post locations to mitigate this risk. 

5-190. Systems. Consider range and effects of direct fire weapons systems to ensure elements are within 

supporting range. The limited size of the observation post and area of operation reduced the effects of 

dispersion and distance. The effective ranges of the troop’s organic 120-mm mortars, MK 19s, and M2s were 

sufficient to maintain supporting range between elements without augmentation. In this scenario, the 

utilization of biometric automated toolsets (known as BATS) at traffic control posts was critical to maintain 

contact with an enemy that was not visually discernible from the civilian population. The troop commander 

had to consider assets available to achieve cueing, mixing, and redundancy while reducing the limiting effects 

of terrain on the performance of continuous reconnaissance. Unmanned ground sensors and unmanned 

aircraft systems were necessary to cue dismounted patrols when direct observation of all avenues of approach 

was impossible. Unmanned Aircraft Systems and lightweight laser designator rangefinders achieve mixing 

while observing NAIs 002 and 004, and LRAS3s from multiple mounted observation posts to ensure 

redundancy on NAIs 001 and 003. 

Intelligence 

5-191. External. Troops should consider all available external intelligence disciplines. Signals intelligence 

assets and enablers, such as LLVI and Prophet, can provide early warning to the troop as well as potential 

locations of enemy activity beyond their line of sight. BCT military intelligence company human intelligence 

specialists can satisfy the commander’s intelligence requirements and cross cue other assets. These specialists 

require direct access to the population and can facilitate tactical command posts along Route Cerami. 

Measurement and signature intelligence (MASINT), if requested ahead of time, could identify potential caves 

and subterranean avenues of approach to cue reconnaissance patrols or target a delivery asset. Geospatial 

intelligence can facilitate terrain analysis and observation post selection to ensure optimal observation and 

fields of fire. Troops could request ground sensors from the BCT to conduct surveillance of trails and dead 

space, providing the troop with early warning and cueing other assets. 

5-192. Internal. The troop company intelligence support team can aide the commander and platoon leaders 

in intelligence preparation of the battlefield and pattern analysis if the supported BCT and division is 

primarily involved in the conduct of stability tasks. Determining likely enemy courses of action based on 

threat doctrine, history, patterns or even United States doctrine should be a primary function of the company 

intelligence support team. The company intelligence support team should have direct reach to the squadron 

S-2 to receive intelligence updates or submit requests. Biometric devices, such as BATS, and secure 

electronic enrollment kits (known as SEEK), can enable the positive identification of individuals encountered 

along the route at traffic control posts. A local national interpreter may be able to perceive body language 

and mannerisms in ways U.S. forces cannot. 

Fires 

5-193. Ground to ground. Commanders should consider their organic mortar capabilities with respect to 

elevation, weather, and intended effects. If possible, commanders should integrate artillery to match the 

appropriate weapon to the intended target. The fire support officer should plan fire support coordination 

measures and coordinate with adjacent units to ensure fire support coverage and reduce risk, particularly 

along boundaries. Establishment of critical friendly zones can enable counterfire on threat systems to deny 

the enemy from massing fires on positions. Commanders should register guns to ensure timely and accurate 

fires. Commanders can allocate individual mortars to platoons or provide a priority of fires based off the 

threat, main effort, and terrain. Commanders plan to observe all fires with either sensors or personnel to 

achieve the desired effects. 

5-194. Air to ground. Fire support officers should plan targets, establish restricted operations zones, and 

coordinate with air assets to echelon fires. Fire support officers should utilize mortar gun–target lines, air 

corridors, air control points, and airspace coordination areas to deconflict effects and reduce risk. Fire support 

officers should utilize aviation assets at the lowest level to maximize effects on targets. Commanders should 

use aircraft to mitigate effects of elevation on ground systems. 

5-195. Ground to air. Hybrid threats may possess armed or unarmed UAS capabilities. The commander 

may request air defense artillery to mitigate this risk. If air defense artillery is unavailable, the use of cover 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-51

and concealment will be paramount. Air guards may suffice in providing ground to air fires depending on the 

weapon system. 

Sustainment 

5-196. Commanders should consider requesting class IV to facilitate traffic control post operations, 

observation post improvements, and assembly area development. For restricted terrain, commanders should 

consider the necessity of aerial resupply using speedballs and pallets to reduce Soldier load and overall risk. 

Commanders should rehearse logistics release point operations and methods of resupply (tailgate or service 

station) to ensure efficiency and to provide Soldiers with timely support. Commanders consider sequential 

resupply to maintain continuous reconnaissance of NAIs. Commanders should consider centrally locating 

recovery assets for vehicles to ensure a timely response and to prevent the destruction of those assets. 

5-197. Personnel Soldier loads (approach march, combat, and fighting loads) should be closely monitored 

and controlled to prevent injury and to increase the rate of march during reconnaissance. A technique to 

consider when planning packing lists for OPs is the acronym CWORMS, which stands for compass, weapon, 

optics, radio, map, and seasonal gear. Commanders allocate sustainment or contingency equipment during 

resupply, if needed. 

5-198. The terrain determines the location of the casualty collection point and ambulance exchange point 

for medical evacuation or casualty evacuation. Rehearsals for these operations are critical and must happen 

to ensure the safety of the casualty, decrease the time from point of injury to next level of care, and reduce 

risk to first responders. Commanders should consider using mounted platforms to maintain local security of 

the casualty collection point. 

Protection 

5-199. Engineers. Sappers provide engineer support and route clearance to ensure countermobility and 

survivability. Engineers can prepare fighting positions to protect against direct fire and can clear routes of 

IEDs. Engineers attached to platoons may aide in the clearance of IEDs during dismounted patrols as well. 

Countermine and counter-IED devices may be available for clearing IEDs, as well. 

5-200. CBRN. Threat CBRN capabilities are often overlooked. A chlorine gas attack is a weapon available 

to hybrid threats, so commanders should consider the mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP) level 

necessary for current threat capabilities. 

5-201. Military police. Military police support may be useful for route security and traffic control posts.

Military working dogs identify explosives in vehicles, or prepared as IEDs to assist the troop. 

RECONNAISSANCE TASKS IN SUPPORT OF THE DEFENSE 

5-202. Reconnaissance in support of BCT defensive operations provides initial assessments and refined 

information collection to support the commander’s situational understanding. A troop may reconnoiter a 

piece of key infrastructure to determine security impacts on friendly forces and civilian populations. For 

example, an area reconnaissance augmented with a CBRN section could determine if an enemy attack on a 

chlorine factory in the defensive belt would disrupt the BCT operations. Troops could conduct a 

reconnaissance of a mobility corridor that would allow enemy forces to infiltrate to positions with direct fire 

engagements on the main body. Follow-on guard requirements could transition from this action. The example 

below demonstrates reconnaissance to collect information about a potential mobility corridor during a BCT 

defense. 

ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE

5-203. A route reconnaissance in support of BCT defensive operations is an effort that provides the BCT 

with freedom of maneuver and identifies potential route vulnerabilities. Route reconnaissance can determine 

trafficability, route constraints, and potential enemy utilization to facilitate the movement of supplies and 

repositioning of forces during defensive operations. The squadron should be aware of all possible methods 

of movement and should not focus solely on road networks. A river system could allow enemy forces to 

conduct smuggling operations, cache supplies, and conduct attacks against brigade defensive positions. A 
Chapter 5 

5-52 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

squadron may also conduct a route reconnaissance to map the subterranean network that may degrade the 

elements of combat power for the BCT defense. 

Squadron Mission 

5-204. Situation: The Coryell River is the natural boundary between our host nation partner, Rendernovia, 

and a separatist controlled area within its borders. Pro-separatist rebels are currently taking advantage of 

stirred popular support and are conducting insurgent operations to destabilize the region. They have been 

accomplishing this using small, 3 to 5 man teams. Mission: IBCT squadron conducts route reconnaissance 

of Route Gillentine to determine suitability and trafficability of the Coryell River to prepare for future joint 

operations. Execution: A and B Troops conduct zone reconnaissance to include NAI 1 to 5 and will move 

one checkpoint ahead of C Troop along Route Gillentine. Provide support to C Troop as they conduct route 

reconnaissance of the river. C Troop is responsible for the river and 50 meters on each side. Commander’s

intent omitted. Squadron commander’s reconnaissance guidance includes the following: 

z Focus. Terrain. Your focus is to determine the enemy’s and coalition force’s potential use of

the river moving through the BCT area of operation. Determine potential infiltration points,

ambush sites, obstacles and staging areas.

z Tempo of reconnaissance. The tempo for this operation is deliberate. We will analyze the river

by reconnoitering the bank and physically navigating the river.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. Civilians will be in the area. Minimize disruptive activities

and positively identify enemy forces before engaging to minimize civilian casualties.

Disengage if enemy direct fire contact will cause significant civilian collateral damage.

Adjacent unit coordination is critical to ensure a thorough reconnaissance and to mitigate

fratricide.

5-205. The supported headquarters provides PIR, which is broken into indicators for platoons. PIR could 

be the following. 

5-206. Squadron PIR #632. Where are the locations and the conditions of established boat launch sites? 

(Supports squadron commander’s decision to secure boat launch sites). Indicators are—

z What is the composition and disposition of obstacles around these sites?

z What is the condition of the boat ramps?

z What is the condition of the roads leading up to the boat ramps?

5-207. BCT PIR #632. Where on the river can a threat place observation or direct fires? (Supports BCT 

commander’s decision to establish combat outpost along the river). Indicators are—

z What is the composition and disposition of enemy cache or resupply sites?

z Are enemy forces observing the river?

5-208. Division PIR #9. What effects will military operations have on local use of the river? (Supports 

division commander’s decision to use the river for coalition forces.) Indicators include the following: 

z Amount and type of local traffic on the river itself?

z How effective is the separatist propaganda campaign in this area? (See figure 5-25, page 5-53.)
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-53

Figure 5-25. IBCT Squadron Route Reconnaissance, Defense 

5-209. Squadron PIR #632. Where are the locations and what are the conditions of established boat launch 

sites? (Supports squadron commander’s decision to secure boat launch sites.) Indicators are—

z What is the composition and disposition of obstacles around these sites?

z What is the condition of the boat ramps?

z What is the condition of the roads leading up to the boat ramps?

5-210. BCT PIR #632. Where on the river can a threat place observation or direct fires? (Supports BCT 

commander’s decision to establish combat outpost along the river). Indicators are—

z What is the composition and disposition of enemy cache or resupply sites?

z Are enemy forces observing the river?
Chapter 5 

5-54 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

5-211. Division PIR #9. What effects will military operations have on local use of the river? (Supports 

division commander’s decision to use the river for coalition forces.) Indicators include the following: 

z Amount and type of local traffic on the river itself?

z How effective is the separatist propaganda campaign in this area? (See figure 5-26.)

Figure 5-26. IBCT Squadron Route Reconnaissance, Time-Distance Estimates 

TROOP MISSION

5-212. Situation: See squadron situation above. Mission: C Troop conducts route reconnaissance of the 

Coryell River to determine trafficability of the river, identify level of insurgent activity, and prepare for future 

operations. Execution: The operation will be a three-phase operation. Phase I is preparation and deployment. 

Phase II is route reconnaissance. Phase III is consolidation and reorganization. Commander’s reconnaissance 

guidance includes the following: 

z Focus is terrain. The reconnaissance objective is the Coryell River. Your focus is to determine

the potential use of the river moving through the BCT area of operation by both enemy and
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-55

coalition forces. Determine potential infiltration points, ambush sites, obstacles, and staging 

areas. 

z Tempo of reconnaissance is deliberate. Gather information about the river and adjoining banks.

If possible, continue to develop the situation further through engaging with locals conducting

business on the river.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria, weapons control status, tight. Limiting civilian collateral

damage is critical to maintaining stability in this area. Minimize disruptive activities and

positively identify enemy forces prior to engaging to minimize civilian casualties. Disengage if

enemy direct fire contact will cause significant civilian collateral damage. Adjacent unit

coordination is critical to ensure a thorough reconnaissance and mitigate fratricide. First Platoon

will bypass civilian encounters and pass them to 2d

 Platoon for further exploitation.

z Displacement criteria. Displace when you are unable to navigate the route. Move to the bank

and continue reconnaissance until you can reenter the river or arrive at release point.

Route Reconnaissance, Phase I 

5-213. Phase I, preparation and deployment. Critical to this phase is to establish clear direct fire 

coordination measures to prevent fratricide, movement of boats to and security of boat launch sites, logistics 

planning, and casualty evacuations planning. 

5-214. Establish clear direct fire coordination measures to prevent fratricide. Commanders should create a 

common operational picture and distribute that common operational picture to subordinates, supporting 

troops, and squadron to reduce risk. Commanders of all troops must consider the range and effects of direct 

fire weapons in close proximity to each other. Use of friendly-based quadrants, restrictive firing lines, target 

reference points, and weapons control status will reduce risk. Additionally, indirect fire plans must account 

for the scheme of maneuver for all troops along the river. 

5-215. Movement of boats to and security of boat launch sites. Coordination with the squadron movement 

assets may be critical. Secure the boat launch site prior to the employment of watercraft. Establish the launch 

point as a troop assembly area. Use of a form of reconnaissance from the squadron assembly area to the 

launch point may be necessary to identify obstacles or threats along the infiltration route. It is imperative that 

troops remain focused on the reconnaissance objective, in this case the river, and bypass obstacles and threats 

in route to the launch point. 

5-216. Logistics planning. Planned and prepositioned speedballs and contingency kits will be critical to 

enable the platoons to maximize the use of other mission-critical equipment. Consider coordinating for 

resupply or security of resupply locations through adjacent motorized troops. Development of preplanned 

logistics release points or contact points will provide some predictability during resupply. 

5-217. Casualty evacuations planning. Due to the nature of operating on a river, the troop will constrict 

along a narrow mobility corridor. Casualty evacuations planning along the route is deliberate, included in the 

common operational picture, and supported by adjacent troops and squadron. Development and rehearsal of 

a medical evacuation plan may be necessary. 

Route Reconnaissance, Phase II 

5-218. Phase II, route reconnaissance. Critical to this phase is determining trafficability of the river, 

counterreconnaissance, synchronized maneuver along the river, and engagement of civilians along the river. 

5-219. Determine trafficability of the river. Since the terrain is the focus, specifically the potential usage of 

the river, the commander should consider how to employ platoons and task-organize enablers to support 

answering PIRs. Engineer reconnaissance elements can facilitate the classification of the river. The 

commander must also plan to conduct reconnaissance on the banks of the river to identify launch points, 

fords, and caches. 

5-220. Counterreconnaissance. The adjacent motorized troops will be critical in conducting 

counterreconnaissance against threats attempting to collect information on the dismount troop. C Troop must 

still take steps to conduct counterreconnaissance within its capabilities and the limitations placed on 
Chapter 5 

5-56 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

maneuver by the narrow areas of operation. Snipers can provide precision fires on positively identified threats 

within the rules of engagement. 

5-221. Synchronized maneuver along the river. The troop commander must ensure boats do not outpace the 

motorized troops adjacent to the area of operation. Commanders can use dismounted digital mission 

command systems or analog systems to provide a common operational picture. (See figure 5-27.) A major 

consideration here is how and where to position the troop command post. Given a limited number of boats, 

the troop commander must balance the mobility of the command post with its ability to enable mission 

command. The troop command post could mount in its organic vehicles and follow an adjacent troop or 

maintain security on the bank of the river and bound forward behind the platoons. 

5-222. Engagement of civilians along the river. Civilian considerations in this area will force the 

commander to consider employment of available intelligence enablers. Bypass criteria may allow a platoon 

to remain focused on the objective while another platoon further up river develops the human intelligence. 

Utilizing host-nation forces to engage with locals may facilitate a greater understanding of the overall 

situation due to their understanding of the area’s customs and courtesies. 

Route Reconnaissance, Phase I 

5-223. Phase III, consolidation and reorganization. Critical to this phase is the deliberate exfiltration plan, 

and intelligence handover with host-nation forces. 

5-224. Deliberate exfiltration plan. Commanders may consider adding this to the troop’s rehearsal plan to 

ensure a greater understanding across the formation. While the troop may use the river for exfiltration, the 

commander may also coordinate with adjacent or parent units for alternate movement assets. Consider, plan, 

and rehearse far and near recognition between units. Alternatively, the commander may choose to utilize the 

river for exfiltration at a greater risk to the forces, trading speed for security. 

5-225. Intelligence handover with host-nation forces. Share information on classification of the river, 

atmospherics, and other information across combined forces to create situational understanding. Compile and 

catalog biometric data for future use. 

Warfighting Function Considerations 

5-226. The warfighting considerations described below apply to the above scenario. These are examples 

for illustrative purposes only, other considerations may apply. 

Mission Command 

5-227. Facilities. Placement of the command post is an important consideration due to the depth of the area 

of operation and the narrow area in which the troop will maneuver. Commanders may consider moving the 

command post one checkpoint or terrain feature behind the troop. Positioning of the 1SG, XO, and 

commander will also need to maximize use of all available resources. 

5-228. Systems. Use of dismounted mission command systems will enable the troop to maintain a better 

common operational picture and shared understanding with adjacent units. Commanders should also consider 

the use of retransmission elements when operating on exterior lines of communication. Communication, both 

digitally and via voice systems, increases understanding and enables rapid support and reaction time. 

5-229. Graphics. A shared common operational picture between adjacent and parent organizations will 

enable a more fluid execution of the reconnaissance while also reducing risk. Planning and combined arms 

rehearsals at the troop and squadron level will ensure there are limited seams between the troops and that 

each element maintains a mutually supporting contact. 

Movement and Maneuver 

5-230. Aerial/aviation. The commander should consider the use of the troop’s and any other available

supporting UAS to extend situational awareness quickly when the deliberate tempo of the reconnaissance 

and terrain limits the pace of operations. The primary consideration for Raven employment in this scenario 

is the launch and recovery points. The commander can assume risk and attempt to launch and control UAS 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-57

from moving Zodiacs. Use periodic stops to debark Soldiers to conduct reconnaissance, launch, and recover 

UAS. The mission tempo supports this decision, which allows the commander to focus the troop’s 

reconnaissance effort when time and troops available are a constraint. Fire support coordination measures 

and air space coordinating measures become critical to ensure all enablers are available when needed. In this 

situation, the limited width of the troop’s area of operations may dictate attack or scout weapons team control 

remain at the troop and tasked by the commander as the situation dictates. Although not selected in this 

scenario, aerial insertion was an option to place sniper teams forward along the route. Coordination with 

adjacent units became the critical factor as helicopter landing zones for aerial insertion of sniper teams would 

have been outside the troop’s area of operations.

5-231. Dismounted. In this scenario, platoons will mount and dismount the zodiacs multiple times 

throughout the mission to conduct reconnaissance and sustainment activities. It is critical to identify, brief, 

and continually refine boat mount and dismount points. The platoon’s ability to easily reach the bank and 

stow their zodiacs appropriately (according to the commander’s reconnaissance guidance) will directly 

impact the effectiveness of ground reconnaissance and sustainment. 

5-232. Mounted. The commander in this scenario considers the requirements for launching the Zodiacs. 

Failure to identify launch points correctly would have significant consequences on the timing of the mission. 

Launch points become a critical constraint to the commander for the execution of the mission. The 

commander must consider the effects of conducting this route reconnaissance against the flow of the river. 

The deliberate tempo of this mission negates the effects of this limiting condition, but the commander must 

still consider how to overcome these effects if the situation dictates an increase in tempo. The order specifies 

that the troop will remain one checkpoint behind the troops conducting zone reconnaissance to the flanks. 

The commander must consider likely delays at certain points in this mission as the flank troops conduct 

deliberate reconnaissance of the complex terrain in their zones. The commander must plan for these 

operational pauses and plan to ensure continuous reconnaissance. The commander must consider the effects 

that mounted Zodiacs present to the scheme of movement and maneuver. The commander must take into 

account that the platoons mounted on Zodiacs in the river are at a marked disadvantage if there is contact 

with an enemy force on the shore. A key consideration in this scenario is actions to mitigate some 

disadvantages of being on the river without cover and concealment and without a stable base from which to 

deliver accurate fire. The scenario also presents significant difficulties with battlefield geometry. The troop 

will have a troop forward on each flank. Constant coordination with adjacent units allows the troop time to 

deploy out of contact with the enemy. To minimize friendly exposure to fires from the troop, the weapons 

control status was designated weapons tight with engagement criteria of direct fire only in self-defense. In 

addition, the commander tasked the troop’s sniper teams to deliver precision fires to support the troop and 

give wide latitude to select their positions. Detailed indirect fire and direct fire planning becomes critical to 

avoid fratricide. 

5-233. Systems. The commander must consider that the nature of the route makes employment of mortars 

difficult in the troop area of operations. In coordination with the mounted troops, the mortars may need to 

establish mortar-firing points in the other troops’ area of operations or be utilized as another maneuver asset 

by the commander. The commander must consider the emplacement of dismounted mission command 

systems to ensure connection to upper tactical internet. 

Intelligence 

5-234. External. The troop commander uses the available intelligence resources task-organized to the troop 

or whose products are available for -troop- use. Human intelligence may identify historic crossing points, 

potential ambush sites, or cache sites. Use of signals intelligence will help identify whether the enemy is 

operating in the area, what systems they are operating on, and their capabilities. Commanders can request 

additional geospatial intelligence to determine the river flow, the location of the rapids, potential launch 

points, and other significant, critical information regarding the terrain in which the troop will be operating. 

Other units operating in the vicinity of the troop provide information on the probable strength, capabilities, 

and locations of potential insurgents. Cross communication between the troops and a shared common 

operational picture reduces the potential seams. While operating in a foreign nation, commanders can 

consider utilizing locals or host-nation forces who are familiar with the area and the local customs. Use of 

available intelligence assets allows the commander to target insurgent forces and better understand the 

enemy’s capabilities.
Chapter 5 

5-58 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

5-235. Internal. The commander should consider bringing biometric equipment with the troop to begin 

developing personnel infrastructure in the area of operations. All Scouts in the troop should have an 

understanding of the sociopolitical situation in the area and the potential for local or international flash point 

events. Use of Unmanned Aircraft Systems allows observation of dead space or danger areas prior to moving 

into the area and reduces risk while creating a better understanding of the area and any potential obstacles. 

Fires 

5-236. Ground to ground. Troop organic mortars will be difficult to employ in this terrain and while 

conducting Zodiac operations. Commanders should consider maintaining centralized control of the mortars 

and should plan mortar-firing points to suppress possible ambush sites. Coordination with adjacent troops or 

artillery is critical. Commanders need to ensure that coordination is in-depth and not ad hoc. Collateral 

damage estimates will severely constrain targeting due to command considerations such as the use of 

precision guided munitions. Use of radar zones (such as critical friendly zones and call for fire zones) allow 

the troop freedom of maneuver and do not allow suspected enemy indirect fires capabilities to fix or disrupt 

the troop. 

5-237. Air to ground. Commanders utilize aircraft to counter the indirect fire threat while internal indirect 

fires capabilities are on the move. The troop fire support officer develops and synchronizes fire support 

coordination measures and airspace coordination measures to ensure that aircraft receive proper taskings and 

employment. Commanders may utilize aircraft to help identify PIR or observe named areas of interest. 

5-238. Ground to air. Insurgent forces may use UAS or other aerial assets in reconnaissance and offensive 

operations. Commanders consider requesting stinger antiaircraft or other systems to maintain freedom to 

maneuver along the river. The terrain will severely restrict the troop’s movement and may allow the enemy 

to further exploit with air assets. 

Sustainment 

5-239. Restricted terrain necessitates aerial resupply using speedballs and pallets to reduce Soldier load and 

overall risk. Methods of resupply at logistics release points need rehearsals to ensure efficiency and to provide 

Soldiers with timely support. Commanders consider sequential resupply to maintain continuous 

reconnaissance of the river. The resupply method could include using rotary-wing assets or adjacent units to 

deliver the speedballs. Limit Soldier loads to a rucksack, combat load, and limited rations. Allocate 

sustainment or contingency equipment during resupply, if needed. 

5-240. Terrain dictates the location of casualty collection points and ambulance exchange points and 

influences the use of medical or casualty evacuation. For this scenario, commanders should consider 

positioning casualty collection points and supply points in conjunction along the riverbanks. Rehearsals for 

these operations are critical and must happen to ensure the safety of the casualty, decrease the time from 

point of injury to the next level of care, and reduce the risk to medical responders. Consider using adjacent 

unit’s mounted platforms to maintain local security of the casualty collection point. Move priority and routine 

casualties to the casualty collection points on banks of the river. Urgent casualties will evacuate by air without 

compromising the information collection to ensure continuous reconnaissance. 

Protection 

5-241. Engineers. Engineer reconnaissance teams can classify a river. Commanders should consider 

utilizing them to conduct the in-depth classification to allow the Scouts to focus on the overall trafficability 

of the river and engage with the local population to collect priority intelligence requirements. The engineers 

also can provide mobility capability by reducing obstacles that may be along the banks of the river. 

5-242. Chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear environment. Insurgents may attempt to introduce a 

CBRN threat into the area as a point target against a target of opportunity. Commanders should consider 

balancing Soldier load and bringing CBRN equipment to reduce the threat. Employing detection equipment 

enables the fastest response, and commanders should consider making it mission-essential equipment. 

Establishing decontamination points along the river and maintaining communication with adjacent troops 

and squadrons is critical to prevent further contamination. 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-59

SECTION III – RECONNAISSANCE AND SECURITY IN STABILITY 

5-243. Cavalry troops conduct reconnaissance and security during stability tasks. The tactical tasks the 

squadron and its subordinate units conduct during stability operations include area security (refer to chapter 

4 of this publication for more information), patrols, observation posts, providing security to officials, static 

security posts, searches, roadblocks, and checkpoints. In addition, convoys and high-ranking officials may 

require protection during movement through or within the areas of operation. Conducting combined 

operations with host-nation security forces is a key consideration during stability operations. Tasks or 

activities that may occur in support of combined operations include—

z Establishing combined operations and intelligence centers with host-nation security forces.

z Conducting training management and combined training with host-nation security forces.

z Sharing intelligence, according to established regulations or procedures, with host-nation

security forces.

z Executing the targeting process in conjunction with host-nation security forces.

SECURITY TASKS IN SUPPORT OF STABILITY 

5-244. Area, local, and route security tasks occur within stability environments. Units conducting security 

in stability settings use the same fundamentals as in other situations. (Refer to FM 3-98 for more information.) 

SCREEN

5-245. Cavalry troops screen during stability operations to provide early warning to the main body for 

follow-on operations. The squadron can conduct a screen during stability operations by establishing multiple 

observation points and patrols throughout the BCTs area of operation to monitor activities of interest. 

Screening during stability operations is unique because of the nonlinear nature of the stability environment, 

difficulty identifying adversaries, and clearly identified transitions. (See figure 5-27, page 5-60.)
Chapter 5 

5-60 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 5-27. SBCT Squadron Screen, Stability 

Squadron Mission 

5-246. Situation: Intelligence reports enemy forces are taking advantage of a porous province security. They 

are smuggling components in blue bongo trucks to the town of AQQAR. The BCT and division is attempting 

to develop the situation and uncover the network responsible for producing explosively formed projectile. 

Mission: SBCT squadron screens along PL Browns and provincial border from 030400DEC20XX to 

060400DEC20XX in order to identify and conduct reconnaissance handover of blue bongo trucks 

transporting weapons across the provincial border. Execution: Troops will occupy observation posts 

overwatching prospective NAIs NLT 030400DEC20XX. Order of march from the forward operating base 

(FOB) is A, B, and C. Troops screen along PL Browns and observe all possible avenues of approach for 

smuggling routes. (See figure 5-28, page 5-61.) Troops screen in-depth throughout their zones and be

prepared to perform a reconnaissance handover with UAS or follow-on forces. The squadron commander’s 

security guidance includes— 

z Focus. The squadron focus for this operation is smuggling networks operating in our sector.

Identifying and reporting blue bongo trucks are necessary in order to maintain a common

operational picture.

z Tempo of security. The duration of this operation is long. Troops maintain the screen line for

72 hours without resupply.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. Report all suspicious activities and do not detain personnel

without authorization. Conduct reconnaissance handover with UAS or adjacent units to
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-61

determine final destination of target vehicle. No enemy truck will pass through this screen 

undetected or unreported. 

z Displacement criteria. On order, no earlier than72 hours. If required, troops may move to

alternate OPs to maintain visual contact.

Figure 5-28. Information Requirements 

Troop Mission 

5-247. Situation: See squadron situation above. Mission: B Troop screens along PL Browns from 

030400DEC20XX to 060400DEC20XX to identify and conduct reconnaissance handover of enemy forces 

transporting weapons across the international border into Aqqar. Commander’s intent, expanded purpose:

Allow the brigade freedom of maneuver and protection in and around Aqqar by identifying the smuggling of 

explosively formed projectiles. (See figure 5-29, page 5-62.)

5-248. Key tasks are—

z Maintain continuous observation of infiltration and exfiltration routes into Aqqar.

z Rapidly report all suspicious activity and movement along unimproved routes from the

international border.

5-249. End state: The troop conducts resupply and is ready to assume follow-on missions. Enemy forces 

identified from PL Browns to the reconnaissance handover line with 1-36 Infantry. Key terrain observed with 

redundant intelligence and reconnaissance assets. Civilian economy not affected by U.S. operations in and 

around Aqqar. Commanders’ reconnaissance guidance includes—

z Focus. Terrain based. Identification of primary and alternate routes, location of logistics

resupply points, ambulance exchange points, casualty collection points, and identification of

critical civilian infrastructure.

z Tempo of reconnaissance. Rapid and forceful from the squadron combat outpost to the release

point to move quickly through 1-36th Infantry’s area of operation. Do not damage or destroy

civilian infrastructure or vehicles. Rapid and stealthy zone reconnaissance to the screen in order

to determine the trafficability of routes and future sites.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. Weapons tight, positive identification of rocket-propelled

grenade teams and man-portable air defense system, active improvised explosive device
Chapter 5 

5-62 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

emplacement team or when engaged by direct fire. Priority of fires goes to troops in contact. 

When the troop expends 50 percent of ammunition or three vehicles destroyed in the troop. 

z Displacement criteria, none. Bypass criteria: Identification of all obstacles. Any hostile forces

squad-size or larger.

5-250. Commander’s security guidance includes—

z Focus. Identification of any enemy resupply activity or enemy reconnaissance activity.

z Tempo of security. Long duration, prepare for 72 hours of continuous operations.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. Weapons tight, positive identification of rocket-propelled

grenade teams and MANPADs. Active improvised explosive device emplacement team or

when engaged by direct fire. Priority of fires goes to troops in contact. When the troop expends

50 percent of ammunition or three vehicles destroyed in the troop.

z Displacement criteria. Receiving effective indirect fire, or direct fire by a squad-sized element

or larger.

Figure 5-29. SBCT Troop Screen, Stability 

Screen, Phase I 

5-251. The operation occurs in three phases. Phase I begins upon receipt of the squadron operation order 

and ends with the troop set along the screen. The troop maintains communication with the squadron and the 

area of operations commander, which is critical to this phase. The troop conducts a tactical movement to 

observation posts and identifies primary and alternate observation posts, mortar firing points, the casualty 

collection point, and the troop command post. The troop must report all PIR and observation of enemy 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-63

reconnaissance units while maneuvering in sector. Fire support officers recommend to the commander the 

establishment of fire support coordination measures within the troop area of operation. (See figure 5-30,

page 5-64.)

5-252. While maintaining communication with the squadron and the area of operations commander, the 

troop reports all information rapidly and accurately, and executes reconnaissance handover of enemy activity 

to the area of operations commander. Platoons provide radio checks to the command and reports all graphic 

control measures throughout the movement to allow continuous situational awareness. 

5-253. The platoon conducts a tactical movement to the observation post and identifies primary and 

alternate observation posts, mortar firing points, the casualty collection point, and the troop command post. 

The commander provides template observation posts while the platoons have the freedom to choose a suitable 

position based on the terrain. While not templated by troop, platoons select alternate observation post 

locations. When selecting observation posts, platoons ensure their observation posts are in locations that can 

identify the PIR rapidly and accurately. Early warning gives the command the ability to coordinate 

reconnaissance handover with the area of operations commander. The troop headquarters element sets the 

troop command post, mortar firing point, and casualty collection point. The troop reports the command post 

location to the squadron, as well as shares the casualty collection point location to the platoons. The troop 

command post shall locate in a position that allows the commander to command subordinate elements, 

maintain situational awareness of the area of operation, and report to the squadron. 

5-254. Platoon reports all PIR and observation of enemy reconnaissance units while maneuvering in sector. 

The fire support officer recommends to the commander establishment of fire support coordination measures 

within the troop area of operation. Platoons immediately report the locations of their primary and alternate 

observation posts to the troop. Platoons report once they have begun to observe their assigned NAIs, allowing 

the commander to begin building an operational picture for the squadron. An operational picture allows the 

fire support officer to establish the appropriate fire support coordination measures and no-fire areas to support 

each observation post. 
Chapter 5 

5-64 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 5-30. SBCT Troop Screen, Stability, Phase I 

Screen, Phase II 

5-255. Phase II begins with the troop set along PL Browns and ends at 72 hours or with a change of mission 

order. Critical events to this phase are establishing observation posts from which the platoon reports all 

priority intelligence requirements and observation of enemy reconnaissance units within the assigned named 

areas of interest. The fire support officer recommends to the commander the establishment of fire support 

coordination measures within the troop area of operation. (See figure 5-31, page 5-65.)

5-256. Establishing observations posts. The platoons must continually improve their positions throughout 

the duration of the mission. The platoons emplace sensors and obstacles that provide protection for the 

observation posts so they can maintain contact with enemy forces. Platoons identify dead space and establish 

restricted operation zones for organic UAS through the troop fire support officer. These tasks allow the troop 

to report all information rapidly and accurately and execute reconnaissance handover of enemy activity to 

the area of operations commander. Troops establish subsequent and alternate positions to observe each NAI. 

Alternate and subsequent positions provide freedom of maneuver while maintaining contact, and observation 

within their sector to the observation posts if enemy forces engage or observe them. 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-65

Figure 5-31. SBCT Troop Screen, Stability, Phase II 

Screen, Phase III 

5-257. Phase III is at the end of 72 hours or with a change of mission order. Phase III ends with the troop 

resupplied and prepared to assume any follow-on mission. The critical task is resupply of all supply classes, 

as needed. (See figure 5-32, page 5-66.)

5-258. Resupply of all supply classes as needed. The executive officer coordinates requirements for 

resupply with the squadron S-4 based on the follow-on mission. If left in place, the troop can resupply using 

a combination of the tailgate and service station methods discussed later in this publication. If required to 

displace, the troop can resupply using the service station method at a logistic release point at the squadron 

command post. 
Chapter 5 

5-66 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 5-32. SBCT Troop Screen, Stability, Phase III 

Warfighting Function Considerations 

5-259. The warfighting considerations described below apply to the scenario above. These are examples 

for illustrative purposes only, other considerations may apply. 

Mission Command 

5-260. Facilities. Normally, the troop command post positions in the sector where the commander believes 

the enemy main effort will come. The command post is usually centrally located in the troop sector and 

positions so it can maintain communications with the subordinate platoons and higher headquarters. The 

command post positions deep enough in the troop sector so that it does not have to displace immediately 

upon enemy contact. Commanders should take into consideration terrain and distance, and the effects on line 

of sight communications, to plan for and request retransmission sites as necessary. Lastly, the troop should 

utilize cyber systems to assist in targeting and identifying enemy personnel (social media outlets). 

5-261. Systems. The troop should maximize the use of all modified table of organization and equipment to 

maintain communications with higher and subordinate units within the area of operations. The troop 

incorporates and disseminates adjacent unit graphic control measures and signal operating instructions to 

facilitate cross-communication and reconnaissance handover of targets. 

5-262. Graphics. The troop should develop graphic control measures to the platoon and section level to 

control subordinate forces efficiently, provide direct fire control measures, and create a common naming 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-67

convention for reporting enemy forces. The troop establishes restricted operation zones for Ravens to observe 

dead space within the area of operations and named areas of interest. The troop develops airspace 

coordination measures in coordination with the squadron fire support officer for Scout and air weapons teams, 

and UAS. 

5-263. Task organization. Do not keep any reconnaissance assets in reserve. Maximize the capabilities of 

all attached units and assets to the troop. 

Movement and Maneuver 

5-264. Aerial/aviation. The troop should plan for and requests scout and air weapons teams to screen along 

dead space and flanks, and to execute route reconnaissance forward of the troop’s main body. The troop 

incorporates all assets into the plan to ensure cueing, mixing, and redundancy over named areas of interest. 

5-265. Dismounted. The troop should consider movement rates, Soldier load effects, observation post 

manning and weapon requirements, and minimum security manning. The troop commander determines the 

risk and need for dismounted personnel to maneuver with or without the mutual support of mounted direct 

fire weapon systems. The commander considers route and zone reconnaissance as implied or specified tasks 

while maneuvering to the screen, depending on time available. The commander bases infiltration time and 

movement techniques on the current enemy situation template and the supported commander’s 

reconnaissance and security guidance. 

5-266. Mounted. When conducting mission planning, the troop must consider mounted movement rates, 

trafficability of terrain and routes within the area of operations, location of dismounted teams concerning 

weapon safe danger zones, and maximum effective range of weapon systems, based on the enemy 

situational template. 

Intelligence 

5-267. Troop commanders should refine squadron priority intelligence requirements to develop indicators 

to assign to specific named areas of interest and targeted areas of interest. Indicators should be specific and 

understandable by the Soldier who is observing the named area of interest. Commanders should always 

consider and request available assets at higher echelons based on mission intent. The troop should ensure a 

battle rhythm to push and pull intelligence updates with the squadron intelligence section, to provide 

continuous reconnaissance to the higher echelons. 

Fires

5-268. The commander positions organic mortars to support the troop main effort. Troops use external 

assets to cover observation posts or friendly positions not within range of organic systems. The commander 

uses the fires plan to synchronize with higher and adjacent units. 

Sustainment 

5-269. The troop should always plan for the proper days of supply necessary to complete the mission 

successfully without logistics hindering the outcome. The troop should consider enemy threat and timedistance analysis conducted between resupply points. Troops must consider tailoring logistics resupply points 

and resupply methods to the mission. The troop considers aerial resupply as mission and terrain dictates. 

Soldiers must deploy on mission with a minimum of a combat load of ammunition for all weapons systems, 

unless dictated otherwise during mission planning. When considering the Soldier loads, the troop must 

consider contingency, sustainment, approach march, combat, and fighting loads. The troop should ensure the 

security of their casualty collection points and ambulance exchange points using the terrain and the enemy 

situation. 

Protection 

5-270. The commander plans alternate and subsequent observation posts. Troops must employ early 

warning systems. Troops establish minimum manning requirements and mission-oriented protective posture 
Chapter 5 

5-68 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

level according to current chemical, biological, radiological, nuclear, and explosives threat levels. The 

commander requests air defense artillery based on enemy air threat. 

AREA SECURITY

5-271. The squadron secures the area by establishing a presence and conducting reconnaissance tasks 

throughout the area. Subordinate units establish perimeters around base camps, critical infrastructure, and 

high-value assets, while other units conduct operations to establish presence, provide security, and assist 

stability or relief tasks. (Refer to FM 3-98 for more information.) 

5-272. A Cavalry troop conducts area security during stability operations to protect friendly forces, 

installations, and routes within a specified area. Area security occurs frequently during stability operations 

because of the required resources and sustainment efforts over a long duration. Area security creates a 

situation that requires the troop to protect those elements and their necessary lines of communication. 

Squadron Mission 

5-273. Situation: The local religious minority is marching to their main shrine in the city to celebrate Emilito 

Rey, their spiritual holiday. Intelligence reports potential breakdowns in sectarian relations between this 

group and the majority ethnic group within BRUDU. Suicide bombers are a tactic employed in the past as 

well as flash mob violence. Social media activity has spiked with this event. Mission: The SBCT squadron 

conducts area security NLT 051000DEC20XX to protect the religious group from enemy attacks throughout 

their planned march route. Execution: Troops establish mounted and dismounted observation posts at key 

intersections. Other dismounted patrols observe conditions among the population and respond to any 

aggression. Coordination between elements is critical to conduct reconnaissance handover. A Troop is 

responsible for checkpoints 1 to 4, B Troop is responsible for checkpoints 5 to 7, and C Troop is responsible 

for checkpoints 8 to 10. (See figure 5-33, page 5-69.) The squadron has a Stryker Infantry company under 

operational control as a quick reaction force. Squadron commander’s security guidance includes—

z Focus. Focus your security on crowds along the march route. Orient defensive positions on the

group as it moves along the march route.

z Tempo of security. The tempo for this operation is short duration. Plan this operation for six

hours. Establish checkpoints at key intersections and areas that have good observation. Conduct

roving patrols to cover dead space between observation posts.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. The operation is discrete. Positively identify any enemy

elements that attempt to disrupt or attack the crowd and engage according to rules of

engagement. No warning shots authorized.

z Displacement criteria. Displace once the group reaches their shrine and the crowds disperse.
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-69

Figure 5-33. SBCT Squadron Area Security, Stability 

Troop Mission 

5-274. Situation: See squadron situation above. Mission: B Troop conducts area security to interdict enemy 

forces in sector NLT 051000DEC20XX to allow freedom of maneuver to the Emilito Rey march. 

Commander’s intent, expanded purpose: Deter and interdict enemy threats to provide protection and freedom 

of maneuver to the local religious minority so they can celebrate Emilito Rey. (See figure 5-34, page 5-70.)

5-275. Critical events include—

z Conducting covert infiltration of dismounted observation posts.

z Maintaining security and retain freedom of maneuver.

z Fully integrating host-nation security forces into the security plan.

z Reconnaissance handover of identified threats and the religious group’s movement between

troops.

5-276. End state, enemy: Enemy forces unable to influence or disrupt the Emilito Rey march; deny enemy 

freedom of maneuver throughout the B Troop sector. Friendly: B Troop resupplied and prepared to assume 

any follow-on mission. Terrain: Route Gold from checkpoint 5 to checkpoint 8 secured. Civil: Minimal 

damage to civilian infrastructure. Commander’s reconnaissance guidance includes—

z Focus. The focus is threat-based with an emphasis on the identification of personnel posing a

threat to the Emilito Rey march through the town via suicide vests or flash mob violence.
Chapter 5 

5-70 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Tempo of reconnaissance, rapid and stealthy. Move to dismount points rapidly and then occupy

observation posts covertly. Limited indicators at NAIs allow collection to be rapid, and the

infiltration method is stealthy to avoid detection when establishing observation posts.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. The operation criteria is discrete. Positively identify any

enemy elements that attempt to disrupt or attack the crowd and engage according to the rules

of engagement. No authorized warning shots.

z Displacement criteria. Observation post discovered and compromised. Observation post

displaces to subsequent or alternate observation post to maintain contact with threat forces.

Bypass criteria. Mark and report, but bypass all obstacles in the sector except obstacles within

two blocks of Route Gold. Suppress, report, and bypass all direct fire contact while en route to

observation posts.

Figure 5-34. SBCT Troop Area Security 

Area Security, Phase I 

5-277. The operation occurs in three phases. Phase I begins upon receipt of the squadron OPORD and ends 

with the troop set in position with checkpoints along Route Gold. Critical to this phase is coordinating 

rehearsal time and place, maintaining communication with the squadron commander, conducting route 

reconnaissance in an urban area to identify primary and alternate routes of ingress and egress to checkpoints, 

and identifying observation post positions. (See figure 5-35, page 5-71.)

5-278. Coordinate rehearsal time and place. When augmented with host-nation forces, it is best to conduct 

a combined rehearsal to ensure everyone understands the plan and nothing is lost in translation. Language 

barriers can offer difficulties when conducting these operations. Implement interpreter assets at the lowest 

levels possible to ensure continuity and that both organizations understand the plan. Consider asking the 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-71

host-nation forces to provide an organic command net radio to the interpreter to maintain a common 

operational picture during the operation. Rehearse to ensure all forces participating in the joint operation 

understand the rules of engagement and escalation of force policy. 

5-279. Maintain communication with the squadron commander. Maintaining communication allows the 

troop to report all information rapidly and accurately. Platoons provide radio checks to the troop command 

post and report crossing all graphic control measures throughout the movement, allowing the troop and 

squadron’s collective leadership to update their common operational picture.

5-280. Conduct route reconnaissance in an urban area to identify primary and alternate routes of ingress 

and egress to checkpoints, and to identify observation post positions. Platoons template observation posts 

and have the freedom to choose a suitable position based on the terrain. While not templated by the troop, 

platoons select alternate observation post locations. When selecting observation posts, platoons ensure their 

observation posts are in locations that can identify priority intelligence requirements rapidly and accurately. 

Providing early warning will give the command the ability to coordinate the appropriate response—continue

to monitor, deter, kill, or capture. The troop commander considers all mission variables when planning for 

the conduct of a tactical movement in an urban area. 

Figure 5-35. SBCT Troop Area Security, Phase I 

Area Security, Phase II 

5-281. Phase II begins with the establishment of observation posts at all assigned named areas of interest, 

and ends after the area reconnaissance of assigned NAIs is complete. The platoons conduct this operation in 

three phases. Critical for this phase is establishing observation posts to identify sources of instability, and 

radical messages and themes; and identifying persons of interest. (See figure 5-36, page 5-72.)

5-282. Establishing observation posts to identify sources of instability and radical messages and themes, 

and to identify persons of interest. The platoons continually improve their positions throughout the duration 

of the mission, emplacing sensors and obstacles that provide protection for the observation posts allowing 

the platoons to maintain contact with the NAI. The platoons also identify dead space and restricted operation 

zones for organic UAS. The troop fire support officer establishes the requested restricted operation zones to 
Chapter 5 

5-72 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

support the UAS, which allows the troop to report all information rapidly and accurately, and execute 

reconnaissance handover of enemy activity to the area of operations commander. The troop establishes 

alternate positions to observe each NAI in the event large crowds compromise primary positions or restrict 

visibility of NAIs from that position. Ensure that there is an interpreter (if applicable) present to translate 

messages to the Soldiers occupying the observation post. Soldiers take measures to record all verbal messages 

(utilizing organic audio and video recording devices). Commanders ensure that subordinate units understand 

the information operation to ensure that Soldiers can distribute talking points to any locals they encounter. 

Commanders also ensure subordinate units are in possession of a high-value target or person of interest list. 

This ensures that the observation posts collect the correct data while on mission. 

5-283. Commander’s security guidance includes—

z Focus. Your focus is to identify personnel looking to negatively impact the Emilito Rey march

using suicide vests or flash mob violence.

z Tempo of security is a long duration. The troop’s mission is approximately 36 hours.

z The engagement/disengagement criteria is discrete. Positively identify any enemy elements that

attempt to disrupt or attack the crowd and engage according to the rules of engagement. No

warning shots authorized.

z Displacement criteria. Displace once the group reaches their shrine and the crowds have

dispersed.

Figure 5-36. SBCT Troop Area Security, Phase II 

Area Security, Phase III 

5-284. Phase III begins after area reconnaissance is complete and ends after the troop has withdrawn to 

FOB Assassin. Critical events during this phase include collapsing observation posts, departing the area of 

operation through alternate routes, and reporting all information collected. 

5-285. Collapse mounted and dismounted observation posts. While departing their positions, observation 

posts should attempt to minimize any signature that will alert the local population or potential enemy. Ensure 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-73

collection of any organic data collection equipment (such as retrieving audio and video devices covertly 

placed near the NAI to record the speaker’s message).

5-286. Depart the area of operation utilizing alternate routes to broaden route reconnaissance within the 

area of operation. Utilizing different routes ensures the unpredictability of the troop’s patterns and that the 

troop is maximizing all routes to perform continuous reconnaissance throughout the area of operation. 

5-287. Troops report all information they collect during the mission to higher headquarters upon returning 

to FOB Assassin. Troops should mark all electronic data recorders by observation post position and named 

area of interest to assist higher headquarters in gaining situational awareness. 

Warfighting Function Considerations 

5-288. The warfighting considerations described below apply to the above scenario. These are examples 

for illustrative purposes only, other considerations may apply. 

Mission Command 

5-289. Facilities. The command post locates at the FOB location due to the short duration of the mission 

and close proximity between the FOB and the troop’s area of operations. The FOB location is centrally 

located in the troop sector and positioned where it can maintain communications with the subordinate 

platoons and higher headquarters. The commander should be with the main effort by phase. The 1SG may 

collocate with the medical assets and the executive officer may locate back at the FOB. 

5-290. Systems. Similar warfighting considerations as a stability screen apply. The troop should utilize 

cyber systems to assist in targeting and identifying enemy personnel. When operating with host-nation 

security forces, the commander should request a host-nation form of communication, such as a handheld 

radio if host-nation systems are not compatible with U.S. forces. 

5-291. Graphics. See stability screen. Similar warfighting considerations apply. Transfer the ground 

reference grid to the lowest level, and share with host-nation forces and adjacent units to ensure the 

distribution of the common operational picture to all units participating in the operation. 

Movement and Maneuver 

5-292. Aerial/aviation. The troop should plan for and request an attack/reconnaissance team to provide area 

security of the observation posts and route reconnaissance of the high-speed avenues of approach in and 

around friendly forces. Troops ensure all aerial assets at the troop’s disposal incorporate into the troop’s 

information collection plan to ensure cueing, integration, and redundancy. 

5-293. Dismounted. The troop should consider observation post manning and weapon requirements, and 

minimum security manning. The troop commander determines the risk and need for dismounted personnel 

to maneuver with or without the mutual support of mounted direct fire weapon systems. Troops consider 

route and zone reconnaissance as implied or specified tasks while maneuvering to the observation post 

location. Troops consider time and movement techniques based on the current situation and the squadron 

commander’s guidance.

5-294. Mounted. Similar warfighting considerations as stability screen apply. The troop considers the 

civilian population and urban obstacles. The troop incorporates current rules of engagement regarding 

civilian pedestrian and vehicle traffic. 

Intelligence 

5-295. Troop commanders should refine squadron priority intelligence requirements to develop indicators 

that identify threats against the protected force. Indicators should be specific and understood by the Soldier. 

Higher echelons always consider and request available assets based on mission intent. The troop ensures they 

receive an intelligence update of the enemy situation from the squadron intelligence section prior to the start 

point. 
Chapter 5 

5-74 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Fires 

5-296. See stability screen. Similar warfighting considerations apply. Coordinate the fires plan with higher 

and adjacent units according to current rules of engagement based upon conditions on the ground. Clear all 

fires at all levels and approval by the area of operations commander. In this scenario, the troop should plan 

for precision fires to minimize collateral damage. The troop fire support officer needs to refine target location 

during the planning process. 

Sustainment 

5-297. The troop should always plan for the proper days of supply necessary to complete the mission 

successfully without logistics hindering the outcome. Considerations include enemy threat capabilities and 

supply expenditures against required time between resupply and the distance the troop logistics package 

needs to travel before getting to the area of operations. The troop plans for resupply methods for an extended 

mission. Soldiers must deploy on mission with a full basic load of ammunition for all weapons systems used 

(unless dictated otherwise) during mission planning. When planning Soldier loads, the troop must consider 

contingency, sustainment, approach march, combat, and fighting loads. The troop plans the security of their 

casualty collection points and ambulance exchange points using the terrain and the enemy situation. 

Protection 

5-298. The troop plans alternate and subsequent observation posts and establishes minimum manning 

requirements. The troop employs early warning systems to provide greater reaction time and maneuver space 

against those threats previously identified. The troop employs counterradio-controlled improvised explosive 

device electronic warfare (CREW) systems to defeat radio-controlled improvised explosive devices. The 

commander requests route clearance teams for use prior to phase II of the operation. Explosive ordnance 

disposal assets are on standby for the duration of the operation. In concert with the rules of engagement, the 

commander develops guidance regarding the detention of civilian personnel who discover covert observation 

posts. For example, if one or more civilians discover Soldiers using a personal dwelling or business as an 

observation post, it may be necessary to detain those individuals until the end of the mission. Detaining these 

individuals prevents those isolated Soldiers from information reports to hostile elements who will attempt to 

kill or capture them. 

RECONNAISSANCE TASKS IN SUPPORT OF STABILITY 

5-299. Commander’s task. Cavalry units to conduct reconnaissance as part of stability tasks to complement 

BCT stability tasks. Squadrons conducting reconnaissance in stability settings use the same fundamentals as 

reconnaissance in other situations. Cavalry units can connect to other units within a BCT. (Refer to FM 3-98 

for more information.) 

AREA RECONNAISSANCE

5-300. A Cavalry squadron’s area reconnaissance during stability operations centers on operational 

variables that affect instability. Identifying these sources of volatility helps clarify the BCT commander’s 

decisions on how to mitigate those sources of instability. 

5-301. The following is a technique that allows the squadron to capture and track the results of religious 

center monitoring. Again, these are specific to each scenario and are not the only possible answer. 

Squadron Mission 

5-302. Situation. The enemy is utilizing religious centers to influence the population against coalition forces 

within the BCT area of operations, and to discredit the host government's legitimacy. (See figure 5-37, page 

5-75.) Pattern analysis indicates that the enemy sets IEDs on Thursday night before Friday’s call to prayer. 

Historically, targeting against coalition elements has been at the conclusion of prayer. Mission. Squadron 

conducts area reconnaissance of religious centers no later than 051500DEC20XX within Brudu, in order to 

identify sources of instability, radical messages and themes, and to identify persons of interest. Execution. 

Troops establish mounted and dismounted observation posts near identified named areas of interest to 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-75

monitor the different religious centers throughout the area of operations. A Troop’s area of responsibility 

includes NAIs 1 to 4. B Troop’s area of responsibility includes NAIs 5 and 6. C Troop is responsible for 

NAIs 7 to 10. Squadron commander’s reconnaissance guidance includes—

z Focus. Identification of personnel instigating instability, propaganda against friendly forces,

and radical messages and themes. In addition, any IED emplacement activities that occur

towards the end of the prayer.

z Tempo: Short duration, lest than 12 hours on the objective. Units ensure they plan accordingly

to monitor all of their NAIs.

z Engagement criteria: Weapons tight, positive identification of rocket-propelled grenade teams

and man-portable air defense systems, active improvised explosive device emplacement team

or when engaged by direct fire. Priority of fires goes to troops in contact.

z Disengagement criteria: Units disengage upon threat neutralization or the conclusion of

speeches. Units continue to use discretion as they disengage.

z Displacement criteria: Observation posts discovered or compromised. Observation post

displaces to subsequent or alternate observation posts to maintain contact with threat forces.

Figure 5-37. SBCT Squadron Area Reconnaissance, Stability 

Troop Mission 

5-303. Situation: See squadron situation above. Mission: B Troop conducts area reconnaissance of religious 

centers NLT 051500DEC20XX within Brudu to identify sources of radical messages and themes, and to 

identify persons of interest. Commander’s intent, expanded purpose: Identify any production sources or 

transmission methods for print, audio, and visual material agitating the civilian population located within the 

troop AO. (See figure 5-38, page 5-77.)
Chapter 5 

5-76 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

5-304. The key tasks of this situation are—

z Conduct covert infiltration of observation posts.

z Retain security and freedom of maneuver.

5-305. End state, enemy: Monitor and document all enemy propaganda within the area of operations. 

Friendly: All relevant and actionable intelligence gathered and passed on to the squadron commander and 

higher echelon intelligence channels. Terrain: Town Brudu secured. Civil: Collateral damage minimized. 

5-306. Commander’s reconnaissance guidance includes—

z Focus. Threat based. Identification of personnel instigating instability, propaganda against

friendly forces, and radical messages and themes.

z Tempo. Rapid and stealthy. Move to dismount points rapidly and then covertly occupy

observation posts.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. Weapons tight, positive identification of rocket-propelled

grenade teams and man-portable air defense systems, activate improvised explosive device

emplacement team, or when engaged by direct fire. Priority of fires goes to troops in contact.

Neutralize threat.

z Displacement criteria. Observation post discovered and compromised. Observation post

displaces to subsequent or alternate observation post in order to maintain contact with threat

forces. Bypass criteria: Mark and report, but bypass all obstacles in sector.

5-307. Commander’s security guidance includes—

z Focus. Identification of personnel instigating instability, propaganda against friendly forces,

and radical messages and themes.

z Tempo of security. Short duration, less than 12 hours OPs.

z Engagement/disengagement criteria. Weapons tight, positive identification of rocket-propelled

grenade teams and MANPADs, active improvised explosive device emplacement team, or

when engaged by direct fire. Priority of fires goes to troops in contact. Threat neutralized.

z Displacement criteria. Observation post discovered and compromised. Observation post

displaces to subsequent or alternate observation post in order to maintain contact with threat

forces.
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-77

Figure 5-38. SBCT Troop Area Reconnaissance 

Area Reconnaissance, Phase I 

5-308. The troop area reconnaissance operation occurs in three phases. Phase I begins upon receipt of 

squadron OPORD and ends with the troop set in position with observation posts on all named areas of interest 

in sector. Critical events in this phase include maintaining squadron communication, conducting route 

reconnaissance, and reporting all PIR and enemy activity. (See figure 5-39, page 5-78.)

5-309. Maintain communication with the squadron and the area of operations commander, which allows 

the troop to report all information rapidly and accurately, and to execute reconnaissance handover of enemy 

activity to the area of operations commander. Platoons provide radio checks to the command and report all 

graphic control measures throughout the movement to allow continuous situational awareness. 

5-310. Conduct route reconnaissance in an urban area to identify primary and alternate routes of ingress 

and egress to NAIs and to identify observation post positions. Platoons plan templated observation posts, and 

have the freedom to choose a suitable position based on the terrain. Platoons select alternate observation post 

locations. When selecting observation posts, platoons establish their observation posts in locations that can 

observe their assigned NAI and report on those PIR and indicators that they are able to observe rapidly and 

accurately. Platoons give the troop and squadron commander early warning so they can coordinate 

reconnaissance handover, as necessary. The platoon identifies high-speed avenues of approach. The troop 

commander considers all applicable mission variables of METT-TC when conducting a tactical movement 

in an urban area. 
Chapter 5 

5-78 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

5-311. Platoons report all PIR and other observed information. Platoons report the locations of their primary 

and alternate observation posts to the troop command post immediately, as well as reporting once they begin 

to observe their assigned NAIs. 

Figure 5-39. SBCT Troop Area Reconnaissance, Phase I 

Area Reconnaissance, Phase II 

5-312. Phase II begins with the establishment of observation posts at all assigned NAIs and ends after the 

area reconnaissance of assigned NAIs is complete. Critical events in this phase include establishing 

observation posts, conducting counterreconnaissance, conducting area reconnaissance with Raven, and 

mixing collection assets. (See figure 5-40, page 5-80.)

5-313. Establish observation posts to identify sources of instability, radical messages and themes, and 

identify persons of interest. The platoons continuously improve their positions throughout the duration of the 

mission. They also emplace sensors and obstacles that provide protection for the observation posts, allowing 

them to maintain contact with the NAI. The troop fires support officer identifies dead space and restricted 

operation zones for organic UAS. Establishing observation posts allows the troop to report all information 

rapidly and accurately, and to execute reconnaissance handover of enemy activity to the area of operations 

owner. The troop establishes alternate positions to observe each NAI in the event the enemy compromises 

primary positions or large crowds restrict the visibility of named areas of interest from that position. Ensure 

that each observation post has an interpreter (if applicable) to translate messages to the Soldiers occupying 

the observation post. Utilizing organic audio and video recording devices, Soldiers take measures to record 

all verbal messages. Commanders ensure that subordinate units understand the information operation themes 

so that Soldiers can distribute talking points to any locals they encounter. Commanders also make sure 

subordinate units are in possession of a high-value target or person of interest list, ensuring the observation 

posts collect the correct data while on mission. 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-79

5-314. Troops conduct counterreconnaissance operations to identify enemy reconnaissance elements that 

may inhibit the mission in areas of operation. Units activate Prophet Systems while troops are maneuvering 

into sectors. Troops enable enemy early warning systems to identify and mitigate at early stages in the 

mission, such as suspicious personnel watching patrols while talking on cell phones. Units ensure they 

monitor and report any unusual activity in a sector that did not exist prior to troops moving into the sector. 

(Examples are tires added to fires to turn smoke black, releasing pigeons, and kites beginning to fly.) 

5-315. Utilize the Raven UAS to conduct area reconnaissance of dismounted observation posts to provide 

early warning and reaction time to possible enemy movement. Commanders ensure troops preplan and submit 

ROZs for approval prior to any flight operations. Commanders consider what effects a ROZ may have on 

indirect fires and rotary- and fixed-wing operations in the area of operations. Troops consider operational 

restrictions of organic UAS. Commanders ensure they maximize the effects of the system during a critical 

juncture during the operation, such as if the UAS can only stay on station for 20 minutes prior to it being 

required to return for refuel or recharge, the commander synchronizes it’s employment with the ground 

operation. 

5-316. Mix collection assets to identify persons of interest and sources of instability in or around the named 

areas of interest. Troops employ all organic assets to ensure continuous reconnaissance. Mixing collection 

assets allows the troop to minimize dead space and meet the fundamentals of reconnaissance (for example, 

implementation of an LRAS3 from a vehicle which has a different vantage point as an observation post with 

binoculars). Upon positive identification of a person of interest, the troop recommends to higher headquarters 

to determine an appropriate course of action. Recommendations include, but are not limited to, 

reconnaissance handover to a UAS or an adjacent friendly unit, or a change of mission that may require the 

unit to detain the person of interest. 
Chapter 5 

5-80 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 5-40. SBCT Troop Area Reconnaissance, Phase II 

Area Reconnaissance, Phase III 

5-317. Phase III begins after area reconnaissance is complete and ends after the troop withdraws to FOB 

Assassin. Critical events to this phase include collapsing observation posts and departing the area of 

operations. 

5-318. Collapse mounted and dismounted observation posts. Troops depart their positions minimizing any 

signature that will alert the local population or potential enemy. Ensure collection of any data collection 

equipment acquired to support troop operations, such as retrieving audio and video devices covertly placed 

near the NAI to record a speaker’s message.

5-319. Depart the area of operation utilizing alternate routes to broaden route reconnaissance within the 

area of operation. To ensure troops do not establish predictable patterns, they use alternate routes. Troops 

maximize the use of all routes to perform continuous reconnaissance throughout the area of observation. 
Reconnaissance and Security in Decisive Action Tasks 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 5-81

5-320. Troop will report all information they collect during the mission to higher headquarters upon return 

to FOB Assassin. Troops mark all electronic data recorders with the observation post position or named area 

of interest to assist in all source intelligence production at higher headquarters. 
This page intentionally left blank. 
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 6-1 

Chapter 6 

Augmentation 

Combat power augmentations are capabilities provided by other units and teams to the 

troop in support of the current mission. The commander employs available 

augmentation to enhance the effectiveness of troop operations. The commander and 

subordinate leaders must understand the capabilities and limitations of augmentation, 

and ensure a clear task and purpose when integrating this support into troop-level 

operations. Augmentation helps the troop commander to accomplish the mission while 

achieving the squadron commander’s intent. Augmentation should complement, not 

detract from, the troop mission. The integration of these assets begins during troop 

planning and continues through rehearsals and execution. The following paragraphs 

discuss combat augmentation that a troop commander may encounter during 

operations.

SECTION I – BRIGADE COMBAT TEAM ASSETS 

6-1. The squadron provides the troop additional combat power, either organic to the squadron or from the 

BCT. The squadron’s higher headquarters, the BCT, has organic capability in the form of a field artillery 

battalion and the brigade engineer battalion, which includes the military intelligence and signal companies, 

and the CBRN reconnaissance platoon. 

ENGINEER SUPPORT 

6-2. Combat engineers accomplish mobility, countermobility, and survivability tasks to increase the 

effectiveness of troop operations. Combat engineers integrate with the commander’s maneuver and indirect

fires assets, enhancing the commander’s opportunities to accomplish combined arms missions. 

6-3. General (construction) engineers do not organize, equip, or train to perform close combat operations. 

When close combat is less likely to occur, they may employ their technical capabilities to support the troop 

for specialized missions, such as reconnaissance tasks related to infrastructure or environmental conditions. 

6-4. An engineer reconnaissance team is the baseline engineering reconnaissance element. The identified 

element may be a team, squad, platoon, or larger unit. Highly trained personnel are required for obstacle and 

other tactical engineer reconnaissance operations. (Refer to ATP 3-34.22 and ATP 3-34.81 for more information.) 

6-5. Engineer reconnaissance teams assist the troop in conducting zone, area, and route reconnaissance to 

answer the applicable commander’s critical information requirements, with an additional focus on technical 

information. Engineer reconnaissance support may be critical in urban operations, tunnel and subsurface 

operations and other operations in complex terrain. Reconnaissance support is also critical in mobility, 

countermobility, and survivability operations. Engineer capabilities support environment and infrastructure 

classification in reconnaissance operations. Environmental and infrastructure assessments support the 

performance of a detailed survey, when the situation permits. The engineer reconnaissance team is normally 

task-organized for a specific mission from the combat mobility platoons or the mobility support platoon 

found within one of the brigade engineer battalion’s engineer companies. The engineer reconnaissance 

team— 

z Provides detailed technical information on complex obstacles and enemy engineer equipment to

increase the supporting unit’s reconnaissance capabilities.

z Conducts an analysis of assets needed to bypass, breach, mark, or reduce any

encountered obstacle.
Chapter 6 

6-2 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Provides detailed technical information on routes (including classification) and specific

information on bridges, tunnels, fords, and ferries along the route.

z Provides the initial level of technical information required for an airfield assessment.

z Conducts tactical reconnaissance with a specified focus on the initial technical information

required for environmental or infrastructure assessments.

FIRE SUPPORT 

6-6. Fire support is fires that directly support land, maritime, amphibious, and special operations forces to 

engage enemy forces, combat formations, and facilities in pursuit of tactical and operational 

objectives (JP 3-09). The paragraphs below discuss the different fire assets and their capabilities available to 

Cavalry troop commanders. 

Fire Support Team 

6-7. A fire support team is a field artillery team organic to each maneuver battalion and selected units to 

plan and coordinate all available company supporting fires, including mortars, field artillery, naval surface 

fire support, and close air support integration (ADRP 3-09). The fire support team also assists in target 

acquisition, calls for fire, and fire control through digital links established with the squadron fires cell. The 

squadron fire support officer, S-2, and S-3 coordinate closely to focus and synchronize lethal and nonlethal 

effects that support the troop scheme of maneuver by taking advantage of near-real time targeting information 

provided by intelligence, acquisition, and targeting systems. Target acquisition systems also provide targeting 

information that the reconnaissance and fire support elements use during reconnaissance and security 

missions. 

Troop Mortars 

6-8. The troop mortar section (while organic, is listed here with fire support to facilitate fires planning) 

provides organic indirect fire support that is extremely responsive to the troop’s tactical needs. The section 

can place a heavy volume of timely, accurate, sustained indirect fires that can disrupt enemy fires and 

movement, allowing the troop to maneuver to positions of advantage. Mortars are effective in covering 

obstacles or dead space, engaging dismounted threats, marking targets for air attack, or providing screening 

smoke (obscuration). They are ideal weapons for providing immediate suppression and for attacking targets 

on reverse slopes, in narrow ravines, in built-up areas, and in other areas that are difficult to strike with lowangle fires. Mortars are largely ineffective at destroying armor vehicles. Plan and employ mortars for the 

appropriate target or mission. 

6-9. The troop often operates within a large area that the mortar section cannot completely cover during 

missions. In such a situation, the commander decides whether to position the mortars to cover the most critical 

area or to move them to a position where they can cover a portion of multiple areas and adjust as necessary. 

If commanders know the availability of other fires assets, they can attempt to incorporate them into their 

plan. 

6-10. The progress of the troop determines the movement of the mortars during Cavalry operations. While 

the section is on the move, it prepares to provide immediate fires using direct lay, direct alignment, or hip 

shoot techniques. The section plans the movement so it is in position to support the troop at critical times, 

such as when crossing danger areas or clearing complex terrain. 

6-11. Cavalry troops in the ABCT and SBCT have a section of two mounted 120-mm mortars and a fire 

direction center. In the IBCT, motorized troops have a section of two HMMWV-towed 120-mm mortars and 

a fire direction center, while the dismounted troop has a section of two 60-mm mortars and a fire direction 

center. Table 6-1 (page 6-3) summarizes the troop’s mortar capabilities.

Note. BFSB troops do not have organic mortars.
Augmentation 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 6-3 

Table 6-1. Fire Support Capabilities (Mortars) 

WEAPON AVAILABLE 

MUNITIONS

MAX 

RANGE

METERS

MIN 

RANGE

METERS

MAX RATE 

(RDS PER 

MINUTE)

BURST 

RADIUS

SUSTAINED 

RATE (RDS PER 

MINUTE)

60 mm HE,WP, 

Illumination 3500 (HE) 70 (HE) 30 for 4 minutes 30 m 20

120 mm

HE,WP, 

obscuration, 

Illumination

7200 (HE) 180 (HE) 15 for 1 minute 60 m 5

Legend: HE - high explosives; Max – maximum; Min – minimum; mm – millimeter; rds – rounds; WP - white 

phosphorous

Effect Types of Mortar Support 

6-12. The troop request one of five effect types of mortar support during a call for fire, depending on the 

desired results intended for the target. The five effect types of mortar support are destruction, neutralization, 

suppression, obscuration, and illumination. 

Destruction 

6-13. High explosive rounds can destroy soft targets, but typically require a very large amount of ammunition 

to achieve the intended effect. The destruction effect results in 30 percent casualties or material damage to 

the targeted asset. High explosives are very effective against dismounted threats and in urban environments. 

Neutralization

6-14. Once a target suffers 10 percent casualties or damage, it is neutralized, which temporarily renders it 

ineffective or unusable. This effect is beneficial when maneuvering a unit into a position of relative 

advantage. 

Suppression 

6-15. High explosive rounds cannot destroy armored vehicles unless they achieve a direct hit; however, their 

use can greatly disrupt enemy movement. High explosive rounds can force mounted enemy units to button 

up or move to less advantageous positions. 

Obscuration 

6-16. Troops use smoke rounds for obscuration, marking targets, and screening. In obscuration, place smoke 

on or just in front of enemy positions to obscure their vision. Obscuration can support infiltration and 

exfiltration. Screening is placing smoke between the enemy and the troop’s positions to conceal movement. 

Mortar-delivered obscuration can mark enemy positions, which can help to enhance friendly maneuver and 

orient direct fires or close air support. Obscuration may be more effective in urban environments where 

structures minimize the impact of winds that normally disperse obscuration effects. In any situation, Scouts 

are careful not to allow friendly obscuration to work against them by marking their own positions. 

Illumination 

6-17. Illumination rounds light an area or enemy position during periods of limited visibility, which can 

increase the effectiveness of image intensification devices and sensors. It also assists the troop in gathering 

information, adjusting mortars or artillery, or engaging enemy targets with direct fire. Ground burst 

illumination marks enemy positions and provides a thermal target reference point for control of direct and 

indirect fires. As with obscuration, however, Scouts are careful not to illuminate friendly positions. Scouts 

pay close attention to wind direction and speed to ensure proper placement of the rounds whenever they 

employ illumination. 
Chapter 6 

6-4 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Employment Techniques 

6-18. The troop mortar section employs as a separate element during operations. It generally moves 

independently of the platoons and provides its own security. The commander usually designates positions for 

the section sergeant and provides guidance for indirect fires forward of the platoons. The commander can 

delegate this responsibility to the fire support officer, which allows the officer and the section sergeant to 

work together to develop a firm fire support plan. 

6-19. If the section divides into individual tubes, the section leadership splits to ensure adequate coverage. 

Known as split section operations, this technique is the least preferred method of operation because the 

individual tube is isolated and dependent on the element it attaches to for all defense, maneuver, and 

sustainment requirements. Split section operations requires a higher degree of crew training and does not 

provide for mutual support against air or ground threats. While this may provide a wider coverage area, it 

has its own inherent disadvantages. Split section operations degrade mass effects particularly with high 

explosives and illumination. If the mortar section losses communications in either vehicle, split section 

operations is not possible. Additionally, planning requirements doubles for the following— 

z Command and control.

z Clearance of fires.

z Survivability moves.

z Resupply

Mortars in Urban Operations 

6-20. Mortars are well suited for operations in urban areas because they have a high rate of fire, short 

minimum range, and a steep angle of fall of mortar ammunition, which minimizes dead space behind 

buildings. Mortar fire dead space on the gun-target line beyond a building is only about one-half the height 

of the building. (Refer to ATTP 3-21.90.) 

FIELD ARTILLERY

6-21. A fires battalion or battery may employ both low- and high-angle fires to support the troop. Munitions 

include high explosive, dual-purpose improved conventional munitions, extended range, dual purpose, 

improved conventional munitions, copperhead, scatterable mines, obscuration, and illumination. The 

GPS-aided Excalibur high explosive round is useful for striking well-located targets; its guidance system and 

top attack trajectory make it less likely to produce collateral damage. 

6-22. In addition to cannon artillery, multiple launch rocket system units provide unguided or GPS-guided 

rocket or missile fires. Multiple launch rocket system units do not have obscuration or illumination munitions, 

although they may fire antitank scatterable mines that comply with international treaties for the use of landmines. 

Aviation Fires and Close Air Support 

6-23. Attack helicopter fires are a powerful asset in the area of operation because they can destroy enemy 

elements of varying sizes, including large armor formations. The troop may require Army rotary-wing 

aviation to support subordinate platoons and teams engaged in close combat. 

6-24. Close air support is air action by fixed- and rotary-wing aircraft against hostile targets that are in close 

proximity to friendly forces and require detailed integration of each air mission with the fire and movement 

of those forces (JP 3-0). (Refer to JP 3-09.3 for more information.) Planning of close air support targets is 

the responsibility of the commander and the fire support officer in coordination with the squadron tactical air 

control party. The squadron tactical air control party consists of air liaison officers and joint terminal attack 

controllers (JTACs). The air liaison officer advises the commander of the capabilities and limitations of fixedwing close air support, while the JTAC is the primary means for requesting and controlling close air support. 

Joint fires observers act as extended eyes for the JTAC in support of type II or III terminal attack control 

engagements or organic fire support personnel request and control if no JTAC support is available. For 

procedures associated with CAS execution with non-JTAC personnel. (See JP 3-09.3.) 
Augmentation 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 6-5 

Target Acquisistion 

6-25. Target acquisition systems gather information in several ways. Assets include—

z AN/TPQ-36 and AN/TPQ-37 radars.

z Unmanned Aircraft Systems.

z Fire support teams.

z AH-64 helicopters.

z Scouts.

z Fixed-wing aircraft performing reconnaissance and surveillance missions using advanced

targeting pods.

6-26. Targeting is a command responsibility. Locating, identifying, classifying, tracking, and attacking 

targets and then assessing battle damage are difficult tasks. Competition for assets is intense. Detailed 

guidance, thorough planning, and disciplined execution prevent unnecessary redundancy and maximize 

available combat effects. 

FIRES PLANNING

6-27. One of the commander’s greatest challenges is to synchronize and concentrate all available assets at 

the critical time and place. To ensure the fires assigned are effective and understood by subordinates, the 

commander conducts fire planning. 

Planning Considerations 

6-28. The planning process begins with receipt of the mission. The commander, XO, and fire support officer 

interact throughout planning and execution to ensure continuous necessary support. As the commander 

develops the plan for employment of forces, they and the fire support officer plan for the best use of fires by 

determining—

z Fires and nonlethal assets that support the troop and subordinate elements.

z Targets to attack.

z Indirect fires and nonlethal assets to employ (ammunition and delivery).

z Desired target effects.

z Engagement priorities.

6-29. The commander clearly states the intent for fires and ensures that the fires plan supports each phase of 

the operation. Areas that the commander coordinates with the fire support officer are—

z Scheme of maneuver: includes the area of operation, timing and triggers of advance, rate of

movement, passage of lines, and Army aviation in the area of operation.

z Identify priority of fires: identifies which platoon has priority of fires.

z Identify critical targets: seriously impede mission accomplishment.

z Identify priority targets: along with the time, they will be in effect.

z Close air support: the commander and fire support officer, in coordination with the squadron

tactical air control party, determine what close air support assets are available, when they are

available, and how to use (including target selection and desired effects).

z Fire support coordination measure: established by higher headquarters, these control measures are

existing or proposed, permissive, or restrictive.

z Ammunition restrictions: place limitations on the use of obscuration, improved conventional

munitions, or other ammunition (including established controlled supply rates).

6-30. The fire support plan outlines how to use lethal and nonlethal fires. The troop fire support officer 

develops the plan and constantly refines it as the operation continues. It ranks targets in priority order, 

matches them with the available indirect fires systems, eliminates duplication with squadron targets, and 

allows fires execution quickly and without specific direction from the commander. A fire support plan includes—

z Priority of fires.

z Critical and priority targets.
Chapter 6 

6-6 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Rules of engagement.

z Allocation of priority targets and final protective fire, if available.

z Execution matrix.

z Fire support coordination measure.

z Clearance of fires.

z Required airspace coordinating measures.

z The general concept of how indirect fires support the operation.

z A target list that includes locations for fires use.

6-31. The fire support officer disseminates the fire support plan containing all the elements listed above 

within the troop by OPORD or by other means such as a digital message. Upon receipt and modification, 

based on platoon indirect fire plans, the platoon leaders receive the updated fire plans. 

Note. Scout platoons often generate platoon-level graphic control measures because of the 

decentralized nature of reconnaissance and security missions. The troop fire support team and 

troop headquarters element must routinely incorporate platoon graphic control measures.

Coordination Considerations

6-32. The troop fire support officer has the following responsibilities in coordinating fires: 

z Ensure the squadron fire support officer, troop mortar section, and any other supporting elements

have the correct fire support plan.

z Conduct fires rehearsals prior to every operation, when feasible.

z Keep the squadron fire support officer informed of the tactical situation.

z Select the appropriate fires method to engage targets.

z Inform the troop commander regarding the status of all fires assets.

z Modify the fire support plan as necessary and disseminate changes.

z Coordinate requests for additional fires, if necessary.

z Monitor execution of the fire support plan throughout the operation.

6-33. The troop fire support officer ensures that the fire support plan remains supportable. The fire support 

officer has to stay abreast of the tactical situation and coordinate, refine, and anticipate all fire support 

requirements. The fire support officer immediately informs the commander if the plan becomes unworkable 

or if circumstances dictate changes to the plan. 

INTELLIGENCE SUPPORT 

6-34. The BCT intelligence cell assists the commander and staff in understanding the situation and with 

decisionmaking. The intelligence cell provides timely, relevant, accurate, predictive, and tailored intelligence 

analysis, reporting, and products. 

6-35. The military intelligence company supports the BCT and its subordinate commands through collection, 

analysis, and dissemination of information and intelligence. Its mission is to conduct analysis, full-motion 

video, signals intelligence, and human intelligence collection. The military intelligence company also 

provides analysis and intelligence personnel for the company intelligence support teams. Refer to ATP 2-19.4 

for more information.

CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, RADIOLOGICAL, AND NUCLEAR 

SUPPORT 

6-36. The only CBRN element organic to the squadron is the squadron CBRN officer and NCO. The 

exception is the CBRN Scout platoon in the surveillance troop of the SBCT Cavalry squadron. These 

squadron CBRN assets use decision support tools embedded in the joint warning and reporting network to 

plan CBRN defense, provide tracking support during squadron operations, and gain and maintain awareness 

of the CBRN situation in the squadron area of operations and area of interest. Designated staff members 
Augmentation 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 6-7 

integrate contamination avoidance, protection, and decontamination principles to assist the squadron 

commander in CBRN defense (the troop CBRN noncommissioned officer assists the troop commander). 

(Refer to ATP 3-11.32/MCWP 3-37.2/NTTP 3-11.37 for more information.) 

SECTION II – EXTERNAL BRIGADE COMBAT TEAM ASSETS 

6-37. When required, the troop requests augmentation from outside the BCT through the BCT operations 

officer. Both habitual and other augmentation forces are below. 

ARMY AVIATION SUPPORT 

6-38. Army Aviation conducts air-ground operations as the aerial maneuver force of the combined arms 

team, or as an independent maneuver force in support of ground forces. Army aviation supports the Cavalry 

troop conducting reconnaissance and security operations through various tasks, including movement to 

contact, attack, reconnaissance, security, and air assault tasks. Depending on the required task, Cavalry 

squadrons request support using attack/reconnaissance air mission requests or lift air mission requests. Both 

examples and more information on Army aviation is in FM 3-04.

MOVEMENT TO CONTACT

6-39. The speed, range, lethality, long-range communications, and reconnaissance capabilities of Army 

aviation make attack reconnaissance units ideally suited to conduct movement to contact and especially with 

the employment of manned-unmanned teaming. Cavalry troops may increase their freedom of maneuver by 

having aviation assets develop the situation and create favorable conditions to conduct subsequent tactical or 

enabling tasks. 

ATTACK

6-40. Army aviation may conduct hasty and deliberate attacks in support of friendly forces in close enemy 

contact or against enemy forces out of contact with friendly forces. Attack reconnaissance unit aircrews use 

a standardized check-in brief to contact the supported ground unit. The check-in brief in table 6-2 provides 

the ground unit with key and essential information on the attack weapons team supporting their request. 

Table 6-2. Air to Ground Check-In Brief 

AIRCRAFT TRANSMISSION TO GROUND UNIT

1. Check in call:

“ABLE 6 , THIS IS GUN 52 .”

(Ground Unit) (Aircraft call-sign)

2. Aircraft team composition and location:

“TWO AH-64Es APPROXIMATELY 5 KILOMETERS NORTH OF YOUR POSITION.”

(Composition) (Location)

3. Munitions available:

“WEAPONS LOAD: 30 MILLIMETERS, POINT DETONATING ROCKETS, K2A AND NMODEL HELLFIRES.”

4. Night vision capability and type (if appropriate):

“NIGHT VISION AND FORWARD LOOKING INFRARED CAPABLE.”

5. Station time (if appropriate):

“WE HAVE APPROXIMATELY 120 MINUTES OF PLAY TIME.”

6-41. When the Cavalry troop is in close contact with enemy forces, the ground maneuver commander 

controls the synchronization and integration of aviation maneuver, and the distribution and deconfliction of 

aviation fires. Air ground reconnaissance requires detailed planning; however, it is not always feasible. In 

this case, Cavalry troops use the attack aviation call for fire, a standardized 5-line format for employing attack 

aircraft as depicted in table 6-3, page 6-8. 
Chapter 6 

6-8 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Table 6-3. Attack Aviation Call for Fire 

ATTACK AVIATION CALL FOR FIRE (5-LINE)

1. Observer/Warning Order:

“GUN 52, THIS IS ABLE 6, FIRE MISSION, OVER.”

(Aircraft call-sign) (Observer call-sign)

2. Friendly Location/Mark:

“MY POSITION BUILDING 2, MARKED BY INFRARED STROBE.”

(Target reference point, grid, other information) (Strobe, beacon, infrared strobe, information)

3. Target Location:

“TARGET LOCATION BUILDING 10 (AB 1234 5678) .”

(Bearing [magnetic] and range [meters], target reference point, grid, other information)

4. Target Description/Mark:

“3rd FLOOR WINDOW, MARKED BY TRACER AND INFRARED POINTER.”

(Target description) (Infrared pointer, tracer, other information)

5. Remarks:

“AT MY COMMAND, OVER.”

(Threats, danger close clearance, restriction, at my command, other information)

6-42. Alternatively, Army aviation may conduct attacks against enemy forces out of friendly contact to 

preemptively divert, disrupt, delay, or destroy enemy capabilities before they can be brought to bear on 

friendly forces. While these operations may require more detailed planning and range from relatively lowrisk to extremely high-risk, they may be effective at shaping the enemy force prior to Cavalry troop 

operations. The air mission commander controls the maneuver and fires for these operations. 

RECONNAISSANCE

6-43. Army aviation conducts reconnaissance in a manner similar to the cavalry troop; however, the 

capabilities are inherently different for aviation units. Army aviation attack reconnaissance units are 

specifically equipped, trained, and organized to conduct all forms of reconnaissance except special 

reconnaissance. Assault and general support aviation units can also perform limited reconnaissance missions 

based on mission variables. Regardless of whether reconnaissance is a specified task or not, it is always an 

implied task for every aviation element to gather and report information on enemy and friendly disposition, 

terrain, and civil activities observed during the course of all operations. 

6-44. Effectively employing aviation assets using a combination of manned and unmanned assets, Army 

aviation provides depth to the reconnaissance operation and allows the commander to collect information 

with multiple perspectives at the appropriate time. Ground and air reconnaissance assets may cue each other 

to gain greater detail on a named area of interest. Aviation assets may also compliment the sensors of ground 

reconnaissance forces by mixing systems to increase the probability of collection. 

SECURITY

6-45. Similar to reconnaissance, Army aviation attack reconnaissance units are specifically equipped, 

trained, and organized to conduct security operations; however, the only security task that aviation can 

perform autonomously is the screen. Army aviation conducts screens at all echelons, from elements as small 

as an attack weapons/Scout weapons team using manned-unmanned teaming, up to elements as large as an 

attack reconnaissance battalion or squadron, either independently as a pure aviation maneuver force or as a 

member of the combined arms team. When task-organized to a ground maneuver force with an area, screen, 

guard, or covering force security mission, Army aviation conducts tactical, enabling, and sustaining tasks, 

including screen, attack, reconnaissance, air assault, air movement, aeromedical evacuation, and mission 

command support. 

6-46. Unbound by complex terrain, Army aviation adds depth to the overall security operation for the 

protected force. For example, UAS in the deep area conduct reconnaissance of a NAI to provide early and 
Augmentation 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 6-9 

accurate warning of impending enemy forces to manned assets screening along the forward line of troops. 

The manned assets then gain and maintain enemy contact to provide early and accurate warning to the 

Cavalry troop, or call for fires on the enemy positions. 

AIR ASSAULT

6-47. Army aviation conducts air assaults in support of offensive, defensive, and stability operations 

throughout the depth and breadth of the AO. Aviation assault and heavy lift units transport Cavalry troops 

and their equipment from secure or permissive PZs to unsecure or secure LZs in the objective area. For 

example, Cavalry troops may be air assaulted into the deep area to conduct dismounted reconnaissance, or 

engineer assets can be air assaulted rapidly to conduct a bridge classification. 

AIR AND MISSILE DEFENSE SUPPORT 

6-48. Air and missile defense encompasses passive and active measures. The air and missile defense design 

nullifies and reduces the effectiveness of enemy attack or surveillance by enemy aircraft, UAS, and missiles. 

Air defense measures make the troop a less detectable target, which reduces the possibility of attack. In the 

event of attack, air defense counters the enemy by destroying aircraft or disrupting the attack. 

6-49. The troop has no specified organic air defense assets; however, it can receive air and missile defense 

augmentation from a supporting higher headquarters. Joint doctrine employs Air Force assets to attain air 

superiority and reduce the risk of hostile aircraft engaging friendly ground units. (Refer to ATP 3-01.94 for 

more information.) 

CLOSE AIR SUPPORT 

6-50. Commanders employ close air support to augment supporting fires that attack the enemy day or night 

in a variety of weather conditions. Improvements in tactics, techniques, procedures, and equipment have 

enhanced the ability of aircraft to provide support. The speed, range, and maneuverability of aircraft allow 

them to attack targets that other supporting arms may not be able to engage because of limiting factors such 

as target type, range, terrain, or the ground scheme of maneuver. Ground commanders are the ultimate 

authority for the use of all supporting fires in their respective area of operations. The ground commander at 

the lowest level is responsible for employment of close air support assets unless the higher commander in the 

ground force chain of command specifically retains the responsibility. There are two types of close air support 

requests that a Cavalry may initiate: preplanned and immediate. 

Preplanned Close Air Support Requests 

6-51. The ground commander coordinates preplanned CAS requests according to the air tasking order 

production timeline, which results in the preplanned CAS request appearing as a mission on the air tasking 

order. Normally, this is 48 to 72 hours in advance of the operation. These requests may or may not include 

detailed target information because of the mission’s lead-time. However, these requests include potential 

targets, desired effects, proposed times, and a general priority. 

Immediate Close Air Support Requests 

6-52. Immediate close air support requests are CAS requests not submitted to the air operations center in 

time to have the mission appear on the air tasking order. The window for submitting preplanned requests will 

be theater specific. 

CLOSE AIR SUPPORT CONSIDERATIONS

6-53. Close air support mission success is directly related to thorough mission planning based on—

z Weather.

z Target acquisition.

z Target identification.

z Identification of friendly forces.
Chapter 6 

6-10 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z General ordnance characteristics.

z Final attack heading.

z Suppression of enemy air defense.

z Close air support and artillery integration.

AIRSPACE COORDINATION AREA

6-54. An airspace coordination area provides airspace for the relatively safe travel of aircraft. The 

coordination area also facilitates the simultaneous attack of targets near each other by multiple fire support 

assets. Classification for airspace coordination areas are formal or informal, based on the amount of time 

available and the level of control desired. (Refer to JP 3-09.3 for additional information.) 

Night Close Air Support Operations

6-55. Close air support assets provide night support using GPS- and laser-guided munitions. The two most 

important requirements of a night close air support operation are the same identification of the target, and 

positive marking and identification of friendly unit locations. 

6-56. Flares released from forward air controllers-airborne, other close air support aircraft, or flare ships can 

effectively illuminate target areas. However, artillery- and mortar-fired illumination is preferable as these 

assets provide a longer sustained rate of fire. 

6-57. Commanders rely on their own assets for marking and illumination requirements. Marking of friendly 

unit locations improves safety and provides target area references. Tracers and infrared beacons can serve 

both purposes. 

EXPLOSIVE ORDNANCE DISPOSAL SUPPORT 

6-58. The Cavalry troop may require explosive ordnance disposal support to destroy enemy ammunition and 

equipment, and to ensure that unexploded ordnance is inoperable. Explosive ordnance disposal capabilities 

are not organic to the troop. Higher headquarters requests this augmentation. Process requests for explosive 

ordnance disposal support through squadron operational channels to the BCT, which in turn forwards the 

request to the supporting explosive ordnance disposal headquarters. If there is a constant presence of 

improvised explosive devices and unexploded ordinance hazards, an explosive ordnance disposal team 

attaches to the troop. 

CIVIL AFFAIRS SUPPORT 

6-59. A civil affairs company normally allocates to support a brigade-size element, with a civil affairs team 

being the lowest echelon civil affairs tactical support element provided to a supported commander. The civil 

affairs team would normally conduct operations in a squadron’s area of operation. The civil affairs team 

executes civil affairs operations and can conduct civil engagement with, and civil reconnaissance and 

assessments of, the civil component of the AO. As part of the commander’s civil-military operations, civil 

affairs conduct operations nested within the overall mission and intent. The civil affairs team has the ability 

to leverage operational and strategic-level civil affairs assets and capabilities through reachback to shape 

operations. Civil affairs reachback may include: 

z Civil affairs company civil-military operations center.

z Civil affairs battalion headquarters.

z Civil affairs brigade headquarters.

z Civil-military advisory group.

z USAR 38G military government specialist capabilities.

RELIGIOUS SUPPORT 

6-60. Unit ministry teams and chaplain sections advise commands on the impact of culture and religion in 

the operating environment. Specifically, Cavalry squadrons and BCTs have unit ministry teams attached to 
Augmentation 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 6-11

support planning and operations to Cavalry troops with cultural awareness information, specifically 

information on indigenous religions within the area of operations. Religious support personnel may also 

coordinate for subject matter expert advice from chaplains with advanced training on world religions. 

Chaplains and religious affairs specialists also provide ethical and moral advisement on operational matters 

ranging from direct confidential ethical advice to unit leaders on ethical problems, to broader advisement 

provided in the ordinary course of staff operational planning and working group participation. The support 

of unit ministry teams may be particularly helpful in stability operations by identifying protection for key 

religious personnel and facilities, protecting vulnerable population elements such as dislocated civilians, and 

in planning and preparing liaison mission support to engage local indigenous leaders. 

MILITARY INFORMATION SUPPORT OPERATIONS 

6-61. The current military information support operations rules of allocation allow for the attachment of a 

tactical detachment to brigade-size units. However, in contingency operations, major combat operations, and 

other extraordinary situations, an entire tactical company with organic audio, visual, and audio-visual 

development personnel and equipment may attach depending on operational necessity and authorization. The 

commander directs and leads military information support operations as an integral part of all operations. 

The commander employs military information support operations forces to shape the area of operation and 

to set the conditions for success at the tactical level. In addition, the commander uses military information 

support operations to inform and influence target groups and individuals in decisive action. 

6-62. When properly employed, military information support operations forces can save the lives of friendly 

people, whether military or civilian, while degrading the enemy’s morale, efficiency, and willingness to fight. 

Military information support operations discourage aggressive actions by creating dissidence and disaffection 

within enemy and adversary ranks, ultimately inducing desertion, malingering, in-fighting, and surrender. 

For more information on allocation and capabilities. (Refer to FM 3-53 and ATP 3-53.2.) 
This page intentionally left blank. 
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 7-1 

Chapter 7 

Sustainment 

Cavalry squadrons frequently operate in locations distant from their organic sustaining 

base. They often carry a configured load or are task-organized with assets necessary to

ensure their sustainment until they can be relieved.

Sustainment of a Cavalry troop is critical to the squadron’s mission success. The 

sections in this chapter discuss the basics of sustainment, sustainment planning, 

organization, logistical package operations, troop resupply operations, maintenance, 

and field services in addition to the Army Health System and personnel service support 

available to the troop commander.

SECTION I – BASICS OF SUSTAINMENT 

7-1. The troop’s ability to continue its mission for extended periods depends on the squadron’s ability to 

obtain, transport, and distribute resources such as fuel, ammunition, replacement personnel, and rations. 

Likewise, the troop develops rapid and dependable ways to treat and evacuate wounded Soldiers and repair 

combat equipment to sustain troop morale, combat power, and the readiness to fight. The troop’s sustainment 

capabilities allow for quicker deployability and the reduction of the support footprint in the squadron 

operations and brigade combat team support area. Despite advances in sustainment, mission command, and 

situation awareness that facilitates support of the troop’s sustainment assets, supporting wide-ranging and 

decentralized operations remains a challenge. The responsibility to sustain the troop properly rests with the 

commander. The troop XO and 1SG share responsibility for sustainment activities to support all troop 

operations. 

SUSTAINMENT FUNCTIONS

7-2. Sustainment involves the interrelated functions of conducting logistics, providing personnel services, 

and providing health service support. Logistics determines the depth and duration of troop operations and is 

essential to retaining and exploiting the initiative. (Refer to ADRP 3-0.) Logistics includes—

z Maintenance.

z Transportation.

z Supply.

z Field services.

z Distribution.

z Operational contract support.

z General engineering support.

7-3. Personnel services include—

z Human resources support.

z Financial management.

z Legal support.

z Religious support.

z Band support.
Chapter 7 

7-2 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

7-4. Army Medical Department functions include—

z Organic and area medical support.

z Hospitalization (including treatment of chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear patients).

z Dental treatment.

z Behavioral health and neuropsychiatric treatment.

z Clinical laboratory services.

z Medical evacuation (including en route care and medical regulating).

z Medical logistics (including blood and blood products)

SUPPLY CLASSES

7-5. Supply classes fall into categories for management and planning. (See table 7-1.) 

Table 7-1. Supply Classes 

SUPPLY CLASS DEFINITION

I Subsistence, water, and gratuitous health and comfort items.

II Clothing, individual equipment, tentage, organizational tool sets and kits, hand 

tools, unclassified maps, administrative and housekeeping supplies 

and equipment, and chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN)

equipment.

III Petroleum (bulk and packaged), oils, and lubricants.

IV Construction fortification and barrier materiel.

V Ammunition.

VI Personal demand items normally sold through exchanges.

VII Major end items.

VIII Medical materiel, including repair parts peculiar to medical equipment.

IX Repair parts and components.

X Materiel to support nonmilitary programs.

TROOP SUSTAINMENT PERSONNEL

7-6. Troop sustainment requires planning and oversight from several key leadership positions. The 

minimum duties and responsibilities by position are below. 

Commander 

7-7. The troop commander plans, prepares, and executes its portion of the squadron sustainment plan and 

ensures the troop sustainment operations meet the tactical plan. Concurrent with other planning, the company 

develops its sustainment plan during the mission analysis, and refines it in the war-gaming portion of the 

troop-leading process. Routinely conduct troop rehearsals to ensure the support and services do not affect 

reconnaissance and security tasks. 

Executive Officer 

7-8. The XO is the troop’s primary sustainment planner and coordinator, reporting directly to the 

commander. During preparations for the mission, the XO works closely with the 1SG to determine specific 

support requirements of the tactical plan. The XO performs the following sustainment functions: 

z Assists the troop commander in developing sustainment priorities and guidance according to the

squadron’s concept of support, and enforces those priorities.

z Determines the location of the troop’s resupply point based on analysis during operational

planning.
Sustainment 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 7-3 

z Compiles reports from subordinate elements and completes the troop Logistics Status Reports

(LOGSTAT) to submit to the squadron S-4 daily, but may require reports that are more frequent

during periods of increased intensity.

z Leads the company sustainment rehearsal in cooperation with the company 1SG.

z Determines resupply method according to METT-TC

z Determines requirements for all classes of supply during operation

z Prepares paragraph 4 and sustainment appendix of the troop OPORD

FIRST SERGEANT

7-9. The 1SG is the troop’s primary sustainment operator. The 1SG executes the troop’s logistical plan, 

relying heavily on troop and squadron SOPs, and directly supervises and controls the troop trains. The 1SG 

also performs these sustainment functions: 

z Leads sustainment rehearsals with the executive officer and integrates sustainment into the troop’s

maneuver rehearsals

z Directs and supervises casualty evacuation, ensuring medical assets remain flexible and

responsive to tactical missions.

z Directs and supervises the collection, initial identification, and evacuation of human remains to

the casualty collection point for further transfer to the mortuary affairs collection point.

z Establishes and organizes the troop’s resupply point.

z Meets the logistics package at the logistics release point; guides it to the troop’s resupply point;

supervises resupply operations there; and if necessary, guides the logistics package to its

subsequent destination.

z Tracks changes in expenditure rates, Class I and Class V and gives to troop XO for further

reporting to squadron S-4 via LOGSTAT.

z Supervises evacuation of detainees and damaged equipment.

z Coordinates and synchronizes human resources support with the squadron S-1, including

personnel accountability reports, casualty reports, replacement operations, personnel readiness

management, mail operations, essential personnel services, and other administrative or personnel

requirements.

z Provides the troop an orientation for new personnel and in consultation with the commander,

assigns replacements to the troop’s subordinate elements.

z Maintains the troop battle roster.

SUPPLY SERGEANT

7-10. The supply sergeant is the troop’s representative in the squadron’s field trains. The supply sergeant 

assembles the logistics packages (LOGPACs) and moves forward with the LOGPACs to the troop. The 

supply sergeants also performs the following sustainment functions: 

z Responsible for organizing the troop LOGPACs in the field trains.

z Assists the troop XO in determining requirements based on the troop's consumption of food; water;

ammunition; petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL); and batteries: based on the operation.

z Coordinates with the battalion S-4 for resupply of the troop.

z Receives and evacuates human remains to the mortuary affairs collection point in the brigade

support area.

z Maintains and provides supplies for troop field sanitation activities.

z Transports, guards, or transfers detainees, as required.

z Coordinates with the squadron S-1 section to turn in or pick up mail and personnel action

documents.

z Picks up replacement personnel and delivers them to the first sergeant, as necessary.

z Manages the commander’s property book and prepares financial liability investigations of

property loss.
Chapter 7 

7-4 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

PLATOON SERGEANT

7-11. The platoon sergeant performs the following sustainment functions:

z Ensures Soldiers perform maintenance on all assigned equipment.

z Compiles and submits LOGSTAT for the platoon as directed, according to the troop SOP.

z Obtains supplies and mail from the supply sergeant and ensures proper distribution

within the platoon.

SECTION II – SUSTAINMENT PLANNING 

7-12. Sustaining Cavalry assets before, during, and after their commitment is a vital part of maintaining 

reconnaissance capabilities. The methods employed to sustain those assets are situationally dependent 

because a commander’s methods of deploying Cavalry assets depends on the mission variables of METT-TC. 

The commander addresses METT-TC as part of the planning process for each Cavalry operation. (Refer to 

ATP 3-20.96.) 

SUSTAINING RECONNAISSANCE OPERATIONS 

7-13. The overriding consideration in sustaining reconnaissance is maintaining the operation’s momentum. 

The availability of adequate supplies and transportation to sustain the operation becomes more critical as the 

operation progresses. The XO and 1SG work closely with the S-4 in the planning process to ensure that 

sustainment capabilities meet the demands of reconnaissance. 

7-14. Planning reconnaissance operations includes—

z Considering the use of blivets for fuel and water and caching for other classes of supply.

z Ensuring units deploy with basic loads and meet replenishment requirements.

z Planning for increased consumption of petroleum, oils, and lubricants.

z Planning for recovery of damaged vehicles to the maintenance collection point.

z Using push packages of preplanned and preconfigured essential sustainment items.

z Planning for increased vehicular maintenance.

z Requesting additional sustainment assets from the squadron to support attachments or extended

operations.

z Planning for aerial resupply.

z Planning and coordinating detainee operations.

z Longer transportation and turnaround times.

z Trains and convoy security.

z Planning for increased use of medical assets, including—

 Casualty evacuation from discrete operations remotely located, extended distances across the

line of departure.

 Use of casualty collection points and ambulance exchange points.

 Augmentation of medical treatment elements.

SUSTAINING SECURITY OPERATIONS 

7-15. As with reconnaissance, emphasis on any consideration varies with the mission assigned and shifts 

during mission execution. Planning for security operations includes—

z Planning for increased use of class IV and class V.

z Requesting additional sustainment assets from squadron for attachments.

z Continuing routine resupply according to SOP.

z Resupplying during limited visibility to reduce the chance of enemy contact.

z Preparing to conduct immediate resupply.

z Planning for alternate means of evacuation for casualties.
Sustainment 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 7-5 

z Emphasizing recovery and evacuation of equipment over forward repair.

z Planning for trains and convoy security.

SUSTAINMENT PLANNING REQUIREMENTS 

7-16. The XO is the primary sustainment planner at troop level with input from the 1SG. The 1SG is the 

primary executor of sustainment operations at the troop. Additionally both work together for cohesion, and 

to reduce friction. Supply is essential for enhancing Soldier’s quality of life and providing prolong endurance 

of support of decisive action. Supply provides the material and life support that gives the troop the combat 

power and prolonged endurance to accomplish the mission. (FM 4 -95.) Significant to sustainment planning 

is that reconnaissance and security forces often require a basic load in excess of the typical three days of 

supply configuration due to mission requirements. Listed after the class of supply in parenthesis is the troop 

position with primary planning responsibility. Troop leaders should consider the following information when 

planning requirements for the classes of supply and maintenance. 

Class I (XO and 1SG) 

7-17. The troop supply sergeant typically delivers the loads via logistics packages (LOGPACs) from the 

brigade support area to the squadron combat trains where the supply sergeant links up with the troop 1SG or 

representative. The executive officer will plan when the LOGPAC arrives based on METT-TC and discuss 

during the troop rehearsal. Generally, the unit basic load for each Soldier is nine meals ready to eat. The XO 

should work with the squadron S-4 to obtain the ration and issue cycle and the LOGPAC schedule for 

resupply. For water, the XO calculates water requirements based on gallons per Soldier per day. Refer to 

ATP 4-44 for the water planning factor tables. The XO adjusts the standard planning factor based on unique 

conditions associated with a given operation. The supply sergeant should plan for retrograde of waste from 

the troop during resupply operations. 

Class II (XO) 

7-18. The troop XO in conjunction with the supply sergeant determines class II requirements. The 1SG 

ensures troops deploy with limited stocks of class II items. The troop supply sergeant can request additional 

class II supplies through the squadron S-4. For example, the XO and supply sergeant should consider 

chemical lights for night operations (marking breech lanes at night) and engineer tape (marking helicopter 

LZs, or platoon areas during quartering party operations). 

Class III (XO) 

7-19. The XO plans class III requirements for the troop and should generate consumption fuel estimates 

based on historical data. How the troop receives fuel is dependent on the troop SOP, the operating 

environment, and the higher headquarters plan for class III distribution. It is imperative that platoon sergeants 

anticipate requirements and submit refuel requests to the XO in a timely manner. The XO monitors reports 

by subordinates during operations, and submit daily LOGSTATs to the squadron S-4 to ensure accurate 

resupply operations. 

Class IV (XO or Supply Sergeant) 

7-20. There is usually little to no requirement for the troop to have class IV on hand. If assigned the following 

tasks, the supply sergeant with oversight from the XO should determine requirements and coordinate with 

the squadron S-4 to obtain the class IV package: 

z Blocking passes.

z Conducting traffic control post operations.

z Detention holding areas.

z Security operations.
Chapter 7 

7-6 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Class V (XO with Input from the 1SG) 

7-21. The troop deploys with a combat load of munitions. Operational requirements initiate class V 

sustainment and requirement drives the forecasting process. The troop XO needs to know the current 

ammunition requirement, ammunition basic load, and troop on hand balance when submitting the LOGSTAT 

report. The XO coordinates with the squadron S-4 to ensure the distribution concept for class V includes the 

capability to distribute rapidly preconfigured ammunitions packages and loads. The XO tracks the frequency 

of LOGPACS of munition supply and knows the primary and alternate resupply plan. 

Class VI (1SG) 

7-22. Troops normally deploy with required minimum health and comfort items. If an operation is longer 

than 30 days, health and comfort packs are available through the supply system that provide everyday 

necessities. Leaders should include class VI into the packing list and include in precombat checks and 

precombat inspections. 

Class VII (XO) 

7-23. Command levels manage and control class VII major end items. The troop XO is the subject matter 

expert on what major components are fully mission capable, tracks the operational readiness rate, and reports 

to the squadron S-4. 

Class VIII (Medics or Suppy Sergeant with Oversight from the XO and 1SG) 

7-24. Class VIII includes all medical supplies on hand at the troop. Prior to any operation, the supply sergeant 

(with assistance from medical personnel) should check all medical supplies in the combat lifesaver bag for 

expiration. The troop supply sergeant with oversight from the XO or 1SG requests replacement and resupply 

through the squadron medical platoon. 

Class IX and Maintenance Support (XO) 

7-25. The commander establishes maintenance priorities based on what systems are critical to the success of 

the operations. The link between the troop and the maintenance support is a trained operator/crew who can 

properly use and maintain equipment. The continued demand for equipment requires that the operator and 

crew perform preventive maintenance checks and services. The XO compiles the troop DA Forms 5988-E, 

(Equipment Maintenance and Inspection Worksheet) from the platoon leader, platoon sergeants, and 

maintenance team chief and informs the commander. Generally, the XO sends the worksheets to the 

appropriate maintenance section for verification and repair via the LOGPAC. 

SUPPORTING ATTACHMENTS AND DETACHMENTS 

7-26. Commanders plan for and coordinate for the sustainment of attachments and detachments prior to 

execution for each mission. The following paragraphs discuss techniques that the troop commander uses in 

the sustainment planning. 

ATTACHMENTS

7-27. The augmentation consists of maintenance, recovery, and supply support for classes III, V, and IX, 

normally. The troop attaches the necessary sustainment augmentation when a supporting element attaches to 

the troop. An SOP to establish this augmentation should be coordinated in advance. Additional sustainment 

assets can attach to squadron sustainment elements or attach directly to the troop. 

7-28. Leaders receive basic information to anticipate support requirements when receiving attachments. 

Planning considerations include—

z Number and type of vehicles, personnel, and weapon systems.

z Current status and strength.

z When attachment is effective and for how long.
Sustainment 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 7-7 

z Sustainment assets that accompany the attachment.

z When and where linkup will occur and who is responsible.

DETACHMENTS

7-29. The squadron detaches Cavalry troops for certain missions, if the situation requires. Use the same 

considerations that apply to receiving attachments. The troop deploys with the appropriate level of support, 

including maintenance, based on how long the troop detaches. The commander pays particular consideration 

to class III and V resupply, and medical, which also applies when the troop operates at a considerable distance 

from squadron sustainment assets. The squadron S-4 sends the following information to the receiving unit’s 

S-4 when the troop detaches to another unit: 

z Number and type of vehicles, personnel, and weapon systems.

z When and where linkup will occur, and who is responsible for linkup.

z Current status and strength.

z When attachment is effective and for how long.

SUSTAINMENT COMMUNICATIONS 

7-30. The combat trains’ command post is the net control station for the squadron administrative and logistics 

net. All sustainment leaders and sites operate on the administrative and logistics net to respond to 

requests and coordinate sustainment execution. The troop XO and 1SG use this net to submit sustainment

reports and requests for support. The administrative and logistics net is used to control movement of 

sustainment assets during logistics package displacement and movement until the LOGPACs release to 1SGs 

at logistics release points. 

SUSTAINMENT REPORTING 

7-31. Accurate logistics status reporting of the troop’s sustainment status is essential to keep the troop 

combat ready. Standard operating procedures establish report formats, reporting times, and radio voice 

brevity codes to keep sustainment nets manageable. The troop commander sends detailed information to the 

supporting sustainment element and the higher tactical command post. The troop commander sends detailed 

radio voice reports to the supporting sustainment element, and at the same time, gives a summarized status 

in each general category to the higher tactical command post using a brevity code. Limit routine reports to a 

summary of items changing during the reporting period. The troop commander submits immediate reports as 

necessary. (Refer to appendix A for more information.) 

7-32. The commander knows the sustainment status of the troop at all times. The command post tracks the 

status of subordinate elements by a code, which allows the commander to use the percentage of combat 

power, fuel, ammunition, and personnel available to assess the troop’s combat capability quickly. For 

example, the troop may assign the following code words: 

z GREEN for 90 to 100 percent.

z AMBER for 80 to 89 percent.

z RED for 60 to 79 percent.

z BLACK for less than 60 percent.

SECTION III – LOGISTICS PACKAGE OPERATIONS 

7-33. A LOGPAC is a grouping of multiple classes of supplies and supply vehicles under the control of a 

single convoy commander. Tactical grouping of sustainment elements accommodates METT-TC, but 

adheres to some fundamental tenets that are suitable for inclusion in SOPs. 

TROOP TRAINS 

7-34. The trains provide sustainment during operations. Trains can collocate with the command post or 

operate separately under the control of the 1SG. Usually, troop trains locate at least 2000 meters away from 
Chapter 7 

7-8 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

the troop’s combat operations. The troop trains are out of the enemy’s direct fire range if at least one terrain 

feature separates it and the enemy. The troop trains can consolidate with the squadron trains if locations and 

distances allow for colocation alleviating stress on the troop’s limited sustainment assets.

7-35. The supply sergeant and armorer usually locate in the squadron field trains. Generally, the troop trains 

in the ABCT and the IBCT include a maintenance support team from the forward support company, with 

capabilities for maintenance, recovery, and limited combat spares. Troop trains in the Cavalry squadron of 

the BFSB may include a field maintenance team, if the mission requires direct maintenance support. 

SUPPLY ROUTES 

7-36. Main supply route is the route or routes designated within an operational area upon which the bulk of 

traffic flows in support of military operations (JP 4-01.5). The commander plans alternate supply routes in 

the event that the enemy interdicts the main supply route or it becomes too congested. Alternate supply routes 

must meet the same criteria as the main supply route. In the event of CBRN contamination, designate either 

supply route as the dirty main supply route to handle contaminated traffic. Security of supply routes in a 

noncontiguous area of operation may dictate that the troop provide security for sustainment convoys and 

other sustainment elements, such as caches. 

LOGISTICS PACKAGE PLANNING 

7-37. The headquarters and headquarters troop 1SG is responsible for ensuring that the LOGPAC reaches 

the logistics release point. The logistics release point is the point along the supply route where the Cavalry 

troop 1SG takes control of the troop LOGPAC. Likely areas for logistics release points are near main supply 

routes, at crossroads, or close to water (lakes, ponds, and reservoirs). In some situations, the mission variables 

of METT-TC may require placement of the logistics release point in a less conspicuous location. In all cases, 

logistics release point sites must be secure. The use of logistics release points controls the movement of assets 

and specifies which functions will occur at the checkpoint. Movement of sustainment assets is primarily 

based on the three methods listed below: 

z On order.

z Triggered by events (such as a troop going RED on class V).

z Triggered by distance between sustainment assets and the supported elements.

LOGISTICS PACKAGE RESUPPLY 

7-38. The troop XO or 1SG submits the LOGSTAT to the squadron S-4. The S-4 coordinates and ensures 

that LOGPACs contain requested or required supplies. Additionally, the S-4 determines which logistics 

release points best support the operation and notifies all units. Logistics packages normally operate every 24 

to 72 hours for routine resupply. The S-4 remains prepared to organize unscheduled LOGPACs to provide 

immediate resupply. 

ORGANIZATION

7-39. The troop supply sergeant is responsible for organizing the troop LOGPAC in the field trains. The 

troop LOGPAC normally consists of the following:

z Troop supply truck, which brings replacements, incoming mail, and the troop water trailer.

z Class I rations.

z Bulk fuel and packaged petroleum, oil, and lubricant products (class III).

z Class V, including demolitions and mines.

 Squadron SOPs usually establish a standard LOGPAC load of munitions.

 S-4s use reports from the XO or 1SG to adjust the standard load.

z Additional trucks as necessary, to carry other classes of supply that the troop requests.

z Class IX parts or other requested maintenance items.
Sustainment 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 7-9 

MOVEMENT AND CONTROL

7-40. Once the squadron LOGPAC is operational, the headquarters and headquarters troop 1SG moves it 

forward to the logistics release point. At the logistics release point, Cavalry troop 1SGs, or their 

representatives, assume control of the troop LOGPACs. The S-4, or a combat trains command post 

representative, should be present at the logistics release point to monitor the operation, coordinate with troop 

1SGs, receive hard-copy logistics reports, and deliver sustainment situation updates. The squadron identifies 

LOGPAC turnaround times in the SOP. Upon completion of resupply operations, the troops return the 

LOGPAC vehicles to the logistics release point. The headquarters and headquarters troop 1SG forms the 

vehicles into a convoy for movement back to the field trains. 

LOGISTICS PACKAGE SURVIVABILITY 

7-41. Convoys must take all the necessary measures to avoid an ambush during combat situations. These are 

generally passive measures, supplemented by active measures, taken to defeat or escape from an ambush. 

7-42. No single defensive measure, or combination of measures, can prevent or effectively counter all 

ambushes or IED detonations. The effectiveness of counterambush measures directly relates to the state of 

Soldiers’ training and the ability of their leaders.

AVOIDING AN AMBUSH

7-43. Troops must take the following actions to avoid an ambush (using the intelligence preparation of the 

battlefield process and products): 

z Select the best convoy route

z Maintain vigilant observation of the route ahead of the convoy to detect anything suspicious.

z Conduct map (digital) reconnaissance.

z Conduct ground reconnaissance.

z Conduct aerial reconnaissance.

z Obtain current intelligence information.

z Use operations security to deny the enemy foreknowledge of the convoy.

z Present a formidable target.

z Never routinely schedule convoys by time or route.

REDUCING THE EFFECTIVENESS OF AN AMBUSH

7-44. Take the following actions to reduce the effectiveness of an ambush: 

z Harden vehicles.

z Cover loads.

z Space prime targets throughout the convoy.

z Wear protective equipment.

z Use assistant drivers.

z Carry troops and supplies.

z Use prearranged signals to warn the convoy of an ambush or IED.

z Coordinate for escort vehicles (using a combination of overwatch and 360-degree local security

based on the mission variables of METT-TC).

z Coordinate for reaction force support.

z Maintain the interval between vehicles.

z Thoroughly brief and rehearse all convoy personnel on immediate action drills.

z Move through the kill zone, if possible.

z Stop short of the kill zone or IED.

z Do not block the road.

z Rapidly respond to orders.
Chapter 7 

7-10 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Aggressively return fire.

z Counterattack with escort vehicles.

z Call for fire support.

z Call for the reaction force.

SECTION IV – TROOP RESUPPLY OPERATIONS 

7-45. The commander uses standardized procedures to rearm, refuel, and refit the troop as quickly and 

efficiently as possible to sustain its continuity of effort. The troop has a limited amount of time to conduct 

sustainment if operating at extended distances from the squadron field trains location in the BCT support 

area. Class I (subsistence and water), class III (bulk fuel), and class V (ammunition) take priority. Resupply 

techniques vary based on the mission variables of METT-TC. Resupply techniques rely on coordination of 

the troop headquarters-elements and the resupplying element. Nonstandard elements may resupply the troops 

based on proximity and availability, but may not be from their supported squadron. 

7-46. The squadron staff conducts detailed planning and coordination for combat resupply of the troops 

operating in their BCTs forward security area. The troop carries a three-day supply forward. The squadron 

plans to extract the troop prior to the troop depleting the three-day supply and conducts resupply of the troop 

in its assembly area. When this is not feasible, the troop XO and 1SG, along with the squadron staff, plan 

and coordinate for ground infiltration or aerial insertion of resupply items to designated drop-off points or 

cache points. 

7-47. A troop conducts routine resupply activities in its assembly area or at a location behind its positions. 

These resupply activities take place when the troop is not in contact with enemy forces. They also take place 

when the troop commander decides the risk of not conducting resupply outweighs the risk of interrupting the 

troop’s ongoing operations. 

RESUPPLY SITE SELECTION 

7-48. The 1SG carefully chooses the logistics release point site to provide responsive support for the troop, 

to support the movement of wheeled resupply vehicles, and to limit exposure to enemy fires. The 1SG knows 

about the current tactical situation and can determine what the troop will be doing when resupply takes place. 

The 1SG selects the exact LOGPAC site based on map and ground reconnaissance. The 1SG ensures the 

LOGPAC site meets the following criteria: 

z Cover and concealment.

z Reduction of thermal signature.

z Enough room to disperse the vehicles.

z Terrain level enough to allow refueling.

z Proximity to the platoon positions (which is three to eight kilometers behind the forward line of

own troops and the center of the area of operation).

z Road or trail network to support the wheeled resupply vehicles and heaviest troop vehicles.

z Road or trail network that allows one-way traffic flow to the LOGPAC.

RESUPPLY METHODS

7-49. The tailgate method or service station method are two basic methods used during resupply operations. 

A troop or platoon may perform either method depending on dispersion of the elements. The troop may 

conduct resupply using a combination of tailgate and service station methods. The troop can vary the specifics 

of the two basic methods or it can use them in combination. During a screen mission, for example, it could 

use the tailgate method for its most forward observation posts and the service station method for its 

observation posts in-depth. Other resupply methods used in specific situations are aerial resupply, troop 

prestock resupply (pre-positioning and cache), and emergency resupply. 
Sustainment 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 7-11

TAILGATE METHOD

7-50. The troop uses the tailgate method in static positions such as assembly areas. Class III and class V

supply vehicles, and other bulk-issue vehicles move from vehicle to vehicle to conduct resupply. The rest of 

the sustainment vehicles are centrally located in the troop area. The reconnaissance vehicles require little or 

no movement. Personnel move to a centralized location to receive additional supplies. The tailgate method

provides 360-degree security throughout the resupply operation. On the other hand, it is very time-consuming 

and requires an adequate road network for the wheeled supply vehicles to reach each troop vehicle. The 

following procedures take place during tailgate resupply. 

7-51. During tailgate resupply, reconnaissance vehicles remain in place while petroleum, oils, lubricants, 

and ammunition trucks travel in a clockwise direction around the assembly area to each vehicle position and 

conduct resupply. Crewmembers rotate through the feeding area and pick up supplies, water, and mail. 

Soldiers maintain security throughout the rotation process. First sergeant and platoon sergeants arrange for 

the evacuation of the remains of Soldiers killed in action and their personal effects. They transfer the remains 

and personal effects to a mortuary affairs collection point. Ambulances pick up, treat, and evacuate seriously 

wounded in action Soldiers. Casualties with less serious wounds report to the ambulance for emergency 

medical treatment and disposition. Soldiers either return to duty or evacuate for further treatment. Soldiers 

consolidate and secure detainees. Soldiers transport enemy prisoners of war to the squadron trains on a 

returning supply vehicle as soon as possible. Troop armorers, radio repairmen, and supporting maintenance 

personnel perform repairs of known problems and spot-check other vehicles. Soldiers repair vehicles needing 

maintenance on site or evacuate them to a maintenance collection point. First sergeants and platoon sergeants 

closely monitor the resupply operation. Empty LOGPAC vehicles move to a holding area where they are 

loaded with killed in action, enemy prisoners, and inoperative equipment. The supply sergeant moves the 

LOGPAC back to a logistics release point. The supply sergeant links up and transfers the LOGPAC to the 

support platoon leader, then returns to the field trains. Troops may be required to provide an element to 

conduct convoy security to ensure the safe return of the LOGPAC to the brigade support area and the 

retrograde storage area. 

7-52. The tailgate method is the least preferred resupply method because of limited assets in the squadron 

and the amount of time required to execute. The tailgate method occurs only if it allows for faster resupply 

than the service station method or for better operations security. 

SERVICE STATION METHOD

7-53. The commander employs the service station method during tactical operations that preclude the troop 

from establishing an assembly area for the resupply. The service station method is most effective when the 

troop is in an area of operation no more than three to five kilometers wide. Individual platoons or sections 

resupply at the LOGPAC while the rest of the troop stays in position. The 1SG sets up the LOGPAC. Soldiers 

from the trains who are not involved in the resupply and platoon vehicles that resupplied or are awaiting 

resupply provide LOGPAC security. (See figure 7-1, page 7-12.)

7-54. The service station method begins with the vehicles of the first platoon or section entering the 

LOGPAC at a designated location and following a one-way traffic flow. Vehicles carrying killed in action 

remain pouches move to the mortuary affairs holding area, out of view of the troop, and transfer the remains 

and personal effects at the casualty collection point. Vehicles take Soldiers needing medical attention to the 

combat medics who treat them or prepare them for evacuation. Platoon sergeants supervise the operation and 

conduct face-to-face coordination with 1SGs for any special requirements while platoon leaders make contact 

with the troop commander face-to-face or by radio for orders and situation reports (SITREPs). Crews 

requiring maintenance support move to a designated maintenance holding area for on-site repair. When 

vehicles rotate through stations with maintenance personnel, armorers and radio repairmen repair known 

problems and spot-check other vehicles. Crews then rotate to the supply truck to pick up mail, supplies, and 

class I items. Finally, platoon leaders and platoon sergeants conduct precombat inspections and the platoon 

or section moves to its designated position once resupply is completed. Platoons remaining rotate individually 

through the LOGPAC for resupply. The troop LOGPAC returns to the logistics release point after the 

resupply operation. The troop LOGPAC links up with the combat or field trains representative who led the 

LOGPAC forward. The troop LOGPAC returns to the brigade support area and the retrograde storage area. 
Chapter 7 

7-12 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure 7-1. Troop Service Station Resupply 

AERIAL RESUPPLY

7-55. Aerial resupply is a vital link in the distribution system, providing the capability to supply the troop 

even with disrupted ground lines of communication or the terrain is too hostile. Helicopters are a vital lifeline 

when Cavalry troops operate forward of friendly lines for extended periods. Aerial resupply provides the 

troop freedom of movement by drastically reducing their dependence on surface logistical support its

flexibility and effectiveness make it a responsive asset to use; however, they require significant planning and 
Sustainment 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 7-13

entail consideration of a different set of risks. Aerial assets are useful in resupplying dismounted Cavalry 

troops in observation posts in restricted terrain. In addition, the signature of resupply helicopters can 

compromise troop positions. Careful choice of resupply routes and landing zones minimize this risk. 

TROOP PRESTOCK (PRE-POSITIONING AND CACHE) 

7-56. The two methods of prestock resupply differ in the level of security provided for the supplies. With 

pre-positioning, supplies are unattended, although leaders take steps to prevent enemy elements from locating

the supplies. Security personnel guard the site when the unit resupplies by cache. 

7-57. Both pre-positioning and cache occur in a variety of reconnaissance and security operations. Advance 

elements can prestock positions along the intended route of advance or near the objective during 

reconnaissance. Cavalry elements can set up prestock points throughout the area of operation in security 

operations. These points can be in alternate or supplementary observation posts in addition to other locations 

throughout the depth of the area of operation. Scouts also use prestock to provide resupply for patrols. 

7-58. Leaders carefully plan and execute prestock operations at every level. Leaders place prestock points in 

easy to find locations for someone who has never visited the site. All leaders, down to vehicle commander 

and squad leader, know the exact locations of prestock points. As noted, the troop sustainment team takes 

steps to ensure security and survivability of pre-positioned supplies by digging in prestock positions, 

selecting covered and concealed positions, and considering the effects of weather, terrain, and wildlife. The 

sustainment team also develops plans to remove or destroy prestock supplies to prevent the enemy from 

capturing them. 

EMERGENCY RESUPPLY

7-59. Emergency resupply, commonly referred to as immediate resupply, normally involves fuel and 

ammunition while in contact with the enemy. The resupply begins at the section and platoon level by 

redistributing ammunition between vehicles to cross-level loads. The platoon sergeant reports the need for 

emergency resupply to the 1SG who relays the request to the squadron S-4. The unit’s combat trains maintain 

a small load of class III and V for these situations. The S-4 coordinates a linkup between the combat trains 

and the troop 1SG. The 1SG meets the resupply trucks and moves back to the troop area of operation. The 

1SG and troop XO choose a resupply point that is just behind the troop position and masked by terrain from 

enemy direct fire and observation. The fuel truck moves to the resupply point, and vehicles or sections rotate 

through the resupply point to refuel. Emergency resupply should occur only when the troop expends fuel and 

ammunition at a rate greater than expected; it is not a routine solution for failures in sustainment planning 

and execution. 

SECTION V – MAINTENANCE 

7-60. The Army has two levels of maintenance: field maintenance and sustainment maintenance. Field 

maintenance is on-system maintenance, and mainly involves preventive maintenance and replacement of 

defective parts. Field maintenance includes maintenance actions performed by operators and always returns 

repaired equipment to the troop. Sustainment maintenance consists of off-system component repair or end 

item repair and return to the supply system. 

FIELD MAINTENANCE 

7-61. Within the squadron, field-level maintainers are concentrated in the fire support cell. Generally, the 

ABCT, SBCT, and IBCT include a field maintenance team from the FSC with capabilities for field 

maintenance, recovery, and limited combat spares. The Cavalry squadron of the BFSB may include a field 

maintenance team if the mission requires direct maintenance support. The FSC provides replenishment of 

class IX to perform field level maintenance on all equipment to include small arms and communication 

equipment. The FSC sends the field maintenance teams forward to support the troop as close to the battle as 

possible. When standard maintenance repairs are not practical, the troop (in coordination with the field 

maintenance team) may apply battle damage repairs following the battle damage assessment and repair 

process. 
Chapter 7 

7-14 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

RECOVERY 

7-62. The first level of recovery for the troop is self-recovery. The operator and crew use the basic issue 

items and additional authorized lists or on-vehicle equipment items to perform self-recovery. If self-recovery 

fails, use like recovery. The troop will use another piece of equipment “of the same weight class or heavier” 

to recover the damaged equipment using tow bars, chains, or tow cables. When self-recovery and likerecovery fail, use the FSC dedicated recovery assets. 

7-63. The troop should plan for recovery operations and include the recovery plan in the sustainment 

rehearsal. Use the maintenance time guidelines established by the troop commander to make a repair-orrecovery decision. The type of recovery method used is METT-TC dependent and it is important for the troop 

to know the location of the maintenance collection point. 

BATTLE DAMAGE ASSESSMENT AND REPAIR 

7-64. Battle damage and assessment is the procedure used to return disabled equipment rapidly to the 

operational commander by field-expedient repair of components. Troop commanders should address battle 

damage assessment in the sustainment section of their operation order. (For more information, refer to 

ATP 4-31.) 

MAINTENANCE COLLECTION POINT 

7-65. If the field maintenance team cannot repair the equipment quickly on site, evacuate the component to 

the squadron’s maintenance collection point where FSC maintainers will repair. Evacuate unrepairable 

components to the squadron field trains generally located in the brigade support area. 

SECTION VI – MEDICAL SUPPORT 

TREATMENT BY NONMEDICAL PERSONNEL

7-66. Nonmedical personnel performing first-aid procedures assist the combat medic in their duties. An 

individual administers first aid (self-aid and buddy aid) with enhanced first aid from the combat lifesaver. 

Combat lifesavers and buddy aid are crucial to sustaining medical care for wounded or injured Soldiers. 

Self-Aid and Buddy Aid 

7-67. Each individual Soldier must be proficient in a variety of first-aid procedures. These procedures 

include aid for chemical casualties with an emphasis on lifesaving tasks, which enables the Soldier or a buddy 

to apply first aid to alleviate a life-threatening situation. 

Combat Lifesaver 

7-68. The combat lifesaver is a nonmedical Soldier selected by the unit commander for additional training 

beyond basic first-aid procedures. Usually a minimum of one individual per squad, crew, team, or equivalentsize unit is a combat lifesaver. The primary duty of this individual does not change. The combat lifesaver’s 

additional duty is to provide enhanced first aid before the combat medic arrives. The combat lifesaver is 

usually the first person on the scene to provide first aid to wounded and injured personnel. 

TREATMENT BY MEDICAL PERSONNEL

7-69. The combat medic, the physician, the physician assistant, or the health care specialist in the squadron 

aid station provides medical treatment after initial care. Emergency medical treatments, known as immediate 

far forward care, are lifesaving steps that do not require the knowledge and skills of a physician. The combat 

medic is the first individual in the medical chain who makes decisions based on medical military occupational 

specialty-specific training. The physician and the physician assistant in a treatment squad provide advanced 

trauma management to the casualty at the squadron aid station and conduct routine sick call when the tactical 

situation permits. 
Sustainment 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 7-15

SQUADRON MEDICAL PLATOON

7-70. The squadron medical platoon is the focal point of Army Health System support for the squadron and 

troop. The platoon receives, treats, evacuates patients, and coordinates further medical evacuation as 

necessary. It establishes and operates the squadron aid station, which is the primary medical treatment facility 

for the squadron and troop. The squadron medical platoon has a headquarters section, treatment squad, 

combat medic section, and ambulance squads (two squads for the IBCT and four squads for the ABCT). 

Health Service Support 

7-71. The medical platoon’s health service support mission requirements include the following: 

z Provide Role 1 medical care, which includes the following:

 Emergency medical treatment for patients with wounds, injuries, or illnesses.

 Advanced trauma management.

 Casualty collection.

 Medical evacuation from point of injury or supported troop location to the squadron aid

station or supporting treatment team.

 Sick call services.

 Class VIII resupply.

z Establish the squadron aid station where it can best support squadron operations under the

direction of the main command post or the combat trains command post.

z Establish a chemical casualty aid station during CBRN operations.

z Provide training to certify combat lifesavers and to recertify them every 12 months to sustain their

skills.

z Attach combat medics from the combat medic section to each of the platoons and troop

headquarters to form the troop medical team.

z Place ambulances forward with supported troops to provide emergency medical treatment, reduce

evacuation time, and augment troop medical capabilities, as required.

z Maintain field medical records according to AR 40-66.

Medical Platoon Force Health Protection Responsibilities 

7-72. One of the medical platoon’s mission requirements is to establish a combat and operational stress 

control program for the troop, including requesting assistance from the supporting mental health section. The 

supporting mental health section conducts combat and operational stress control classes on stress reduction 

techniques and prevention of combat and operational stress reactions. Other mission requirements include 

the following: 

z Implement force health protection operations to counter health threats.

z Implement force health protection operations to prevent disease and noncombat injury.

z Plan and conduct predeployment and postdeployment health assessments.

z Establish and execute a medical surveillance program.

z Coordinate the occupational environmental health surveillance program.

z Ensure that troop personnel practice effective oral hygiene.

z Assist with the training of field sanitation teams.

z Develop force health protection measures for the troop SOP.

z Send chemical and biological specimens to the area medical laboratory for confirmatory analysis.

z Conduct sanitation inspections of troop living area, food service areas, and waste disposal.

z Conduct sanitation inspections of potable water distribution points and equipment.

SQUADRON AID STATION

7-73. The squadron medical platoon establishes and operates the squadron aid station. Trained personnel at 

the medical treatment facility stabilize patients for further evacuation, provide emergency lifesaving and 
Chapter 7 

7-16 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

limb-saving treatment, and treat minor wounds or illnesses so that patients can return to duty. The squadron 

aid station normally consolidates with the combat trains command post. 

Treatment Teams 

7-74. The squadron medical platoon can split its treatment squad into two treatment teams to support 

squadron and troop operations based on the mission. These treatment teams (teams Alpha and Bravo) operate 

the squadron aid station and provide medical care and treatment including sick call, emergency medical 

treatment, and advanced trauma management. Team Alpha has an operational medicine officer (primary care 

physician and squadron surgeon), a health care NCO, and two health care specialists. Team Bravo has a 

physician assistant, a health care NCO, and two health care specialists. The physician, physician assistant, 

and health care NCOs and specialists provide emergency medical treatment and assist with advanced trauma 

management procedures according to their occupational specialties. 

7-75. The treatment teams can operate for limited times in split-based operations in direct support of 

squadron units. The teams can also operate in split-based operations when the squadron aid station must 

move to a new location. One team remains at the initial location and continues to treat patients while the 

other team moves to the new location and establishes patient care capabilities. Once the jump team has 

established a treatment capability at the new location, the other team ensures evacuation or return to duty for 

all patients, as required, and moves to the new location. When echeloned, the aid stations are limited primarily 

to triage, stabilizing, and preparing patients for evacuation. 

Ambulance Squads 

7-76. Medical platoon ambulances provide medical evacuation and en route care from the Soldier’s point of 

injury or the troop casualty collection point to the squadron aid station. The ambulance team supporting the 

troop works in coordination with the combat medics supporting the platoons. Medical evacuation teams 

attach to the troop on a habitual basis. They assist the troop combat medics with medical treatment and 

evacuation to the squadron aid station and plan and execute aerial evacuation for litter-urgent patients when 

possible. 

Note. Plans for using nonmedical vehicles should be included in the squadron or troop SOPs and 

OPORDs for mass casualty situations.

Combat Medic Section 

7-77. The allocation of combat medics usually is one combat medic per each platoon in the troop. The 

platoon combat medic normally locates with, or near, the platoon leader or platoon sergeant. The senior troop 

combat medic normally collocates with the 1SG. As the tactical situation allows, the senior troop medic 

manages the troop casualty collection point, provides treatment, and prepares patients for medical evacuation 

or casualty evacuation, as their condition requires. 

EVACUATION

7-78. There are two methods of evacuating injured Soldiers: medical evacuation and casualty evacuation. 

Medical evacuation is using ground or air ambulances to evacuate a patient from the point of injury to a 

supporting medical treatment facility or from one medical treatment facility to another while providing en 

route care. Casualty evacuation is using nonmedical vehicles or other means for patient transport without the 

provision for en route care. 

7-79. Medical evacuation is critical in health service support planning. The troop is responsible for the 

evacuation of casualties from the point of injury to the casualty collection point. The medical platoon is 

responsible for evacuation of casualties from the casualty collection point to the squadron aid station. The 

squadron or brigade S-1 or S-4 ensures there is a coordinated evacuation plan from all troop casualty 

collection points to the squadron aid station, to the brigade support medical company, or to higher medical 

treatment facilities. Patients evacuate no further than their condition requires, then return to duty as soon as 

possible. 
Sustainment 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 7-17

FORCE HEALTH PROTECTION

7-80. All leaders are responsible for maintaining the health and fighting fitness of Soldiers; therefore, the 

commander must emphasize preventive measures. All leaders must be active participants in the areas of 

hygiene, sanitation, safety, sleep deprivation, physical fitness, counseling, and the treatment of combat stress 

and fatigue. 

PREVENTIVE MEDICINE

7-81. Preventive medicine encompasses the rules of hygiene and field sanitation to prevent the spread of 

debilitating diseases. Establish these rules of hygiene and field sanitation in the troop SOP, and observe and 

enforce these rules of hygiene and field sanitation daily. Safety is another continuous requirement of 

preventive medicine. To prevent accidents that could injure Soldiers, leaders continuously enforce proper 

equipment operating procedures and general safety. 

7-82. Preventive medicine personnel who are organic to the BCT brigade support medical company provide 

preventive medicine operational support. The BCT preventive medicine section is equipped to conduct 

preventive medicine surveillance and control. 

PHYSICAL FITNESS

7-83. Physical fitness is essential in helping Soldiers to maintain stamina and energy levels. Leaders need to 

be creative in establishing physical training opportunities and implementing them around mission 

requirements, especially while deployed. 

COMBAT AND OPERATIONAL STRESS CONTROL

7-84. Combat and operational stress control focuses on protecting the force through treatment and prevention 

of combat and operational stress. The brigade support battalion has a combat and operational stress control 

team consisting of a behavioral science officer and a mental health specialist. Chaplains can assist with 

combat stress control by identifying Soldiers who are under extreme stress. 
This page intentionally left blank. 
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 A-1 

Appendix A 

Analog Reports 

Commanders can use the following report formats to ensure clear communications 

between units and echelons to facilitate common reporting formats.

CONTACT REPORT 

A-1. Soldiers issue a contact report immediately upon contact with a threat or unknown force in the area of 

operations. A contact report is an alert, which can be very brief. A contact report takes priority over all other 

communications traffic and is primarily by radio. If Soldiers are already in a hide position and have detected 

the enemy before being detected first (and time permits) this initial report may be digital. State CONTACT, 

followed by a description of the threat or unknown force and the cardinal direction from the sender. 

BLUE 1―SPOT REPORT

A-2. Soldiers use a spot report (SPOTREP) when scouts observe any known or suspected threat activity. A 

spot report is necessary when any characteristic in the area of operation can affect mission accomplishment 

or when required by the OPORD. Soldiers always send threat information in the clear. A SPOTREP takes 

priority over all other routine radio traffic. The initial SPOTREP should follow no more than one minute 

after the contact report. State SPOTREP or UPDATED SPOTREP followed by pertinent information on 

these lines: 

z Line ALPHA: Observer or source (omit if it is the calling station, otherwise use call signs or

description).

z Line BRAVO: Activity or characteristic observed. Use the SALUTE format:

 Size: The number of sighted personnel, vehicles, or other equipment.

 Activity: What the threat is doing.

 Location: Grid coordinates. Report the center of mass for identical, closely grouped items,

otherwise, report multiple grid coordinates of traces.

 Unit: Patches, signs, or markings.

 Time: Time the observed activity occurred.

 Equipment: Description or identification of all equipment associated with the activity.

 Line CHARLIE: Actions the reporting Soldier has taken and personal recommendations.

Actions usually involve conducting additional reconnaissance to determine the complete

threat situation or recommending and executing a specific course of action.

 Line DELTA: Self-authentication (if required).

BLUE 1 SPOT REPORT, EXAMPLE 

YELLOW 4, THIS IS YELLOW 2. BLUE ONE, OVER. ONE BRDM, 

STATIONARY, ORIENTED SOUTH AT GRID MS289546; 1725 

HOURS. CONTINUING TO OBSERVE, OVER. 
Appendix A 

A-2 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

BLUE 2―SITUATION REPORT

A-3. Subordinate units submit a SITREP on the tactical situation and status to their higher headquarters. 

Submit the SITREP daily, after significant events, or when the platoon leader or commander requests it. State 

SITREP followed by pertinent information on these lines: 

z Line 1: The as-of date-time group (DTG).

z Line 2: Brief summary of threat activity, casualties inflicted, and prisoners captured.

z Line 3: Friendly locations (encoded using control measures or Terrain Index Reference System

[TIRS] points).

z Line 4: Combat vehicles, operational tanks.

z Line 5: Defensive obstacles (encoded using codes, control measures, or TIRS points). The type

and location can be listed as—

 Obstacles. Abbreviations can include MF (minefield), TD (tank ditch), AB (abatis), RC (road

crater), and CW (concertina wire).

 Executed demolition targets.

 Reserved demolition targets.

z Line 6: Personnel strength classified using the following status levels:

 GREEN: Full strength; 90% or more fit for duty.

 AMBER: Reduced strength; 80% to 89% fit for duty.

 RED: Reduced strength; 60% to 79% fit for duty; the unit is mission capable.

 BLACK: Reduced strength; 59% or less fit for duty.

z Line 7: Classes III and V supplies available for combat vehicles. Status levels for ammunition and

petroleum, oil, and lubricants are the same ones used for personnel strength (GREEN, AMBER,

RED, or BLACK) with percentages referring to the amount of basic load level available. (Refer

to Line 6 of this report.)

z Line 8: Summary of tactical intentions.

Note. If an item is status level BLACK on lines 6 or 7, the appropriate yellow (logistics) report 

follows the transmission.

BLUE 2 SITUATION REPORT, EXAMPLE 

YANKEE 21, THIS IS YANKEE 02, BLUE TWO, OVER. LINE 1: 062230. 

LINE 2: NEGATIVE CONTACT. LINE 3: VISIT 7. LINE 4B: 2. LINE 5: 

ABATIS, FROM X19 EAST ZERO POINT THREE NORTH ONE POINT 

SEVEN. LINE 6: GREEN. LINE 7A: GREEN. LINE 7B: AMBER. LINE 8: 

CONTINUING MISSION. 

BLUE 4―REPORT FOR BRIDGE, OVERPASS, CULVERT, UNDERPASS, OR TUNNEL

A-4. To send a bridge report (known as a BRIDGEREP), state BRIDGEREP, followed by pertinent 

information on these lines: 

z Line ALPHA: Type and location (for a long tunnel, include the entrance and exit locations). Use

a TIRS point or grid coordinates.

z Line BRAVO: Overall length.

z Line CHARLIE: Width of roadway.

z Line DELTA: Height restrictions.

z Line ECHO: Length and number of spans.

z Line FOXTROT: Computed classification.

z Line GOLF: Bypass locations and conditions. Use a Blue 5 report if necessary.
Analog Reports 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 A-3 

BLUE 5―REPORT FOR FORD, FERRY, OR OTHER CROSSING SITE

A-5. To send the crossing site report (known as a CROSSREP), state CROSSREP followed by pertinent 

information on these lines: 

z Line ALPHA: Type and location, using a TIRS point or grid coordinates.

z Line BRAVO: Length of crossing in meters.

z Line CHARLIE: Usable width.

z Line DELTA: Current speed in meters per second.

z Line ECHO: Maximum depth in meters.

z Line FOXTROT: Bottom material and condition.

z Line GOLF: Capacity classification of any existing ferry equipment.

z Line HOTEL: Slope of entry bank.

z Line INDIA: Slope of exit bank.

z Line KILO: Other comments as necessary.

BLUE 7―ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE REPORT

A-6. To report the results of a route reconnaissance, scouts should send an initial route reconnaissance report 

(known as ROUTEREP) at the start point. At a minimum, updates follow the initial report when obstructions, 

phase lines, and route changes become necessary. These update reports should include only the line(s) that 

have changed from the initial ROUTEREP. To send the report, state ROUTEREP, followed by pertinent 

information on these lines: 

z Line ALPHA: From location, reported using a control measure or TIRS point.

z Line BRAVO: To location, reported using a control measure or TIRS point.

z Line CHARLIE: Type of route, reported using the following designations:

 Highway: number 1.

 Road: number 2.

 Trail: number 3.

 Cross-country: number 4.

z Line DELTA: Classification of route. Check for height, width, and weight restrictions to

determine the appropriate class and report which vehicles the route can handle using the following

designations:

 All squadron and battalion vehicles (70-class minimum), reported using the Number 1.

 Tracked vehicles only, number 2.

 CFVs only (35-class restriction), number 3.

z Line ECHO: Seasonal limitations of route based on weather support capability, reported

as follows:

 All weather (usable year-round), reported using the letter X.

 Limited all weather (use limited during bad weather), letter Y.

 Fair weather (may be impassable during bad weather), letter Z.

z Line FOXTROT: Rate of movement the route supports, reported as follows:

 Fast: Reported using the number 1.

 Slow: Reported using the number 2.

z Line GOLF: Location and type of any critical points (send the applicable report). Report the

following obstructions in all cases:

 Curves with a radius of 45 meters or less.

 Uphill slopes with grades of five percent or greater.

 Width restrictions of six meters or less for one-way traffic, ten meters or less for

two-way traffic.

 Overhead clearance of 4.3 meters or less.
Appendix A 

A-4 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

BLUE 9―OBSTACLE REPORT

A-7. Report all pertinent information using the following format: 

z Line ALPHA: Type of obstacle or obstruction.

z Line BRAVO: Location, using grid coordinates. For large, complex obstacles, send the

coordinates of the ends and all turn points.

z Line CHARLIE: Dimensions and orientation.

z Line DELTA: Composition.

z Line ECHO: Threat weapons influencing obstacle.

z Line FOXTROT: Observer’s actions.

BLUE 10―BYPASS REPORT

A-8. Report all pertinent information using the following format: 

z Line ALPHA: Observer or source.

z Line BRAVO: Length, width, surface type, grade.

z Line CHARLIE: Coordinates of from and to locations.

z Line DELTA: Seasonal and weather limitations. Use letter designation (X, Y, or Z) as described

in the Blue 7 ROUTEREP (line Echo).

z Line ECHO: Bypass markings.

z Line FOXTROT: Observer’s actions.

BLUE 11―STAND-TO REPORT

A-9. Send the stand-to report (known as the STANREP) to the platoon leader or tactical command post, as 

applicable, when stand-to is completed. To send this report, state STANREP, followed by pertinent 

information on these lines: 

z Line ALPHA: Time stand-to was complete.

z Line BRAVO: Weapons on hand and functional. Use the term UP for functional weapons on

hand. Use EXCEPTION for weapons that are not on hand or not functional.

z Line CHARLIE: Sensitive and accountable items on hand. Use UP or EXCEPTION, as

applicable.

z Line DELTA: Vehicles and radios on hand and functional. Use UP or EXCEPTION, as

applicable.

z Line ECHO: Report the on-hand or functional status of any other equipment using UP or

EXCEPTION.

Note. For lines B, C, D, and E, refer to the Yellow 1 equipment status report (ESTAT) for 

equipment line numbers.

BLUE 11 STAND-TO REPORT, EXAMPLE 

BLACK 3, THIS IS RED 1; BLUE 11, OVER. LINE ALPHA: COMPLETE 

TIME 0600. LINE BRAVO: UP. LINE CHARLIE: ITEM 38, MISSING 1 

EACH. LINE DELTA: RED 3 WILL NOT START. 

INTELLIGENCE REPORTS 

A-10. Units routinely send intelligence reports to account for friendly equipment, captured enemy materiel, 

and personnel. These reports are significant because they relay information that has possible intelligence 

value in a concise format. 
Analog Reports 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 A-5 

GREEN 2 ― SENSITIVE ITEMS REPORT

A-11. Units send the sensitive items report, known as SENSEREP, daily at prescribed times (before and after 

significant movement, after significant events, and after any consolidation or reorganization). Items covered 

include machine guns; personal weapons; night vision devices; binoculars; nuclear, biological, and chemical 

(NBC) equipment; communications-electronics operating instruction materials; maps and graphics; and 

special equipment assigned to platoons for particular operations. To send this report, state SENSEREP 

followed by pertinent information on these lines: 

z Line ALPHA: Reporting unit (use call sign).

z Line CHARLIE: Results of sensitive items check. Use the term UP for on-hand or functional

items. For missing items, report the line description and serial number and provide an explanation.

Use additional lines from the Yellow 1 report.

z Line ECHO: Initials of person sending report.

GREEN 2 SENSITIVE ITEMS REPORT, EXAMPLE 

THIS IS RED 1. GREEN TWO, OVER. LINE ALPHA: RED. LINE

CHARLIE: ALL UP. LINE ECHO: REMOTE WEAPONS SYSTEM. 

GREEN 3―SPLASH REPORT

A-12. Units use the splash report for downed or missing aircraft. To send this report, provide all pertinent 

information on these lines: 

z Line 1: Call sign.

z Line 2: Aircraft data (type and status).

z Line 3: Pilot status.

GREEN 4―PATROL REPORT

A-13. Units may submit the patrol report by radio or wire, when required. The following debriefing format 

can be used to ensure all pertinent information is provided in the patrol report: 

z Designation of patrol. Include these elements:

 To: 

 From:

 Maps: 

z Size and composition of patrol.

z Task.

z Time of departure.

z Time of return.

z Routes (out and back).

z Terrain, includes a description of terrain by type (such as dry, swampy, and so forth), depth of

ravines and draws, condition of bridges (type, size, and strength), and effect of terrain on tracked

and wheeled vehicles.

z Threat includes details of threat strength, disposition, defenses, equipment, weapons, attitude,

morale, exact location, and movements. The report should include the time of observation of the

threat activity and coordinates for the location where the activity occurred.

z Any map corrections.

z Miscellaneous information includes pertinent details of NBC warfare, if applicable.

z Results of encounters with the threat, includes threat prisoners and casualties, captured documents

and equipment, identification of threat elements, and threat disposition after the contact.

z Condition of the patrol, includes disposition arrangements for any dead or wounded.
Appendix A 

A-6 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Conclusions and recommendations, includes the extent of mission accomplishment and any patrol

equipment and tactics recommendations.

z Additional remarks by the debriefer.

Note. The report should conclude with the name, rank or grade, and organization or unit of the 

patrol leader. 

GREEN 6―ENEMY PRISONER OF WAR AND CAPTURED MATERIAL REPORT

A-14. The enemy prisoner of war captured materiel report informs the troop or battalion tactical command 

post of EPWs and captured materiel of immediate tactical value only. Usually, units tag EPWs and captured 

materiel immediately to show the place, time, and circumstances of capture to ensure information of 

intelligence value is not lost. Provide all pertinent information on the following lines (examples are in 

parentheses): 

z Line 1: State GREEN 6.

z Line 2: Item captured (state enemy prisoner of war).

z Line 3: DTG of capture (260845SEP83).

z Line 4: Place of capture using grid coordinates (NS 621434).

z Line 5: Capturing unit (appropriate call sign).

z Line 6: Circumstances of capture described as briefly as possible.

A-15. Format for reporting captured materiel. Provide all pertinent information on the following lines 

(examples in parentheses): 

z Line 1: State GREEN 6.

z Line 2: Item captured (state MATERIEL).

z Line 3: Type of document or equipment (communications-electronics operating instruction).

z Line 4: DTG of capture (160900JUN83).

z Line 5: Place of capture, using grid coordinates (NE824615).

z Line 6: Capturing unit (appropriate call sign).

z Line 7: Circumstances of capture described as briefly as possible.

Note. After sending the report to the company team or troop commander, provide disposition 

instructions or recommendations, if necessary. 

LOGISTICS REPORTS

A-16. Units use a logistics report to report the status of sustainment items and request resupply. Units should 

immediately follow a status report with a request report. 

YELLOW 1―EQUIPMENT STATUS REPORT

A-17. Each platoon sergeant sends the equipment status report (ESTAT) by courier or voice radio to the troop 

or task force tactical command post every day. The information is as of 1200 hours that same day. Units 

record the equipment status using one of these terms: operational, inoperative, or combat loss. Provide all 

pertinent information using the following categories and lines: 

z Weapons.

 Line 1: Bayonet multipurpose system, XM9.

 Line 2: Pistol, 9 mm, automatic, M9 with equipment.

 Line 3: Rifle, 5.56 mm, M4 with equipment.

 Line 4: Launcher, grenade, M203A2, with equipment.

 Line 5: Machine gun, M2, caliber .50, heavy barrel.

 Line 6: Machine gun, 7.62 mm, M240B.
Analog Reports 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 A-7 

 Line 7: Machine gun, light 5.56 mm, M249.

 Line 8: Machine gun, grenade, 40 mm, MK19 MOD III.

 Line 12: Command launch unit, Javelin.

Note. Use lines 13, 14, 15, and 16 as needed for additional weapons assigned to the platoon. 

z Vehicles and vehicle equipment.

 Line 17: HMMWV, M1151, 50 Cal.

 Line 18: HMMWV, M1151, MK19.

 Line 18: HMMWV, TOW M1151.

 Line 19: CFV, M3.

 Line 20: Stryker.

Note. Use lines 21, 22, 23, and 24 as needed for additional vehicles and vehicle equipment 

assigned to the platoon. 

z NBC equipment.

 Line 25: Radiac set AN/VDR-2.

 Line 26: Radiac set ANUDR-13.

 Line 27: Mask chemical biological M40.

 Line 28: Mask, chemical-biological, combat vehicle M42.

Note. Use lines 29, 30, and 31 as needed for additional CBRN equipment assigned to the platoon.

z Radios.

 Line 32: Radio set: AN/PRC-119F (C).

 Line 33: Radio set: Hand Held AN/PRC-148.

 Line 34: Radio set: Radio Set: AN/PSC-5.

 Line 35: Radio set: AN/VRC-89F (C).

 Line 36: Radio set: AN/VRC-91F (C).

 Line 37: Radio set: AN/VRC-92F (C).

 Line 38: Radio set: AN/VRC-104(V) 6, 150 WATT W/PRC-150 HF radio.

Note. Use lines 39, 40, and 41 as needed for additional radios assigned to the platoon.

z Miscellaneous equipment.

 Line 42: Demolition set, explosive, initiating, electric, and semi-electric.

 Line 43: Detecting set, mine, portable, metallic, AN/PSS-11.

 Line 44: Night vision goggles, AN/PVS-7B.

 Line 45: Battlefield Anti-Intrusion System, AN/PRS-9.

 Line 46: Binoculars, modular construction, mil scale reticle, 7 x 50 mm with equipment.

 Line 47: Telescope, straight, military.

Note. Use lines 48, 49, and 50 as needed for any additional equipment assigned to the platoon.

YELLOW 1A―BATTLE LOSS SPOT REPORT

A-18. The platoon leader or platoon sergeant transmits the Yellow 1A report as soon as possible after items 

are lost or damaged in battle. Losses are reported using line numbers from the Yellow 1 report. Provide 

pertinent information on the following lines: 
Appendix A 

A-8 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Line 1: Time of loss.

z Line 2: Number of equipment pieces to be evacuated to troop and battalion or higher for

maintenance. Refer to the appropriate line numbers from the Yellow 1 report.

z Line 3: Number of equipment pieces destroyed, abandoned, and left in pieces. Refer to the

appropriate line numbers from the Yellow 1 report.

z Line 4: Location (encoded) of abandoned equipment.

Note. Yellow 1A reports are not cumulative. Units send a Yellow 1A report showing total unit 

status no later than 1300 hours once daily. The Yellow 1A report gives equipment status as of 

1200 hours that day. 

YELLOW 2―AMMUNITION STATUS REPORT

A-19. Transmit an ammunition status report once daily at 1300 hours or immediately upon completion of 

threat contact, the following status codes are used: 

z GREEN: 90 percent or more on hand, all ammunition types.

z AMBER: 80 percent to 89 percent on hand, all ammunition types.

z RED: 60 percent to 79 percent on hand, all ammunition types.

z BLACK: 59 percent or less on hand, all ammunition types.

Note. BLACK status in a Yellow 2 report requires immediate follow-up with a Yellow 2A report. 

GREEN, AMBER, or RED status does not require submission of a Yellow 2A report. 

YELLOW 2A―AMMUNITION REQUEST

A-20. The required quantity of each type of ammunition is requested using the following line numbers: 

z Line 1: Report as-of DTG.

z Line 2: 5.56-mm mix.

z Line 3: 5.56-mm ball.

z Line 4: 5.56-mm tracer.

z Line 5: 7.62-mm (coax).

z Line 6: Grenade, 40-mm, high explosive.

z Line 7: Grenade, 40-mm, white phosphorous.

z Line 8: Grenade, 40-mm, antipersonnel.

z Line 9: Caliber .50 (M2).

z Line 10: Caliber .50 (M85).

z Line 11: 40-mm, high explosive/dual purpose.

z Line 12: 25-mm high explosive.

z Line 13: 25-mm AP.

z Line 14: TOW.

z Line 15: AT4.

z Line 16: Javelin.

z Line 17: Grenade, fragmentation.

z Line 18: Grenade, smoke.

z Line 19: Grenade, thermite.

z Line 20: Blasting cap, nonelectric.

z Line 21: Fuze, igniter.

z Line 22: Fuze, blast, time.

z Line 23: Mine, Claymore.
Analog Reports 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 A-9 

z Line 24: Mine, antitank.

z Line 25: Mine, AP.

Note. All Yellow 2A requests are for the quantity of ammunition the platoon requires unless 

otherwise specified. When sending a Yellow 2A report, use only the lines required for specific 

requests. Use additional lines (beginning with Line 26) to request any other types of ammunition 

that the platoon needs. Attached units should coordinate with the S-4 for additional line numbers 

for their ammunition requirements. 

YELLOW 3―PETROLEUM, OILS, AND LUBRICANTS STATUS REPORT

A-21. Units send the petroleum, oils, and lubricants (known as POL) report twice daily, or as required. The 

following status codes are used: 

z GREEN: 90 percent or more of the required quantity on hand.

z AMBER: 80 to 89 percent on hand.

z RED: 60 to 79 percent on hand.

z BLACK: 59 percent or less on hand.

YELLOW 3A―POL REQUEST

A-22. Use the following line numbers to request the required quantity of each type of POL product: 

z Line 1: Report as of DTG.

z Line 2: Diesel gallon (gal).

z Line 3: Oil, OE-30 (gal).

z Line 4: Oil, OE-90 (gal).

z Line 5: Antifreeze (gal).

z Line 6: Brake fluid (gal).

z Line 7: Hydraulic fluid, OHA quart (qt).

z Line 8: Hydraulic fluid, OHT (qt).

z Line 9: Grease, GAA pound (lb).

Note. Use lines 10, 11, and 12 as needed for any other equipment assigned to the platoon. Use 

additional lines (beginning with Line 21) to request any other POL products the platoon or 

attached elements require. 

PERSONNEL REPORTS 

A-23. Units use personnel reports to notify the command group of casualties and to request replacement 

personnel. A request for replacements must immediately follow a casualty report. 

RED 2―PERSONNEL BATTLE LOSS REPORT

A-24. Units transmit a Red 2 report to the troop and task force tactical command post as casualties occur. 

The unit also completes DA Form 1156, (Casualty Feeder Card) with witness statements, and submits all to 

the 1SG. Red 2 is an interim report to update information sent in the last Red 1 report. Provide all pertinent 

information using the following lines: 

z Line 1: Battle roster number.

z Line 2: DTG of the incident.

z Line 3: Location of the incident (encoded).

z Line 4: Type of casualties, encoded by letter as follows:

 ALPHA: Killed in action, hostile action.

 BRAVO: Killed in action, nonhostile action.
Appendix A 

A-10 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

 CHARLIE: Body recovered.

 DELTA: Body not recovered.

 ECHO: Body identified.

 FOXTROT: Body not identified.

 GOLF: Missing in action.

 HOTEL: Captured.

 INDIA: Wounded in action, slight, hostile action.

 JULIET: Wounded in action, serious, hostile action.

 KILO: Wounded in action, slight, nonhostile action.

 LIMA: Wounded in action, serious, nonhostile action.

 MIKE: Accident.

z Line 5: Location of casualties or evacuation.

RED 3―MEDICAL EVACUATION REQUEST

A-25. Units send a Red 3 report to the medical team on the troop or company command net to request medical 

evacuation support. 

A-26. The following is the ground evacuation format. Provide pertinent information on the following lines: 

z Line 1: State EVAC.

z Line 2: Location for pickup (encoded).

z Line 3: Number of casualties.

z Line 4: Category of patient condition, encoded by letter designation as follows:

 ALPHA: Urgent.

 BRAVO: Priority.

 CHARLIE: Routine.

Note. Use the letter designation with the number of patients in each category; for example, TWO 

ALPHA indicates that two patients require evacuation on an urgent basis. 

A-27. The air evacuation format is as follows: 

z Line 1: Location. Specify the grid coordinates for the six-digit grid location preceded by the

100,000-meter grid identification.

z Line 2: Radio frequency and call sign. The frequency and call sign is the radio frequency and call

sign at the site of the unit requesting evacuation.

z Line 3: Patient category of precedence. Classify the casualties’ priority for evacuation using the

following terms:

 Urgent. Evacuation required within two hours saving life or limb.

 Priority. Patient’s medical condition is deteriorating, becoming urgent within four hours.

 Routine. Evacuation required, but several hours until patient’s condition expected to

deteriorate.

 Tactical immediate. Evacuation required so casualties do not endanger the tactical mission.

z Line 4: Special equipment and emergency medical supplies.

z Line 5: Number and type of casualties.

z Line 6: Security of pickup site. Describe conditions for security at the pickup zone.

z Line 7: Signaling and site marking. Specify the signaling and marking methods to use.

z Line 8: Patient nationality and status.

z Line 9: CBRN contamination area. Specify locations of any contaminated areas affecting the

evacuation operation.
Analog Reports 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 A-11

CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, RADIOLOGICAL, NUCLEAR, AND 

HIGH-YIELD EXPLOSIVE REPORTS 

A-28. Units use chemical, biological, radiological, nuclear, and high yield explosives reports to describe 

contaminated areas, means of delivery, persistence, and initial agent identification. Units ensure that 

appropriate protective postures occur before gathering information for CBRN reports. 

CBRN-1―OBSERVER’S INITIAL REPORT

A-29. To send the CBRN-1 report, state CBRN ONE and give the type of CBRN incident (nuclear, biological, 

or chemical). Other information that may be sent includes precedence of the report, date and time of the 

report (universal time [also called ZULU]), and security classification with the FROM and TO times the 

classification is applicable. Provide all pertinent information on the following lines: 

z Line ALPHA: Strike serial number (if known).

z Line BRAVO: Position of observer (universal transverse Mercator [known as UTM] coordinates

or name of place).

z Line CHARLIE: Grid or magnetic bearing (specify which is used) or azimuth of attack from

observer (in degrees or mils, specify which is used).

z Line DELTA: DTG attack started, ZULU.

z Line ECHO: Illumination time in seconds (for nuclear burst), time the attack ended (toxic agent

attack only).

z Line FOXTROT: Location of attack (UTM coordinates) and vicinity of attack (actual or

estimated, specify which is given).

z Line GOLF: Means of delivery (if known).

z Line HOTEL: Type of burst (air, surface, unknown), type of toxic agent, or type of attack.

z Line INDIA: Number of shells, other data (for toxic attack only).

z Line JULIET: Flash-to-bang time (in seconds).

z Line KILO: Crater present or absent, diameter in meters (if known).

z Line LIMA: Cloud width (degrees or mils, specify which) five minutes after burst.

z Line MIKE: Cloud height (top or bottom, specify which) ten minutes after burst (degrees or mils,

specify which).

z Line SIERRA: DTG of reading (local or ZULU time).

Note. DO NOT DELAY REPORTS in an attempt to provide complete format information. Omit 

information that is not applicable or available. Items always reported are the type of report; lines 

D and H; and one of the following lines: B, C, F, or G. Carefully specify the units of measure used 

(such as degrees, mils, or grid azimuth).

CBRN-3―IMMEDIATE WARNING OF EXPECTED CONTAMINATION

A-30. The CBRN-3 report is by radio. State NBC THREE, followed by pertinent information on these lines: 

z Line ALPHA: Strike serial number (if known).

z Line DELTA: DTG when attack started.

z Line FOXTROT: Location of attack (actual or estimated, specify which).

z Line PAPA: Area of expected contamination.

z Line YANKEE: Bearing or azimuth of left, then right radial lines (specify degrees or mils, use

four digits for each line).

z Line ZULU: Effective downwind speed (in kilometers [km] per mile, use three digits), downwind

effective distance of zone (in km, use three digits), and cloud radius (in km, use two digits).
Appendix A 

A-12 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

CBRN-4―REPORT OF RADIATION DOSE-RATE MEASUREMENT

A-31. Units submit CBRN-4 report, used for nuclear activity only, immediately after any radiation is detected 

and thereafter as required by the OPORD. To send this report, state CBRN FOUR, followed by pertinent 

information on these lines: 

z Line QUEBEC: Location of reading, use friendly graphics or encryption. Omit this line when

transmitting on a wire net.

z Line ROMEO: Dose rate in centigray per hour (cGy/hr) (average total dose rounded to the nearest

10 cGy). Specify whether the dose rate is INITIAL, INCREASING, PEAK, or DECREASING.

Specify SHIELDED if the dose rate was measured inside a vehicle.

z Line SIERRA: DTG of reading. Specify the time zone.

Note. Repeat lines Q, R, and S as often as necessary. Ideally, measure radiation dose rates in the 

open one meter above the ground. If the rate is measured in a shielded location, it is converted 

(as accurately as possible) to a rate in the open. 

CBRN-5―REPORT OF AREAS OF CONTAMINATION

A-32. To send the CBRN-5 report, state CBRN FIVE. Units may send other information including 

precedence of the report, date and time of the report (ZULU), and security classification with from and to for 

the length of time the classification is applicable. Provide all pertinent information on the following lines: 

z Line ALPHA: Strike serial number, if known.

z Line OSCAR: Reference DTG for estimated contours of contaminated areas.

z Line SIERRA: DTG when detection of contamination occurred.

z Line TANGO: H+1 DTG or DTG of latest reconnaissance of contamination in the area.

z Line UNIFORM: Coordinates of contour lines marking dose rate of 1000 cGy/hr.

z Line VICTOR: Coordinates of contour lines marking dose rate of 300 cGy/hr.

z Line WHISKEY: Coordinates of contour lines marking dose rate of 100 cGy/hr.

z Line X-RAY: Coordinates of contour lines marking dose rate of 20 cGy/hr.
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 B-1 

Appendix B 

Troop Operating Distances 

Troop commanders and leaders develop troop areas of operation based on manning, 

available weapons systems, and the desired amount of depth. The primary 

considerations are the mission variables of METT-TC. Additional considerations to 

emphasize when developing planning distances include enemy, friendly optics and 

laser capabilities, weapons ranges, and terrain.

Troop commanders and leaders may apply the following basic equations prior to 

mission execution to calculate an approximate operating area for each of their platoons. 

If all the platoons have similar METT-TC variables, then commanders can triple the 

distance based on one platoon’s area of operation when conducting a map 

reconnaissance. Using the formula described below, leaders can make tentative plans 

for positions and fires coverage. 

Below are several examples troop commanders and leaders can use as a reference to 

develop operating distances specific to their particular mission. Many factors of 

METT-TC are not available in these generic examples. Leaders must apply all planning 

specifics to their mission. 

ABCT SCOUT PLATOON

B-1. An ABCT scout platoon maximizes its capabilities in firepower and optics. The scout platoon has 

protection allowing for greater risk against ABCT- arrayed threats. An ABCT troop commander can use the 

following method to calculate their planning distances and depth starting at the platoon level for unrestricted 

terrain for a six-vehicle scout platoon: 

z Disperse vehicles based on enemy fires capability yet still within friendly fires coverage; 500

meters between vehicles is the minimum recommended planning factor to provide force protection

against enemy indirect fire.

z Optics for the ABCT Cavalry troop usually allow acquisition of enemy targets up to 10 km and

identification at 3 km.

z Weapons systems vary across formation types and significantly influence distance-planning

considerations. As an example, the M242 25-mm cannon would allow over 1000 meters between

vehicles while maintaining mutual support and sufficient weapons range beyond the supported

vehicle.

z Analyze terrain as unrestricted, restricted, or severely restricted. (Refer to ATP 2-01.3.)

Unrestricted terrain is free of any restriction to movement. Unrestricted terrain for armored or

mechanized forces is typically flat to moderately sloping terrain with scattered or widely spaced

obstacles such as trees or rocks. As an example, in desert terrain, troops are able to screen more

area by maximizing the use of optics and weapons capabilities.

B-2. Given the planning factors above, to find the planning screen front, take half of the maximum effective 

range of the weapons system and multiply that by three quarters the number of vehicles to account for 

mutually supporting position. Incorporate a factor of one for the terrain classification. Finally, add in the 

maximum effective range of the weapons system to cover the flank security factor to establish a front of nine 

kilometers. To find the planning screen depth, divide the front in half to establish a depth of 4500 meters. By 

changing the planning factors to meet their variables, commanders can rapidly estimate their fires protection 

and planning distance. (See figure B-1.) To see this expressed in a formula-style equation, refer to table B-1, 

page B-10.
Appendix B 

B-2 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure B-1. ABCT Scout Platoon Operational Distance (Unrestrictive Terrain) 

ABCT CAVALRY TROOP

B-3. For an ABCT troop over a contiguous front in unrestricted terrain, the mission variables of terrain and 

troops available need the most stringent consideration as both have substantial effects on the width and depth 

that a formation can occupy. At the troop level, mortars are an additional weapon system to incorporate as a 

planning factor. The troop commander deliberately plans where to locate the mortars to ensure that they 

provide maximum coverage to the element. The troop commander ensures clear priorities of fire when 

organic indirect fires cannot provide sufficient coverage of the troop’s frontage. The above planning factor 

establishes a front of 25 to 28 kilometers. Using available dismounted personnel in observation posts, the 

troop commander rounds the planning depth to four to five km for platoons. (Refer to figure B-2, page B-3 

and table B-2, page B-11.) 
Troop Operating Distances 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 B-3 

Figure B-2. ABCT Cavalry Troop Operational Distances (Unrestrictive Terrain) 

IBCT MOUNTED SCOUT PLATOON AND CAVALRY TROOP IBCT MOUNTED SCOUT

PLATOON

B-4. The firepower, mobility, and mix of weapons systems allows leaders the flexibility to array forces in 

an IBCT scout platoon to meet the mission variables of METT-TC. An IBCT troop commander can use the 

following method to calculate their planning distances and depth starting at the platoon level for severely 

restricted terrain for a six-vehicle scout platoon: 

z Disperse vehicles based on enemy fires capability yet still within friendly fires coverage;

500 meters between vehicles is the minimum recommended planning factor to provide force

protection against enemy indirect fire.

z Optics available allow acquisition of enemy targets up to 10 km and identification at 3 km.

z Weapons systems, the combination of the MG .50 caliber, MK19 grenade launcher, and TOW II

allow for up to 1000 meters between vehicles to maintain mutual support and sufficient weapons

range beyond the supported vehicle.

z Severely restricted terrain severely hinders or slows movement in combat formations.

Commanders may attempt to enhance mobility by committing engineer assets to improving

mobility or deviating from doctrinal tactics, such as moving in columns instead of line formations,

or at speeds much lower than those preferred.

B-5. Given the planning factors above, to find the planning screen front, take half of the maximum effective 

range of the weapons system and multiple that by three quarters the number of vehicles, which will account 

for the mutually supporting position. Incorporate a factor of 0.25 for the terrain classification. Finally, add in 

the maximum effective range of the weapons system to cover the flank security factor, which will establish 
Appendix B 

B-4 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

a front of 3 km. To find the planning screen depth, divide the front in half, which establishes a depth of 1500 

meters. (See figure B-3 and table B-3, page B-11.) 

Figure B-3. IBCT Scout Platoon Operational Distances (Severely Restrictive) 

IBCT MOUNTED CAVALRY TROOP

B-6. The IBCT Cavalry troop combines mobility and firepower against the threat forces facing the IBCT. 

The mobility and firepower density in a Cavalry troop is unique to the rest of the IBCT forces, allowing it to 

conduct reconnaissance and security tasks forward of the maneuver battalions. (See figure B-4, page B-5.) 
Troop Operating Distances 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 B-5 

Figure B-4. IBCT Cavalry Troop Operational Distances (Severely Restrictive) 

IBCT DISMOUNTED SCOUT PLATOON

B-7. The IBCT dismounted scout platoon allows discreet, stealthy execution of reconnaissance and security 

tasks. An IBCT troop commander can use the following method to calculate their planning distances and 

depth, starting at the platoon level for severely restricted terrain. For this example, an area reconnaissance is 

demonstrated using NAIs. (See figure B-5, page B-6.) 

z Disperse based on enemy fires capability yet still within friendly fires coverage; 250 meters

between observation posts is the minimum recommended planning factor to provide force

protection against enemy indirect fire.
Appendix B 

B-6 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Optics available allow acquisition of enemy targets up to 10 km and identification at 2 km.

z Weapons systems vary across formation types and significantly influence distance-planning

considerations. For example, the MG 240 allows 400 meters between positions to maintain mutual

support and sufficient weapons range beyond the supported vehicle.

z Severely restricted terrain severely hinders or slows movement in combat formations unless the

commander makes some effort to enhance mobility.

Figure B-5. IBCT Dismounted Scout Platoon 
Troop Operating Distances 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 B-7 

IBCT DISMOUNTED CAVALRY TROOP

B-8. The IBCT dismounted Cavalry troop conducts reconnaissance and security using stealth. It relies on 

mobility from external assets such as vehicle or aircraft support, and is well suited for air assault operations.

The IBCT dismounted Cavalry troop has capabilities similar to the rifle battalions in the IBCT. (See 

figure B-6.) 

Figure B-6. IBCT Dismounted Cavalry Troop 

SBCT SCOUT PLATOON AND CAVALRY TROOP 

SBCT SCOUT PLATOON

B-9. The SBCT scout platoons platform commonality allows commanders simplicity in planning. SBCT 

troop commanders and staffs can use the following method to calculate their planning distances and depth 

starting at the platoon level for restricted terrain for a six-vehicle scout platoon: 
Appendix B 

B-8 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Disperse vehicles based on enemy fires capability, yet still within friendly fires coverage;

500 meters between vehicles is the minimum recommended planning factor to provide force

protection against enemy indirect fire.

z Optics available allow acquisition of enemy targets up to 10 km and identification at 3 km.

z For weapons systems, the MG .50 caliber and MK19 grenade launcher would allow up to

1000 meters between vehicles to maintain mutual support and sufficient weapons range beyond

the supported vehicle.

z Restricted terrain hinders movement to some degree. Units may have difficulty maintaining

preferred speeds, moving in combat formations, or transitioning from one formation to another.

Restricted terrain slows movement by requiring zigzagging or frequent detours. Restricted terrain

for armored or mechanized forces typically consists of moderate-to-steep slopes or moderate-todensely spaced obstacles such as trees, rocks, or buildings. (See figure B-7.)

Figure B- 7. SBCT Scout Platoon Operational Distances (Restrictive) 

SBCT CAVALRY TROOP

B-10. The SBCT Cavalry troop combines mobility and firepower against the threat forces facing the SBCT 

and has similar capabilities of its parent BCT. The SBCT Cavalry troop relies on mobility coupled with 

protection to conduct reconnaissance and security tasks. (See figure B-8, page B-9.) 
Troop Operating Distances 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 B-9 

Figure B-8. SBCT Cavalry Troop Operational Distances (Restrictive) 
Appendix B 

B-10 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Table B-1. Scout Platoon Width/Depth Formula 

The same width and depth formula is expressed below two different ways:

Width Formula

Width = (0.5 weapons system maximum effective range) x (0.75 number of vehicles) x terrain + 

flank security

Depth = width/2

Expressed another way:

([(.5R)(.75Nv)] x t) + F = W

.375 RNvT + F = W

Depth Formula

D = W/2 (depth will not be greater than 1/3 maximum effective range of internal indirect fire assets

Legend

R – Maximum effective range of weapon system

Nv – Number of vehicles in formation

T – Terrain

T – 1 for unrestricted

T – .5 for restricted

T – .25 for severely restricted

F – Flank security. Calculated by using maximum effective range of weapon system

W – Width

D – Depth

Number of Vehicles

Nv x .75

6 x .75 = 4.5

5 x .75 = 3.75

4 x .75 = 3

3 x .75 = 2.25

2 x .75 = 1.5
Troop Operating Distances 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 B-11

Table B-2. ABCT Cavalry Platoon Operational Distances in Unrestrictive Terrain 

Unrestrictive – 1

Restrictive – 0.5

Severely Restrictive – 0.25

1. M242 Bushmaster maximum effective range = 3000

2. Number of vehicles = 6

3. Type of terrain = unrestrictive

4. Flank security. Calculated by using maximum effective range of weapons system

Width = (0.5 weapons system maximum effective range) x (0.75 number of vehicles) x terrain + flank security

Screen width = 0.5 of 3000 times 0.75 of 6 times 1 + 3000

Screen width = 1500 times 4.5 times 1 + 3000

Screen width = 9750

Screen depth = width/2

Screen depth = 4875

Table B-3. IBCT Cavalry Platoon Operational Distances in Severely Restricted Terrain 

Unrestrictive – 1

Restrictive – 0.5

Severely Restrictive – 0.25

1. M2 .50 caliber maximum effective range = 1830

2. Number of vehicles = 6

3. Type of terrain = severely restrictive

4. Flank security. Calculated by using maximum effective range of weapons system

Width = (0.5 weapons system maximum effective range) x (0.75 number of vehicles) x terrain + flank security

Screen width = 0.5 of 1830 times 0.75 of 6 times 0.25 + 1830

Screen width = 915 times 4.5 times 0.25 + 1830

Screen width = 2860

Screen depth = width/2

Screen depth = 1430
Appendix B 

B-12 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

B-11. Table B-4 depicts a formula available to Cavalry troop’s leaders to plan operational distances. The 

formulas aide in commanders and leaders squadrons for staff and commander planning of operational area 

distances. 

Table B-4. SBCT Scout Platoon Operational Distances in Restricted Terrain 

Unrestrictive – 1

Restrictive – 0.5

Severely Restrictive – 0.25

1. M2 .50 caliber maximum effective range = 1830

2. Number of vehicles = 6

3. Type of terrain = restrictive

4. Flank security. Calculated by using maximum effective range of weapons system

Width = (0.5 weapons system maximum effective range) x (0.75 number of vehicles) x terrain + flank security

Screen width = 0.5 of 1830 times 0.75 of 6 times 0.5 + 1830

Screen width = 915 times 4.5 times 0.5 + 1830

Screen width = 3860

Screen depth = width/2

Screen depth = 1945
Troop Operating Distances 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 B-13

B-12. Table B-5 is a chart of available optics to Cavalry troops by BCT formation type. The chart aides in 

commanders and leaders squadrons for staff and commander planning of operational area distances. 

Table B-5. Cavalry Troop Optics Systems 

DAYSIGHTS TARGET RECOGNITION TARGET 

IDENTIFICATION

Binocular: Modular Construction Mil Scale Reticle 

7X50MM W/E 2000 Meters * Not Tested

Telescope:

Straight – ELCAN M145 Straight Telescope 900 Meters with M240B No Data

Soldier Carried 

Laser Target Locator Module (LTLM) 4.2 KM Day/900 M Night 2.7 KM Day/.45 KM 

Night

Crew Systems

Range Finder-Target Designator: Laser AN/PED-1

Lightweight Laser Designator Rangefinder (LLDR) No Data 4.3 KM Day/1.4 KM 

Night

Command Launch Unit: (Javelin) 13305405-119 2000 Meters Block 0 

2500 Meters Block I No Data

Soldier Weapon Sight

Sight: Night Vision (SNS)

AN/PVS-30 Clip-on Sniper Night Sight 600 Meters 1/2 Moon No Data

Sight: Thermal AN/PAS-13B (V)1 820 Meters No Data

Medium Weapon Thermal Sight (MWTS): AN/PAS13(V2)1200 Meters (MWTS I) 

1430 Meters (MWTS II) No Data

Heavy Weapon Thermal Sight (HWTS): 

AN/PAS-13(V3)

2200 Meters (HWTS I) 

2753 Meters (HWTS II) No Data

Target Acquisition System: TOW Improved ITAS M41

TOW2A Missile No Data 3750 Meters

TOW 2A RF Missile No Data 4200 Meters

TOW 2B Missile No Data 3750 Meters

TOW 2B Aero Missile No Data 4200 Meters

TOW Bunker Buster Missile No Data 3750 Meters

TOW Bunker Buster RF Missile No Data 4200 Meters

Legend: ITAS – Information Technology Approval System; KM – kilometer; MM – millimeter; 

TOW – tube launched, optically tracked, wire guided.
Appendix B 

B-14 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

B-13. Table B-6; table B-7, page B-15 and table B-8, page B-16 are charts of available weapons to Cavalry 

troops by BCT formation type. The charts aide in commanders and leaders squadrons for staff and 

commander planning of operational area distances. 

Table B-6. ABCT Cavalry Squadron Weapon System List

Legend: M – meter, MAX – maximum, MG – machine gun, mm – millimeter, WPN – weapon. 

WPN Amount WPN 

Systems

MAX Range

(Depends on Ammunition Type)

M3A3 25mm 23 1,600m-3,000m

M320A1

Grenade Launcher 65 150m-350m

MG .50 Cal 32 1,500m-1,830m

40mm MG Grenade

MK 19 MOD III 12 100m-2,200m

7.62mm M240B/240L 75 600m-1,800m

9mm 112 50m

M4 293 600m

12 Gauge Shotgun 36 50m

120mm Mortar 6 7,200m

TOW Missile 23 3,000m-3,750m

Javelin 12 2,000m
Troop Operating Distances 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 B-15

Table B-7. IBCT Cavalry Squadron Weapon System List

Legend: M – meter, MAX – maximum, MG – machine gun, mm – millimeter, TOW – tube launched, 

optically tracked, wire guided, WPN – weapon. 

WPN Amount WPN Systems MAX Range

(Depends on Ammunition Type)

M320A1

Grenade Launcher 42 150m-350m

MG .50 Cal 20 1,500m-1,830m

40mm MG Grenade MK 19 

MOD III 12 100m-2,200m

7.62mm M240L/240B 26 600m-1,800m

9mm 51 50m

M4 344 600m

12 Gauge Shotgun 34 50m

Javelin 24 2,000m

Tow 12 3,750m

M249 18 600m-1000m

120mm 4 7,200m

60mm 2 3,649m

Rifle M110 2 800m

Rifle M107 2 1,800m
Appendix B 

B-16 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Table B-8. SBCT Cavalry Squadron Weapon System List

Legend: M – meter, MAX – maximum, MG – machine gun, mm – millimeter, WPN – weapon. 

WPN Amount WPN Systems MAX Range

(Depends on Ammunition Type)

M320A1

Grenade Launcher 34 150m-350m

MG .50 Cal 38 1,500m-1,830m

40mm MG Grenade MK 

19 MOD III 18 100m-2,200m

7.62mm M240L/240B 48 600m-1,800m

9mm 21 50m

M4 374 600m

12 Gauge Shotgun 36 50m

120/81/60mm Mortar 6 3,500m-7,200m

Javelin 36 2,000m
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 C-1 

Appendix C 

Troop Command Post 

C-1. The Cavalry troop is the only combat arms company-sized element in the BCT to have an authorized 

command post. The following section describes the personnel and associated responsibilities as they relate 

to the command post, functions, and layout of different Cavalry troop command posts. 

DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES 

C-2. XO. The XO ensures collaboration with the 1SG to ensure the command post seamlessly conducts the 

required activities. The XO focuses on the usefulness and effectiveness of information acquired from the 

command post, and ensures dissemination and implementation of the commander’s guidance and intent. The 

XO must manage the battle rhythm of the command post to include rest cycles that support 24-hour 

operations. The following are minimum activities the XO conducts or supervises: 

z Ensures subordinate sections accomplish their duties according to the commander’s intent, unit

SOP, and orders.

z Ensures analog battle tracking systems are in place (and digital, if applicable).

z Synchronizes logistic support.

z Provides a centralized point for information collection and dissemination, coordination, time

management, and tracking the status of subordinate elements.

z Identifies information that relates to the commander’s critical information requirements.

z Coordinates the integration of combat enabling units (attachments).

z Receives and submits the LOGSTAT.

z Enforces adherence to the operational timeline.

C-3. 1SG. The 1SG ensures that the command post is functioning as intended, and properly provides the 

information needed by the XO and commander. The 1SG also provides feedback to the XO and commander 

on how to improve command post operations to achieve the commander’s intent. The following are minimum 

activities the 1SG conducts or supervises: 

z Manages troop trains operations.

z Executes casualty evacuation.

z Executes logistic support.

z Establishes and periodically inspects tactical assembly area security.

z Enforces discipline and adherence to troop SOPs.

z Manages personnel replacement and mortuary affairs operations.

z Monitors health and welfare of troop personnel.

z Enforces adherence to the operational timeline.

C-4. Operations NCO. The operations NCO consolidates reports and battle tracks troop units. Additionally 

the operations NCO—

z Deploys the command post.

z Establishes the command post.

z Implements security plan.

z Manages reports to and from subordinate, adjacent, and higher units.

z Monitors the tactical situation.

z Maintains and updates subordinate, adjacent, and higher unit locations and activities.

z Monitors the enemy situation.

z Manages the command post log/DA Form 1594, (Daily Staff Journal or Duty Officer’s Log).

z Serves as a communications relay between units, if necessary.
Appendix C 

C-2 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

z Publishes orders and instructions to subordinate units.

z Updates both digital and analog graphics.

z Enforces adherence to the operational timeline.

C-5. Communications NCO—

z Supervises or assists with command post tasks. These include relaying information, monitoring

the situation, establishing the command post security plan and radio watch schedule, and

informing the commander and subordinate elements of significant events.

z Establishes troop headquarters communications networks.

z Implements radio telephone operator plan.

z Performs troubleshooting and limited repair of organic communications equipment.

z Conducts preventative maintenance checks and services on communications equipment.

z Identifies shortcomings on communications equipment.

C-6. CBRN NCO—

z Determines likelihood of CBRN agents and determine battlefield effects.

z Oversees emplacement of joint chemical agent detector devices.

z Identifies possible dirty routes.

z Enables all chemical defense techniques.

z Identifies possible decontamination sites.

z Assists with command post duties, if necessary.

C-7. Company intelligence support team (if available)—

z Develops and updates the enemy situation.

z Develops enemy situation template with most likely and most dangerous enemy course of action.

z Provides weather and light data.

z Plans UAS employment to answer PIR.

z Conducts battle damage assessment tracking.

C-8. Medics—

z Establishes and rehearses routes to squadron aid station.

z Identifies areas for casualty collection points.

z Produces medical evacuation plan (time and distance estimates).

z Conducts reconnaissance of, and mark helicopter LZs for medical evacuation, if necessary.

C-9. Combat repair team (if available)—

z Updates maintenance collection point location on operational graphics.

z Identifies possible vehicle evacuation locations.

z Reviews and verifies faults annotated on DA Form 5988-E (Equipment 

 Maintenance and Inspection worksheet).

z Updates maintenance tracker.

FUNCTIONS 

C-10. The command post design and layout considerations supports functionality, and successful mission 

command. Troop command posts can have any configuration that supports the mission. Commanders 

additionally ensure the XO, with assistance from the 1SG, executes—

z Analysis and synthesis of collected information.

z Efficient facilitation of information flow.

z Connectivity to information systems and the network (if possible).

z Positioning information displays for ease of use.

z Integrating information on maps and display.

z Adequate workspace for the commander and headquarter personnel.
Troop Command Post 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 C-3 

z Ease of deployment, employment, and displacement.

z Effective and efficient power generation and distribution.

TROOP COMMAND POST LAYOUT 

C-11. Figure C-1, figure C-2, page C-4, and figure C-3 on page C-5, are different types of BCT Cavalry troop 

command posts. The following command posts are not prescriptive, but used for reference only. Units may 

vary configuration based on equipment and personnel available.) 

Figure C-1. ABCT Cavalry Troop Command Post 
Appendix C 

C-4 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

Figure C-2. IBCT Cavalry Troop Command Post 
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 C-5 

Figure C-3. SBCT Cavalry Troop Command Post 
This page intentionally left blank. 
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 Glossary-1 

Glossary 

The glossary lists acronyms and terms with Army or joint definitions. Where Army and joint definitions differ, 

(Army) precedes the definition. Terms for which ATP 3-20.97 is the proponent are marked with an asterisk. The 

proponent manual for other terms are listed in parentheses after the definition. 

SECTION I – ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 

1SG first sergeant

ABCT Armored brigade combat team

ADP Army doctrine publication

ADRP Army doctrine reference publication

AO area of operation

ATP Army techniques and procedures

BCT brigade combat team

BFSB battlefield surveillance brigade

CAS close air support

CBRN chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear

COIST company intelligence support team

DTG date-time group

EA engagement area

FBCB2 Force XXI Battle Command, Brigade and Below

FM field manual

FOB forward operating base

FSC fire support cell

GPS Global Positioning System

HHT headquarters and headquarters troop

HMMWV high mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle

IBCT Infantry brigade combat team

IED improvised explosive device

IPB intelligence preparation of the battlefield

JP joint publication

JTAC joint terminal attack controller

KM or km kilometer

LD line of departure

LOGPAC logistics package

LRAS3 Long-Range Advanced Scout Surveillance System

LTIOV latest time information is of value

LZ landing zone

MANPAD Man-Portable Air Defense System

METT-TC mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available-time 

available and civil considerations

MTOE modified table of organization and equipment
Glossary 

Glossary-2 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

NAI named area of interest

NBC nuclear, biological, and chemical

NCO noncommissioned officer

NLT no later than

OBJ objective

OP observation post

OPORD operation order

PIR priority intelligence requirement

PL phase line

POL petroleum, oils, and lubricants

PZ pickup zone

RTE route

ROZ restricted operation zone

S-2 battalion or brigade intelligence staff officer

S-3 battalion or brigade operations staff officer

S-4 battalion or brigade logistics staff officer

SBCT Stryker brigade combat team

SITREP situation report

SOP standard operating procedure

SPOTREP spot report

TAA tactical assembly area

TIRS Terrain Index Reference System

TOW tube launched, optically tracked, wire-guided

UAS Unmanned Aircraft System

XO executive officer

SECTION II – TERMS 

adversary 

A party acknowledged as potentially hostile to a friendly party and against which the use of force may 

be envisaged (JP 3-0). 

area reconnaissance 

A form of reconnaissance that focuses on obtaining detailed information about the terrain of enemy 

activity within a prescribed area (ADRP 3-90). 

area security 

A security task conducted to protect friendly forces, installations routes, and actions within a specific 

area (ADRP 3-90). 

Class I 

Subsistence, water, and gratuitous health and comfort items (JP 4-09). 

Class II 

Clothing, individual equipment, tentage, organizational tool sets and kits, hand tools, unclassified 

maps, administrative and housekeeping supplies and equipment, and chemical, biological, radiological, 

and nuclear (CBRN) equipment (JP 4-09). 
Glossary 

6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 Glossary-3 

Class III 

Petroleum (bulk and packaged), oils, and lubricants (JP 4-09). 

Class IV 

Construction fortification and barrier materiel (JP 4-09). 

Class V 

Ammunition (JP 4-09). 

Class VI 

Personal demand items normally sold through exchanges (JP 4-09). 

Class VII 

Major end items (JP 4-09). 

Class VIII 

Medical materiel, including repair parts peculiar to medical equipment (JP 4-09). 

Class IX 

Repair parts and components (JP 4-09). 

close air support 

Air action by fixed- and rotary-wing aircraft against hostile targets that are in close proximity to 

friendly forces and require detailed integration of each air mission with the fire and movement of those 

forces (JP 3-0). 

counterreconnaissance 

A tactical mission task that encompasses all measures taken by a commander to counter enemy 

reconnaissance and surveillance efforts. Counterreconnaissance is not a distinct mission, but a 

component of all forms of security operations (FM 3-90-1). 

covering force 

A self-contained force capable of operating independently of the main body, unlike a screen or guard 

force, to conduct the cover task (FM 3-90-2). 

enemy 

A party identified as hostile against which the use of force is authorized (ADRP 3-0). 

exfiltration

A tactical mission task where a commander removes Soldiers or units from areas under enemy control 

by stealth, deception, surprise, or clandestine means (FM 3-90-1). 

fire support team 

A field artillery team organic to each maneuver battalion and selected units to plan and coordinate all 

available company supporting fires, including mortars, field artillery, naval surface fire support and 

close air support integration (ADRP 3-09). 

guard 

A security task to protect the main force by fighting to gain time while also observing and reporting 

information and preventing enemy ground observation of and direct fire against the main body. Units 

conducting a guard mission cannot operate independently because they rely upon fires and functional 

and multifunctional support assets of the main body (ADRP 3-90). 

hybrid threat 

The diverse and dynamic combination of regular forces, irregular forces, terrorist forces, and/or 

criminal elements unified to achieve mutually benefitting effects (ADRP 3-0). 

infiltration 

A form of maneuver in which an attacking force conducts undetected movement through or into an 

area occupied by enemy forces to occupy a position of advantage behind those enemy positions while 

exposing only small elements to enemy defensive fires (FM 3-90-1). 
Glossary 

Glossary-4 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

intelligence preparation of the battlefield/battlespace 

A systematic process of analyzing the mission variables of enemy, terrain, weather, and civil 

considerations in an area of interest to determine their effect on operations (ATP 2-01.3). 

mission command

(Army) The exercise of authority and direction by the commander using mission orders to enable 

disciplined initiative within the commander’s intent to empower agile and adaptive leaders in the 

conduct of unified land operations (ADP 6-0). 

neutral 

A party identified as neither supporting nor opposing friendly or enemy forces (ADRP 3-0). 

operational environment 

A composite of the conditions, circumstances, and influences that affect the employment of 

capabilities and bear on the decisions of the commander (JP 3-0). 

reconnaissance handover 

The action that occurs between two elements in order to coordinate the transfer of information and/or 

responsibility for observation of potential threat contact, or the transfer of an assigned area from one 

element to another (FM 3-98). 

reconnaissance in force 

A deliberate combat operation designed to discover or test the enemy’s strength, dispositions, and 

reactions or to obtain other information (ADRP 3-90). 

route reconnaissance 

A directed effort to obtain detailed information of a specified route and all terrain from which the 

enemy could influence movement along that route (ADRP 3-90). 

situational understanding 

The product of applying analysis and judgment to relevant information to determine the relationships 

among the operational and mission variables to facilitate decisionmaking (ADP 5-0). 

special reconnaissance 

Reconnaissance and surveillance actions conducted as a special operation in hostile, denied, or 

politically sensitive environments to collect or verify information of strategic or operational 

significance, employing military capabilities not normally found in conventional forces (JP 3-05). 

threat 

Any combination of actors, entities, or forces that intend to harm United States forces, United States 

national interests, or the homeland (ADRP 3-0). 

Troop leading procedures 

A dynamic process used by small-unit leaders to analyze a mission, develop a plan, and prepare for an 

operation (ADP 5-0). 

zone reconnaissance 

A form of reconnaissance that involves a directed effort to obtain detailed information on all routes, 

obstacles, terrain, and enemy forces within a zone defined by boundaries (ADRP 3-90). 

ZULU 

Time zone indicator for Universal Time (JP 5-0). 
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 References-1 

References 

REQUIRED PUBLICATIONS 

ADRP 1-02. Terms and Military Symbols, 7 December 2015.

JP 1-02. Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms, 8 November 2010.

RELATED PUBLICATIONS 

Most Army publications are available online at http://www.apd.army.mil/.

Other publications are available on the Central Army Registry on the Army Training Network, 

https://atiam.train.army.mil. 

ARMY PUBLICATIONS

ADP 5-0. The Operations Process, 17 May 2012.

ADP 6-0. Mission Command, 17 May 2012. 

ADRP 3-0. Unified Land Operations, 16 May 2012. 

ADRP 3-07. Stability, 31 August 2012. 

ADRP 3-09. Fires, 31 August 2012. 

ADRP 3-90. Offense and Defense, 31 August 2012. 

ADRP 5-0. The Operations Process, 17 May 2012. 

ADRP 6-0. Mission Command, 17 May 2012. 

AR 40-66. Medical Record Administration and Health Care Documentation, 17 June 2008. 

ATP 2-01. Plan Requirements and Assess Collection, 19 August 2014. 

ATP 2-01.3. Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield/Battlespace, 10 November 2014. 

ATP 2-19.4. Brigade Combat Team Intelligence Techniques, 10 February 2015. 

ATP 3-01.94. Army Air and Missile Defense Command Operations, 20 April.

ATP 3-09.42. Fire Support for the Brigade Combat Team, 1 March 2016. 

ATP 3-11.32/MCWP 3-37.2/NTTP 3-11.37. Multi-Service Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for 

Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Passive Defense, 13 May 2016. 

ATP 3-20.96. Cavalry Squadron, 12 May 2016. 

ATP 3-20.98. Reconnaissance Platoon, 5 April 2013. 

ATP 3-34.22. Engineer Operations–Brigade Combat Team and Below, 5 December 2014. 

ATP 3-34.81. Engineer Reconnaissance, 1 March 2016. 

ATP 3-37.10. Base Camps, 26 April 2013. 

ATP 3-53.2. Military Information in Conventional Operations, 7 August 2015. 

ATP 3-60. Targeting, 7 May 2015. 

ATP 4-31. Recovery and Battle Damage Assessment and Repair (BDAR), 27 August 2014. 

ATP 4-44. Water Support Operations, 2 October 2015.

ATTP 3-06.11. Combined Arms Operations in Urban Terrain, 10 June 2011. 

ATTP 3-21.90. Tactical Employment of Mortars, 4 April 2011. 

FM 3-04. Army Aviation, 29 July 2015. 

FM 3-53. Military Information Support Operations, 4 January 2013. 

FM 3-55. Information Collection, 3 May 2013. 

FM 3-90-1. Offense and Defense Volume 1, 22 March 2013. 
References 

References-2 ATP 3-20.97 6HSWHPEHU

FM 3-90-2. Reconnaissance, Security, and Tactical Enabling Tasks Volume 2, 22 March 2013. 

FM 3-98. Reconnaissance and Security Operations, 1 July 2015. 

FM 3-99. Airborne and Air Assault Operations, 6 March 2015. 

FM 4-95. Logistics Operations, 1 April 2014. 

FM 6-0. Commander and Staff Organization and Operations, 5 May 2014. 

FM 27-10. The Law of Land Warfare, 18 July 1956. 

TC 7-100. Hybrid Threat, 26 November 2010. 

TC 7-100.3. Irregular Opposing Forces, 17 January 2014. 

TC 7-100.4. Hybrid Threat Force Structure Organizational Guide, 4 June 2015. 

JOINT AND DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE PUBLICATIONS

Most Joint publications are available online at www.dtic.mil/doctrine/new_pubs/jointpub.htm. 

JP 3-0. Joint Operations, 11 August 2011. 

JP 3-05. Special Operations, 16 July 2014. 

JP 3-09. Joint Fire Support, 12 December 2014.

JP 3-09.3. Close Air Support, 25 November 2014. 

JP 4-01.5. Joint Terminal Operations, 2 November 2015. 

JP 4-09, Distribution Operations, 19 December 2013. 

JP 5-0, Joint Operation Planning, 11 August 2011. 

PRESCRIBED FORMS 

This section contains no entries. 

REFERENCED FORMS 

Unless otherwise indicated, DA forms are available on the Army Publishing Directorate (APD) web site 

(www.apd.army.mil). 

DA Form 1156, Casualty Feeder Card. 

DA Form 1594, Daily Staff Journal or Duty Officer’s Log.

DA Form 2028, Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms. 

DA Form 5988-E, Equipment Maintenance and Inspection Worksheet (EGA).
6HSWHPEHU ATP 3-20.97 Index-1 

Index 

Entries are listed by paragraph number, unless mentioned otherwise. 

A

ABCT Cavalry troop. 1-18

aerial insertion. 3-83

area security. 5-281, 4-52, 4-50

armorer and supply specialist. 

2-68

aviation. 6-43, 6-40

close air support. 6-55, 6-50

B

BFSB Cavalry troop. 1-31

C

CBRN NCO. 2-66

combat formations. 3-104 

coil. 3-114 

column. 3-105 

herringbone. 3-115

staggered. 3-106 

troop line. 3-107 

troop vee. 3-108 

troop wedge. 3-112 

commander. 3-2, 2-49

communications sergeant. 2-61

company intelligence support 

team. 2-62

concept of operations. 2-39, 

2-25

convoy security. 4-58

covering force. 4-49

criminal organizations. 1-10

D

depth. 4-14

E

engineer 

reconnaissance team. 6-4 

event template. 2-22 

execution matrix. 2-21

executive officer. 7-8, 2-53

exfiltration. 3-87, 3-62

extraction. 3-91

methods. 3-90

planning. 3-88, 3-67

F

fire support team. 6-7, 2-58

first sergeant. 7-9, 2-54

first-aid procedures. 7-66

G

global positioning systems. 

3-56

I

IBCT Cavalry troop. 1-21

infiltration. 3-65, 3-62

execution. 3-76

order of movement. 3-77

planning. 3-67

single lane. 3-84

irregular forces. 1-9 

L

local security. 4-73

M

maintenance team chief. 2-65

medics. 2-64

mission, enemy, terrain and 

weather, troops and support 

available, time available, and 

civil considerations 

(METT-TC). 1-4 

mortar section sergeant. 2-60

moving screen. 5-24, 5-5, 4-29

O

orders. 2-37

format. 2-39

techniques. 2-46

verbal. 2-42

written. 2-43

P

platoon sergeant. 7-11, 2-57

R

reconnaissance 

aerial. 3-11

area. 5-317, 3-51

by fire. 3-14

dismounted. 3-7 

fires. 3-48

four methods of. 3-6 

guidance. 3-18

handover. 3-118 

in force. 5-51, 3-99

in support of stability tasks. 

5-308

mounted. 3-9 

route. 5-203, 3-97, 3-94

special. 3-116 

techniques. 3-3 

tempo. 3-22

zone. 5-86, 3-27

regular forces. 1-8 

resupply 

aerial. 7-55

emergency. 7-59

prestock. 7-56

service station method. 

7-53

tailgate method. 7-50

route security. 4-63

procedures. 4-70

techniques. 4-66

S

SBCT Cavalry troop. 1-28

scheme of fires. 2-25

Scout platoon leader. 2-55

Scout platoons. 1-36

security mission. 4-6 

security operation 

guard. 4-45

squadron guard. 5-129 

stability. 5-249

stationary screen. 4-16

supply sergeant. 7-10, 2-67

T

target acquisition systems. 

6-25

troop leading procedures. 2-4 

troop mortars. 6-18, 6-8 

types of Cavalry troops. 1-21

dismounted. 1-25

mounted. 1-22

U

Unmanned Aircraft System. 

5-318, 5-234, 5-158, 4-72, 

4-67, 4-29, 3-122, 3-65, 3-11

W

warfighting function. 5-39, 2-3 
This page intentionally left blank. 
By Order of the Secretary of the Army

0$5.$0,//(<

General, United States Army

Chief of Staff 

Official:

GERALD B. O’KEEFE

Administrative Assistant to the 

Secretary of the Army



DISTRIBUTION:

$FWLYH$UP\$UP\1DWLRQDO*XDUGDQG86$UP\5HVHUYH7REHGLVWULEXWHGLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHLQLWLDO

GLVWULEXWLRQQXPEHU,'1UHTXLUHPHQWVIRU$73

$73

6HSWHPEHU
PIN: -0